105 GC6 Low NOx

BULLETIN 6002
8B
PARKER BOILER CO.

STEAM BOILER OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IMPORTANT: With each boiler, the Manufacturer furnishes a complete set of Installation Instructions
for the Installer and a complete set of Operation & Maintenance Instructions for the owner. Instructions for the
owner includes a plastic enclosed Operating Instructions and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. BE
SURE THE OPERATION & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ARE LEFT FOR THE OWNER. These
instructions should be kept near the boiler in a protected place available for quick reference.
INSTALLATION: In order to receive the best results from the boiler system, it is essential that the boiler
be properly installed and correctly operated. Be sure to review the Guide on Proper Installation and Boiler
Operation. The General Basic Installation Instructions, Specific Installation Instructions with Drawings #1 and
#2, the Floor Plan Drawing and Specification Sheet are excellent guides to proper installation. The Installation
Check-off Sheet and Final Check-off and Start-up Sheets should be properly filled out to be certain that all
items of installation have been properly performed.
OPERATION: Before operating the boiler, carefully review the Operating Instructions and the Burner
Control System. Be sure that the installation conforms to Manufacturer's Standards and that the electrical and
fuel supply are correct as specified. Do not attempt to start boiler without reading the Operating Instructions.
On the initial lighting of the boiler, remove the cabinet door and test the boiler for safe ignition and proper control
operation. Each boiler has been factory fire tested, but all burners and safety controls should be carefully
checked and tested because of possible change due to shipping vibration. Be sure the low water cut-offs
safely shut off the fuel supply on low water. Before putting the boiler into service, blowoff the boiler several
times until the boiler water is clean.
MAINTENANCE: The Manufacturer is sincerely interested in each Parker Boiler installation and wishes to
co-operate in every way possible so that the best in operating life and efficiency will be experienced. A proper
Water Treatment, Blowoff and Maintenance Program must be provided to assure a successful long life
operation. Each boiler is furnished with two water sample bottles and we urge each customer to send an initial
sample for analysis and recommendations and another sample once the recommended water treatment
program has instituted. This service is provided at no charge to the customer. For water treatment
recommendations, see Bulletins 1001-B and 1002, and 101-5DD. A proper Boiler Blowoff Program is
necessary and should be performed in accordance with the Boiler Blowoff Instructions. The Weekly
Maintenance Report and Quarterly Inspection Report serve as excellent guides for the recommended periodic
maintenance.
APPROVALS: Your boiler has been furnished in accordance with Standard Code Requirements and a
Manufacturer's Data Report is mailed to you under separate cover. If this has not been received, immediately
write to the Manufacturer for a copy, as this should be kept on hand at all times readily available for the Boiler
Inspector. DO NOT PERMIT ANY CHANGE IN THE DESIGN OF THE BOILER OR CONTROL SYSTEM
UNLESS APPROVED BY PARKER BOILER CO. If there is any question by the Inspector with reference to
construction, controls, or installation, immediately contact the Manufacturer for their assistance or approval
before any recommended changes are considered.
Please contact the Manufacturer or Representative if any additional information is desired.
PARKER BOILER CO.

5930 BANDINI BOULEVARD
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90040
PHONE: 323-727-9800
FAX: 323-722-2848
E-MAIL: sales@parkerboiler.com
www.parkerboiler.com
6002.DOC
BULLETIN 6001
8B
NOTICE ON SHIPMENTS AND FIELD SERVICE CHARGES
I. SHIPMENTS:
ACCEPTANCE OF SHIPMENTS:
Upon arrival, carefully inspect all shipments for apparent shortages and damage. Check and
compare actual goods received with delivery receipt. If any goods are missing or damaged, be
sure this is noted on delivery receipt before accepting shipment and signing delivery receipt.
Then, file immediate claim with carrier for amount of loss or damage.
CONCEALED DAMAGE:
Should any damage not be discovered until after the goods are unpacked, immediately report this
to the delivery carrier. The carrier will make an inspection and will prepare a "Loss and Damage
Claim Form" covering the damage.
FOR YOUR PROTECTION, EXAMINE THE GOODS:
Our liability on shipments ceases when we obtain a signed Bill of Lading from the carrier indicating
shipment has been received by them in proper condition for transportation. All shipments made by
this Company are F.O.B. Factory, and we are in no way responsible for delivery of goods by the
carrier. We will assist any customer in collecting claims against the carrier for loss or damage to
shipments; however, for us to be of assistance, the customer must have inspected the shipment
and received an acknowledgement of the loss or damage from the carrier.
GOODS RETURNED WITHOUT PERMISSION WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED FOR CREDIT:
Before returning any goods to the Manufacturer for credit, it is important to obtain approval and use
the "Return Material Card" for proper identification. Card should be attached to goods being
returned.
II. FIELD SERVICE:
AREA SERVICE:
Consult the Parker Area Representative. If not available, consult Factory.
FOR FACTORY SERVICE:

Available from Los Angeles.
Consult Factory for service rates and charges.
PARKER BOILER CO.

5930 BANDINI BOULEVARD
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90040
PHONE: 323-727-9800
FAX: 323-722-2848
E-MAIL: sales@parkerboiler.com
OI 101-210 GB6 or GC6
7C
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
PARKER GAS FIRED STEAM OR HOT WATER BOILERS WITH GB6 OR GC6 CONTROL SYSTEMS
I. STEPS IN STARTING THE BOILER:
1. CLOSE MAIN AND PILOT GAS COCKS AND WAIT 5 MINUTES.
2. TO LIGHT:(Do not attempt to light pilot with main downstream gas cock open).
A. Turn on electricity. Turn off main burner switch. Open upstream gas cock, but leave main downstream gas
cock closed. Manual reset controls, if furnished, must be reset.
B. With control power on, water level safe, and limit safe, open small pilot gas cock and turn on main burner
switch. The flame safeguard is energized and the burner startup sequence begins. See Sequence of
Operation Sheet for complete details.
C. The pilot will automatically ignite and the "Pilot On" light will turn on. With pilot safely on, immediately open
the main downstream gas cock near the burner. If this cock is not opened, the system will turn off on safety
lockout.
D. The "Burner On" light will turn on and the boiler is ready for normal operation. During normal operation the
flame safeguard will supervise the main burner flame. The pilot and "Pilot On" light will be off.
3. IF BURNER LOCKS OUT, RESET FLAME SAFEGUARD AND REPEAT ABOVE INSTRUCTIONS. For further
details, see instructions below and Flame Safeguard Bulletin.
4. DAILY ROUTINE CHECK ALL SAFETY CONTROLS.
CAUTION: DO NOT MANUALLY HOLD IN FLAME SAFEGUARD; SERIOUS HAZARD RESULTS
WARNING: ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD ATTEMPT TO START UP, ADJUST OR REPAIR
THIS UNIT. NEVER BYPASS ANY SAFETY CONTROL.
II. SHUTDOWN INSTRUCTIONS:
1. Turn off the main burner switch.

2. Check flame to see that main and pilot burners are off.
3. Manually close the main downstream gas cock nearest the burner.
4. Manually close the pilot gas cock.
5. Turn off electricity to boiler.
III. BURNER FAILURE INSTRUCTIONS:

If boiler ceases to fire or refuses to start:
1. Manually close main and pilot gas cocks, reset button on flame safeguard and follow above instructions.
2. If a pilot failure, low water condition or high limit condition has caused the boiler to shut down, do not place the
boiler back in operation until the cause of the shutdown has been determined and corrected. If a flame failure
occurs, always close main and pilot gas cocks and wait at least 5 minutes to assure an adequate purge before
attempting to restart boiler.
3. Check water level, safety and limit controls.
4. Check electric supply and fuse box or circuit breakers.
5. Check gas supply.
6. The proper positioning of the flame rod is very critical as it must be in a position to adequately detect both the pilot
and main burner flame. See Bulletin on pilot.
7. Review Sequence of Operation, Burner Control System and Flame Safeguard Instruction Sheets.
8. If the boiler still fails, call in competent service personnel.
9. Do not tamper with controls or adjustment except under supervision of qualified personnel.
NOTE: The main downstream gas cock is the one on the burner manifold after the electric gas valves nearest the
burner.
INSTRUCTIONS\OI-GC6.DOC
S.O. 101-210 GB6 or GC6
7C
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
GB6 OR GC6 CONTROL SYSTEM WITH M1R OR RM7890
PARKER-LITE SEQUENCE INDICATOR & INTERRUPTED PILOT
I. CONTROL POWER ON:
With the electrical switches turned "On", the indicator light "Control Power on" should be on. This
indicates electrical power to the boiler controls and that the boiler is ready for operation.
If this does not come on, check switches, fuses or circuit breakers, improper electrical supply, broken,
loose or dirty electrical connections. If a door interlock is furnished, be certain the boiler control panel
door is tightly shut so that door interlock is energized.
II. WATER SAFE:
With the control power on a circuit to the water control is energized. If there is a safe water level in the
boiler, the "Water Level Safe" indicator light will turn on. NOTE: If a manual reset type low water cutoff is
used, it may first be necessary to reset the control before the light will turn on.
III. LIMIT SAFE:
With power on, and water level safe, the circuit to the limit controls is energized. The gas cock at the gas
inlet must be open to energize the low gas pressure switch and it must be manual reset. If the
temperature (or pressure) in the boiler is below the high limit setting and the gas pressure is within the
setting of the high and low gas pressure switches, the "Limit Safe" indicator light will turn on. The high
limit and gas pressure switches may require manual reset if they cycle off.
IV. PILOT ON AND BURNER ON:
With power on, water level safe, limit safe, and the main burner switch on, a circuit is energized to the
operating control. If the operating control is calling for heat, the circuit to the flame safeguard is
completed and the following sequence takes place:
BURNER STARTUP
1. Pilot valve and ignition transformer are energized from flame safeguard through interrupted pilot time
delay relay. "Pilot On" indicator light will be on.
2. Pilot flame must be proven within 10 seconds or pilot and ignition will turn off and safety lockout will
occur within 15 seconds. If a safety lockout alarm is furnished, it will sound.
3. If pilot is proven, the main electric gas valves are energized. Pilot and ignition turn off. "Pilot On"
indicator light will turn off. Main burner flame must be proven or lockout occurs. "Burner On"
indicator light will be on.
4. Burner operates until heat demand is satisfied.
BURNER SHUTDOWN
1. Burner turns off when operating control is satisfied. Electric gas valves close.
2. The "Pilot On" and "Burner On" light will be off and the other lights will remain on. If other indicator
lights are not on, the highest light off indicates which failure has caused the boiler to safely
shutdown.
INSTRUCTIONS\SO-GC6.DOC
BCS 101-210 GC6
PAGE 1 OF 2
9C
BURNER CONTROL SYSTEM GC6

PARKER GAS FIRED STEAM OR HOT WATER BOILERS
FIREYE M SERIES WITH MP560 OR MEP560 PROGRAMMER OR
HONEYWELL RM7895C SERIES FLAME SAFEGUARD WITH INTERRUPTED PILOT
1. FLAME SAFETY SYSTEM:

The Flame Safety System consists of a Flame Safeguard (Fireye M Series with MP560 or MEP560
programmer or a Honeywell RM7895C with a flame rod to provide instant automatic 100% shutoff on
pilot-main flame failure. The electronic combustion safeguard control is especially designed for
instantaneous flame detection. Flame supervision is provided by the flame rod in an exclusive electronic
flame rectification circuit wherein short circuits or grounds cannot simulate the presence of a flame.
Whenever the boiler is firing, the pilot or main burner flame is supervised. Should a flame failure occur,
the main burner is instantly shut down within 4 seconds. The system then goes out on safety lockout
and the button on the flame safeguard must be manually reset (with power to the control) before the
boiler may be restarted. During operation, whenever the operating control or any safety or limit control
breaks its circuit, the main burner turns off. On the next call for heat, the pilot will automatically ignite and
once it is safely proven by the electronic control, the main burner will turn on. After 10 seconds, the pilot
and ignition will automatically turn off and the Flame Safeguard will supervise the main burner flame.
2. IGNITION SYSTEM:
The Ignition System consists of an Electric Pilot Valve, high voltage Ignition Transformer, and a spark
ignition electrode, which will automatically ignite the pilot. When there is a call for heat, the flame
safeguard energizes the pilot valve and ignition transformer to produce an intense spark, which will
readily ignite the pilot. Once the pilot flame has been safely ignited and proven, ignition ceases and
remains off until the next cycle by the flame safeguard.
3. PILOT BURNER:
A Honeywell Q179 Pilot Burner Igniter and Flame Rod-Sensor is used to automatically ignite the main
burner whenever the gas is turned on and all safety and limit controls are energized. This system
employs an interrupted pilot, which is lighted automatically each time there is a call for heat. The pilot is
turned off automatically after igniting the main burner at the end of the main burner flame trial for ignition
period. It remains off until the next cycle by the flame safeguard.
4. ELECTRIC GAS VALVE(S):

The Electric Gas Valves are electrically operated valves installed on the burner manifold for the purpose
of shutting off all gas flow to the burner except the pilot. The valves are wired for 115 volt, single phase
operation. Both gas valves are wired in series with all the safety and limit controls so that in the event of
low water, pilot failure, main flame failure, electrical failure, or high limit, they will automatically shut off the
main flow of gas, thereby, preventing a hazardous condition from occurring in the boiler. For further
details, see Bulletin on particular valve.
5. LOW WATER CUTOFF:

All Boilers are furnished with a probe type low water cutoff. A separate secondary low water cutoff is
recommended on all boilers and standard on all steam boilers. The low water cutoff is wired in series
with the electric gas valves to shut off the main burner on a low water experience. This control is very
reliable having no moving parts on the water side. If a float type control is furnished, it should be regularly
flushed and cleaned. One manual reset control is furnished. It is necessary to reset this control any time
a low water condition occurs. For further details, see Bulletin on this control.
BCS 101-210 GC6
PAGE 2 OF 2
9C
6. LOW WATER ALARM - STANDARD ON 70-150 HP STEAM BOILERS ONLY:

If a Low Water Alarm is furnished, it is wired in conjunction with the low water cutoffs to automatically
sound whenever a low water condition exists in the boiler. The alarm should sound whenever electricity
is applied to the boiler and on steam boilers when there is no water level visible in the gauge glass.
Boilers 70 to 150 HP are furnished with an alarm horn. When required, the same alarm is also used to
indicate "safety lockout" of the flame safeguard. The same alarm is also used to indicate a high water
condition when a high water alarm is required and furnished.
The alarm may be silenced by turning the Main Burner Switch to the "Off" position so that the cause of
the alarm may be corrected. When the alarm is silenced in this manner, the burner will also be turned
off. When refilling steam boilers after blowdown, the main burner switch may be turned off and the boiler
feed pump can be energized without the burner turning on.
7. PUMP CONTROL & MOTOR STARTING RELAY --STEAM BOILERS ONLY:

The Pump Control is wired in conjunction with the boiler feed pump to inject water into the boiler as
required. The pump control energizes the pump until water reaches the normal water level height. The
pump is re-energized any time the water level drops to the pump start level. Boilers 70 to 150 HP are
furnished with two pump controls. The pump controls are wired to first start pump #1 on a drop of water
level and then Pump #2 if the water level continues to drop.
A Pump Motor Starting Relay is furnished as a means of switching on the heavy current load of each
Boiler Water Feed Pump with the contacts available in the water level pump control. If a Pump Motor
Starter with heaters is furnished, be certain that the proper sized heaters are installed to protect the
pump motor from overloads. For further details, see Bulletin 123 MSR.
8. OPERATING & HIGH LIMIT CONTROLS:

All boilers are furnished with separate high limit and operating controls. Steam boilers are furnished with
pressure controls. Hot water Boilers are furnished with temperature controls. See separate Bulletin for
proper setting of these controls.
9. OTHER TRIM:
The Boiler Controls Switch is furnished for convenience in electrically shutting off the boiler controls
circuit. CAUTION--HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK: The Boiler Controls Switch does not shut off all
electricity to the panel box. A Main Line Disconnect Switch, with fused disconnect or circuit breakers,
must be installed and turned "OFF" whenever servicing the panel.
All Boilers Controls are standard for 115 Volt operation. When 3 Phase pump service (or 230 Volt, single
Phase) is used, a Control Transformer is furnished to reduce boiler control voltage to 115 Volts. The
boiler control circuit is then protected from over-current and short circuits by a circuit breaker or a fuse.
If a door interlock is furnished, it turns off the boiler control circuit whenever the panel door is open. It
does not shut off all electricity to the panel box. Be certain that the panel door is tightly shut so this
interlock is energized or the boiler will not turn on.
WARNING: ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD ATTEMPT TO STARTUP, ADJUST

OR REPAIR THIS UNIT. NEVER BYPASS ANY SAFETY CONTROL.
P\BCSGC6.DOC
SPC 101-105-I-V
8D
STEAM PRESSURE CONTROLS
The steam pressure in the boiler is controlled by adjusting the following controls.
1. High Limit Control – Honeywell L404 Pressuretrol – Standard All Boilers:

The H L404 High Limit Control (16B) is furnished to shut off the main burner if the pressure in the
boiler rises above the setting of the operating control and it fails to operate. The large screw on
top of the pressuretrol is for the pressure indicator setting. This control should be set to shut off
approximately 5 PSI above the operating control (low pressure boilers 14 PSI maximum) and
always at least 10% below the pressure setting of the safety valve. This control is furnished with
manual reset. If this control shuts down the boiler, the operator shall not place the boiler back in
operation until the cause of the shutdown has been determined and corrected. The indicator
settings on all pressure controls are approximations and if a more accurate control is required, the
pressuretrol should be set with a reference to an accurate pressure gage.
2. Operating Control – Honeywell L404 Pressuretrol – Standard All Boilers:

The H L404 Operating Control (16C) is furnished to shut off the main burner if the pressure in the
boiler rises above the desired operating pressure. This control should be set to shut off
approximately 5 PSI above the desired operating pressure (low pressure boiler 13 PSI maximum).
This can be accomplished by setting the "MAIN" pressure indicator (right scale) at these settings
and the "DIFF" differential indicator (left scale) for 5 PSI on high pressure boilers (except on
boilers equipped with A21 regulator, the "DIFF" scale should be set for 15 PSI). On low pressure
boilers the "DIFF" scale should be set for approximately 3 PSI. The pressuretrol will turn off at the
"MAIN" scale setting and turn back on at the "MAIN" setting minus the "DIFF" setting. The shut off
pressure must always be at least 10% below the pressure of the safety valve and be below the
high limit setting. The large screw on top of the pressuretrol is for the "MAIN" pressure indicator
setting and the smaller screw is for the differential indicator setting.
3. Modulating Control – Superior A21B Regulator:
Standard: Atmospheric Gas Fired Boilers 50 HP and Smaller

the control consists of Model A21B Superior Steam Pressure Gas Regulator (7SPGR) installed on
the burner side of the electric gas valve for purpose of modulating the burner flame to
automatically obtain the desired steam pressure. The large adjusting screw on top of the regulator
should be set for the desired steam pressure with the approximate regulation being 5 PSI for each
1/4 turn. The pressure is increased by "screwing in" clockwise and decreased by "screwing out"
counterclockwise. The adjusting screw on the side of the regulator is for the purpose of controlling
the low fire and should be properly set so that all burners stay on low fire when the regulator
reaches its pressure setting. The low fire should never be set below 1" WC. This screw has been
pre-adjusted at the factory and adjustment should not be necessary. If adjustment is necessary,
precaution should be taken to adjust this for a proper minimum flame and care should be taken in
turning this screw, as this is a very sensitive adjustment. Too high a low fire will result in
exceeding the desired pressure setting. Too low a fire will result in lighting problems and
carbonizing of the burner. All lock nuts should be securely tightened after making any
adjustments. For further details, see Bulletin 128.
SPC 101-105-I-V.DOC
SPC 101-105-I-V
8D
STEAM PRESSURE CONTROLS

(CONTINUED)
4. Modulating Control – Honeywell L91 Pressuretrol:
Standard: Atmospheric Natural Gas Fired Boilers 70 HP and Larger

Gas/Oil Fired Boilers 16 HP and Larger – Oil Fired 150 HP
The H L91B Modulating Pressuretrol (16E) is wired in conjunction with the modulating gas valve
(7EGM) to control the steam pressure in the boiler by modulating the main burning firing. The
control should be set 5 PSI below the desired operating pressure (low pressure boiler
approximately 10 PSI) by adjusting the "MAIN" scale setting with the large screw on top of the
case. The "DIFF" differential scale (small screw) should be set at "B". The differential scale is
additive. With these settings the boiler will operate on high fire until pressure comes to the main
scale setting. The boiler will then begin to modulate to the low fire setting.* IF the pressure
continues to rise the operating control will eventually turn off the boiler.
5. High-Low Fire Control – Honeywell L404 Pressuretrol:
Standard: Atmospheric Propane Fired Boilers 15 HP and Larger

Oil & Gas/Oil Fired Boilers 16 – 115 HP
The H L404 High-Low Fire Control (16D) is wired in conjunction with the high fire fuel valve(s) to
control the steam pressure in the boiler by reducing the main burner to low fire. This control
should be set at the desired operating pressure (low pressure boiler approximately 10 PSI) by
adjusting the "MAIN" scale setting with the large screw on top of the case. The "DIFF" differential
scale (small screw) should be set for 5 PSI (3 PSI on low pressure boilers). With these settings the
pressuretrol will turn the burner to low fire* at the "MAIN" scale setting and turn back to high fire at
the "MAIN" minus the "DIFF" setting.
6. Operating Control Low Pressure Night Control – Honeywell L404 – Optional:

The H L404 Operating Control Low Pressure (16CLP) may be optionally provided on high
pressure boilers to operate the boiler at low pressure. This control is wired in series with the
operating and high limit controls through a selector switch. The "MAIN" scale is set at 15 PSI and
the "DIFF" scale is set at 10 PSI. With these settings and the selector switch in the "low" position,
the boiler will operate between 5 and 15 PSI on off/on firing. With the switch in the "high" position,
the Operating Control Low Pressure is bypassed and the boiler will operate on its regular operating
controls. The selector switch has a center "Off" position. Always completely turn switch to high or
low position for operation.
NOTE: The above are recommended settings but the actual settings depend upon the load and
operating conditions and should be adjusted in the field for best results to match requirements of
the particular application.
*WARNING:
On Atmospheric Gas Fired Boilers, never adjust the low fire setting of the gas valve below these
minimum values:
Natural Gas - 1" W.C. minimum

Propane Gas - 11" W.C. minimum
These are the minimum safe operating gas pressures at the burner.
SPC 101-105-I-V.DOC
Bulletin 101-5DD
8C
WATER TREATMENT DO'S & DON'TS
DO: DON'T:
1. Establish a comprehensive water treatment Assume everything will be OK.
program consisting of: soft water, chemical
treatment, monitored blowdowns, regular
water sample analysis & internal tube
inspections.
2. Use soft water 100% of the time. Use City water if hardness exceeds 2 grains
per gallon (34.2 ppm).
3. Use a proper Boiler Water Treatment for your Just read the instructions on the chemical
application. container, contact the Manufacturer for their
recommendations.
4. Add Boiler Water Treatment by an Automatic Batch treat chemical as this will not provide
Chemical Feed System. Contact your uniform chemical levels in the boiler throughout
Chemical Supplier for their recommendation. operating period.
5. Blowdown boiler to maintain TDS between Make a complete blowdown at end of operating
2600 ppm (3600 micromhos/cm)-3200 ppm period as this may lead to serious oxygen
(4600 micromhos/cm). Partial blowdowns corrosion problems or leave the boiler dry after
during the shift should normally be adequate. blowdown.
If complete blowdowns are required,
complete blowdowns should be made in the
morning or during normal operating period.
6. Regular Water Analysis at a minimum of once Just assume you're doing a good job of
a month to confirm Water Treatment Program protecting your boiler. The Supplier of your
is correct. Do insist on a monthly Water Boiler Water Treatment will normally test your
Analysis from your Supplier. boiler water at no charge.
7. Regular internal inspections. Most States Ignore inspections even if your boiler is exempt
require an annual inspection to determine from Operating Permits and internal
what condition the internal water side of the inspections. We would strongly recommend
boiler is in. This is for your benefit and may you do the internal inspection to confirm that
prevent expensive repairs. your Water Treatment Program is providing
adequate protection from scale build-up, sludge
accumulation and corrosion failures.
Refer to Bulletin 1001B, 1001C and Blowdown instructions for additional information.
101-5DD.DOC
BULLETIN 101-5DD
PAGE 2 1E3
SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR LAUNDRY, DRY-CLEANINGS, OR TEXTILE APPLICATION
Following a proper Boiler Water Treatment Program is essential to ensuring satisfactory performance and durability of
your Steam Boiler System. In order to maintain an appropriate treatment program, the following guidelines should be
adhered to:
1. Use soft water, not to exceed two grains hardness at any time (4 grains hardness if over 50% condensate return).
2. The proper Boiler Water Treatment must be used to prevent corrosion. The Treatment must be able to
maintain a Ph of 10-11.5. Include an oxygen scavenger (Sulfite levels 40-100 PPM) and treat for any residual
hardness. The Treatment should also provide a metal coating ability.
3. The Boiler Water Treatment must be added uniformly throughout the operating day. In any application where "live
steam" is used (i.e. garment presses, etc.), adding chemical once or twice per day will not provide the proper corrosion
protection (batch treating). A proportioning pump or device is required. Boiler blowoffs may be required on a daily
basis. We recommend a total range of 2600-3200 parts per million (or 3600-4600 micromhos/cm), total dissolved
solids (TDS), in order to protect the boiler from sludge accumulation and scale build up. Normally, partial blowoffs
are adequate and should be performed during the beginning of the operating period. However, the number of partial
blowoffs for your particular boiler installation can only be determined by regular boiler water analysis. Should your
water analysis indicate a complete blowoff is necessary, the same should be made at the beginning of the operation.
Important: Complete blowoffs should not be made at the end of the day, as this could cause an oxygen
corrosion failure. Blowing out good, de-oxygenated water at the end of the day and allowing cold, raw, mostly
untreated, aerated water to sit in the boiler during idle periods, only accelarates the process of corrosion.
Typically, in a dry-cleaning, laundry or textile establishment, running a 35-40 hr. work week, would only
require one complete blowoff per week. This is ideally done before the middle of shift on Mondays or at the
beginning of the week. The remainder of the week would then only require the performance of partial blowoffs
before the middle of the shift. Thereafter, blowoffs will be based upon water analysis.
4. Regular Water Analysis of the boiler water must be performed to assure the Boiler Water Treatment Program is
working properly. We recommend a water analysis a minimum of once per month.
5. Internally inspect the new boiler tubing every three months. On new boiler installations, we feel this is very important
to confirm the Treatment Program is appropriate. On a Parker Boiler, the inspection will take less than ½-hour and is
well worth the effort. After confirming proper treatment, refer to Bulletin Qtr. 101-5 for normal frequency.
Today, many businesses that operate steam boilers opt to purchase their boiler chemicals from local supply
companies that service their particular Industry. This may be a very convenient and economical source of supply.
However, in a recent review, we found that for a 9.5 HP boiler, the cost of monthly Boiler Water Treatments through
local supply companies was equal to the annual cost of treatments purchased through a Chemical Manufacturer. In
addition, Boiler Water Treatment companies will provide monthly Water Analyses and Chemical Feed Systems. A
monthly analysis is the only method that will determine if the chemical treatment and program you are using are
correct for your application and boiler system. Also, please note that any failure that is due to an improper water
condition is not covered by any Warranty.
Should you decide to purchase your Boiler Water Treatment from one of your Industry's local supply companies, we
recommend that you inquire about the use of the chemical, the method of adding, and most importantly, be sure to
ask how your boiler water may be tested. In most cases, you will be required to supply the water sample but the
analysis of same will be performed at no charge by the Chemical Manufacturer.
I hope this information proves useful in receiving the maximum life from your newly installed Parker Boiler. With
proper care, I assure you that your steam boiler will provide you with many years of excellent service. If I can help
in any other way, please do not hesitate to call.
W:\Bulletin\Water Treatment\Supplemental inst. for laundry, dry clng, txtle apps.doc

BULLETIN 101-5
Page 1 of 2 8C
GUIDE ON PROPER BOILER OPERATION
PARKER STEAM BOILERS
The Manufacturer has prepared this Bulletin as a Guide for Users of Parker Steam Boilers to Summarize the Basic
Requirements that are necessary for proper Installation, Operation and Long Life Boiler Service. A complete set of
Installation Instructions, Operating Instructions and an Operation and Maintenance Manual are furnished with each Boiler. Be
sure to review these completely and follow Instructions as applicable.
The Parker Boiler is recognized as one of the safest and most economical operating Steam Boilers. The Boiler is known as
one of the least complicated and easiest to operate and maintain. As with any Steam Boiler System, these Basic
Requirements are necessary and must be followed if long life and economical service are to be obtained.
1. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION: Carefully read the General Basic Installation Instructions, the specific Installation
Instructions, Floor Plan Drawings and the Installation Check-off Sheets.
2. PROPER INSTALLATION: Be certain the Boiler is installed in compliance with the prevailing Codes and in
accordance with the Manufacturer's minimum recommendations as outlined in the above mentioned Bulletins.
Installation and operating permits must be obtained from the local Inspection Jurisdiction. Competent installation
personnel should always be used.
3. BLOWDOWN AND DRAIN LINES: Be certain that the Boiler is installed with the required and proper size blowdown
lines and blowdown tank. Since the Parker Boiler may require blowdown at full operating pressure on a periodic
schedule, it is necessary that the blowdown tank and lines not be restrictive.
4. FINAL INSTALLATION CHECK: At completion of installation, the Manufacturer's Installation & Startup Check-off
Sheets should be filled out to be certain that installation conditions are proper before operating the boiler.
5. WATER TREATING PROGRAM: This is one of the most Important Items of Consideration in Boiler Operation.
Carefully review Water Treating Bulletins No. 1001-B & 1001-C.
The Manufacturer recommends the services of local water treating firms that are competent and knowledgeable
providing they comply with the Manufacturer's standards and offer a regular monthly follow-up water analysis service.
The Basic Water Treating Program must include the following:
A. An initial water sample and analysis must be taken of the raw water supply to determine the water treating
program. See Water Sample Instruction 1002.
B. A water softener should be installed in addition to the chemical treatment system if calcium carbonate or
limestone hardness exceeds 3 gpg with no condensate return or 4 gpg with more than 50% condensate
return. Softener should be regularly regenerated any time hardness exceeds one grain per gallon.
C. The proper boiler water treatment should be used consistently, uniformly and adequately as determined from
the water analysis. The boiler water treatment must meet the Manufacturer's standards of Bulletin 1001-B.
The treatment must be used to maintain a satisfactory pH between 10.0 to 11.5. It must include an oxygen
scavenger, provide a protective metal coating and treat for hardness or other conditions determined from the
analysis.
D. The compound must be added in adequate quantities uniformly throughout the shift. An automatic chemical
feed system should be purchased or included with your chemicals so these chemicals are induced into the
feedwater line or the condensate holding tank as recommended by your chemical supplier. We recommend
these chemicals be introduced as far before the boiler as possible to also protect the feed tank and feed lines.
E. The plant should also purchase a conductivity meter and water test kit to be familiar with the treatment and
confirm proper chemical levels in the boiler.
F. Plant personnel should run a conductivity test and sulfite test daily before blowdown until a pattern develops.
A log should be kept to record the data (i.e. Parker Bulletin 1001-C) and filed for future reference. The
blowdown frequency and chemical usage can be set from this information. Once this pattern is developed,
set a pattern of testing for two or three days a week (testing should take a maximum of only 20 minutes).
G. Water sample containers, convenient for mailing, are available upon request. Water Analysis are furnished by
the Manufacturer as explained in Bulletin 1002.
6. BLOWDOWN PROGRAM: The boiler must be blown down as recommended in the Daily Boiler Blowdown Instruction
sheet. Parker Boilers can be either completely blowndown or partially blowndown. The type of blowdown and
frequency of blowdown needs to be set for a particular job based on make-up water conditions, amount of condensate
return, boiler load, and the chemical analysis of the boiler water. An initial blowdown schedule should be
recommended by the chemical supplier and this schedule should be adjusted as necessary based on the chemical
analysis of the boiler water and the water treatment program.
BULLETIN 101-5
Page 2 of 2 8C
The total concentrated solids (TDS) in the boiler should be between 2600-3200 PPM (3600-4600 micromhos/cm) and
the blowdowns must be regulated not to exceed this safe limit. Boiler should always be refilled with water after
blowdowns and not left dry. In cold environments, protect boiler from freezing.
7. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: The Operating Instructions must be followed as outlined in the Operating Instruction
Sheet.
8. DAILY CHECK ON LOW WATER CUTOFF: The low water cutoff should be checked daily and each time the boiler is
blown down to be certain that it properly shuts off the fuel supply on a low water level.
9. SAFETY CONTROL CHECKS: A regular pattern of checking all the boiler safety controls should be established.
Refer to yearly, quarterly and weekly maintenance report sheets and tune-up sheets.
10. RETURN TANK: The Return Tank and strainer should be inspected every 90 days and cleaned or flushed as
required. This is important to prevent any sediment accumulation from entering the pump or boiler.
11. BOILER WATER FEED PUMP: Burks Pumps do not require packing or lubrication. Current models have sealed
permanently lubricated motor bearings when manufactured. The Mechanical Seal and O-ring should be promptly
replaced if water leaks from the pump around the Motor Shaft. Be certain both check valves are functioning properly
before replacing Mechanical Seal. NOTE: WHEN BOILER IS NOT IN USE IN AREAS SUBJECT TO FREEZING
CONDITIONS DRAIN PUMP AND WATER FEED LINES. BEFORE STARTING PUMP BE CERTAIN WATER INLET
VALVE AND ALL VALVES ON WATER FEED LINE ARE OPEN OR PUMP MAY BE DAMAGED.
12. BLOWDOWN TANK: The Blowdown Tank should be inspected every 90 days and cleaned as required.
13. INTERNAL INSPECTIONS: Internal tube inspections should be made every 60 days until the Water Treatment
Program is properly regulated. This is important so any detrimental tube conditions can be recognized and corrective
measures can be taken to prevent any problems. Thereafter, every 6-12 months or more often if an unsatisfactory
condition is found. This is done by removing at least two (2) of the plugs on the bottom and top of each Tube Header
Section. Internal Drum Inspection is made by removing the Inspection Plugs on the heads of the Steam Drum. Water
feed inlet should be Inspected every 6 months by removing the plug on the inlet fitting to Boiler Drum. Clean as
necessary. Note: always use a high temperature Teflon based anti-seize compound when reinstalling plugs. See
Bulletin 117 -1001 S&G.
14 TUNE-UPS: Overall boiler operation and burner condition should be evaluated as outlined and described on tune-up
sheets.
15 OTHER IMPORTANT MAINTENANCE: The Boiler should be regularly serviced and properly maintained in
accordance with the Operating, Daily Boiler Blowdown Instructions, Safety and Preventive Maintenance Sheets and all
other Maintenance Sheets as furnished in the Boiler Operation & Maintenance Manual.
WARNINGS
1. ONLY TRAINED AND KNOWLEDGEABLE QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD BE ALLOWED TO OPERATE,
SERVICE OR REPAIR THE BOILER. WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AT ALL TIMES.
2. ALWAYS SHUTOFF THE MAIN ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SWITCH(ES) BEFORE WORKING ON THE BOILER OR
CONTROLS. NEVER ATTEMPT TO WORK ON ANY PIPING OR PRESSURE PARTS WHEN THERE IS
PRESSURE IN BOILER. ALWAYS SHUTOFF THE BOILER AND BLOWDOWN TO ZERO PRESSURE.
3. NEVER PUT AN EXTENSION ON VALVE HANDLE FOR MORE LEVERAGE. DO NOT APPLY UNDUE FORCE ON
FITTINGS OR TO OPEN VALVES WHILE THERE IS PRESSURE IN BOILER. ANY PRESSURE PARTS AND
PIPING SHOULD BE PROMPTLY REPLACED ON INDICATION OF LEAKS, DETERIORATION OR AN UNSAFE
CONDITION. PROMPTLY REPLACE ANY FAULTY PARTS OR VALVES.
4. ALL STEAM VALVES AND BLOW-OFF VALVES MUST BE OPENED CAREFULLY AND SLOWLY. REPLACEMENT
OF ANY VALVES OR PRESSURE PARTS MUST COMPLY WITH THE CODE FOR STEAM PRESSURE STAMPED
ON THE BOILER.
5. NEVER BYPASS SAFETY CONTROLS. IMMEDIATELY REPAIR OR REPLACE FAULTY CONTROLS AND TEST
BEFORE PLACING BOILER IN OPERATION.
6. THE WATER INLET VALVE TO RETURN TANK SHOULD BE CLOSED WHEN BOILER IS NOT IN USE IF THERE
IS A POSSIBILITY OF WATER DAMAGE TO PROPERTY.
The Manufacturer and Parker Dealers are sincerely interested to cooperate with each field installation to assist in obtaining
the best in long life and satisfactory service deserving of the Parker equipment. Any additional instructions or assistance will
be gladly provided on request.
101-5.DOC
1001-B
8C
BOILER MAINTENANCE & WATER TREATMENT
It must be understood that every Steam Boiler system requires a proper Boiler Water Treatment Program with
regular water analyses, adequate regulated blowdowns, correct maintenance, periodic safety checks and periodic
inspection follow-up. All of these are necessary for long life and efficient boiler service. These are some of the
basic essentials in your boiler program:
1. Soft water should be used at all times to prevent scale build-up and tube stoppage. Test daily and regenerate
water softener when hardness exceeds 17 parts per million (or 1.0 Grain per Gallon).
2. Boiler water compound should be selected and regulated on the basis of actual water analysis. This
compound should have the proper chemicals to treat for: (1) hardness up to 5.0 GPG, (2) maintain a pH level
of 10.0 to 11.5 in the boiler water, (3) excessive oxygen by maintaining the Sodium Sulfite level between 40 to
100 ppm in the boiler water, (4) a protective metal coating material, and (5) other conditions found in the water
analysis. A Boiler compound comparable to PB677 is standardly recommended. When steam may come in
contact with potable water or food products for human consumption, a USDA approved compound, such as
PB633, is required. For Parker PB677, 633, 647, OS2 (Oxygen Scavenger) usage quantities and instructions
see Bulletin OS-125 and CPS-K-125-P.
3. The compound must be added in adequate quantities uniformly throughout the shift. An automatic chemical
feed system should be purchased or provided by your chemical supplier so these chemicals are induced into
the condensate holding tank or feedwater line as recommended by your chemical supplier. We recommend
these chemicals be introduced as far before the boiler as possible to also protect the feed tank and feed lines.
4. Regular Water Analysis should be made as often as possible but at least every 30 days to assure water
treatment is properly regulated. If there are indications of scale, corrosion, or any other unfavorable condition,
water analysis may need to be performed more often until condition is corrected. Record these figures (i.e.
Parker Bulletin 1001-C) for future reference. See Bulletin 1002 for instructions.
5. Partial blowdowns should be made in accordance with the Blowdown Instructions. The Boiler blowdowns
must be made sufficiently so that total dissolved solids in the Boiler water between 2600-3200 PPM (3600-
4200 micromhos/cm) and mud and sediment are removed from the boiler. The type of blowdown and period
between blowdowns can be extended only when the total dissolved solids in the boiler are maintained below
between 2600-3200 PPM (3600-4200 micromhos/cm).
6. Regular Internal Tube Inspections should be made every 60 days until the Water Treatment Program is
properly regulated. Thereafter, every 6-12 months or more often if an unsatisfactory condition is found. This is
done by removing at least two (2) of the plugs on the bottom and top of each Tube Header Section. Internal
Drum Inspection is made by removing the Inspection Plugs on the heads of the Steam Drum. Water feed inlet
should be Inspected every 6 months by removing the plug on the inlet fitting to Boiler Drum. Clean as
necessary. Note: always use a high temperature teflon based anti-seize compound when re-installing plugs.
See Bulletin 117 -1001 S&G.
7. The Return Tank and pump suction strainer should be inspected and flushed clean every 90 days or as
needed. This is important to prevent any sediment accumulation from causing stoppage, or damage to Pump
or Boiler.
8. Proper Grounding of the boiler is necessary if there is a possibility of electrolysis (a form of corrosion) and to
help maintain normal tube life. Periodic internal inspections are necessary to determine if the thin protective
coating has developed in the tubes. Proper grounding of the boiler requires driving a copper rod of 6’ or more
into the ground. Readings in excess of 35MV on ungrounded installations require grounding to prevent the
onset of a corrosion problem.
WARNING: DO NOT BE MISLED BY PURCHASING YOUR COMPOUND AT A CHEAPER PRICE OR FROM

A SUPPLIER THAT IS NOT FULLY COMPETENT TO PROVIDE YOU WITH INSTRUCTIONS,
WATER ANALYSIS AND FOLLOW-UP SERVICE NECESSARY FOR SATISFACTORY
RESULTS.
The Standard Boiler Warranty covers only original defects and does not cover the repairs resulting from a water
condition such as corrosion or scale. It's up to you and is your sole responsibility to see that a proper Water
Treatment and Maintenance Program are correctly followed at all times.
1001B-C.d oc
BULLETIN 1001-C
0A9
RECOMMENDED BOILER WATER CONTROL RANGES
FOR PARKER STEAM BOILERS
DATE OF ANALYSIS SAMPLE DATE ANALYSES RECORD
SOFT H2O CONDENSATE CONDENSATE BOILER BOILER BOILER
RECOMMENDED RANGES/RECOMMENDATIONS - BOILER RAW (i.e. Feed RETURN RETURN 1 2 3
H2O Water) WATER TEMP °F H2O H2O H2O
1. SOFT WATER HARDNESS CACO3: 0.0 GPG to 1.0 GPG
{ When Hardness Exceeds 1.0 GPG Regenerate Softener
2. BOILER WATER pH: 10.0 to 11.5 pH 8.2-8.8
{ When Less 10.0 - Increase Treatment Dosage
{ When More 11.5 - Decrease Treatment Dosage
3. BOILER WATER SODIUM SULFITE SO3: 40 to 100 PPM
{ When Less 40 PPM - Increase Oxygen Scavenger
{ When More 100 PPM - Decrease Oxygen Scavenger
BOILER WATER ALKALINITY –
4.
AS P/ALKALINITY TO PHENOLPHTHELEN AS CaCO3 200 to 400 PPM
♦ When over 400 PPM – Reduce Treatment Dosage
BOILER WATER TOTAL ALKALINITY:
5.
AS M/ALKALINITY TO MENTHYL ORANGE AS CaCO3 300 to 800 PPM
{ When Over 800 PPM - Reduce Treatment Dosage
6. BOILER WATER CHLORIDES CL: 0 to 40 GPG
{ When Over 40 GPG - Increase Blowdowns & Check Water Softener
7. BOILER WATER PHOSPHATE PO4: 40 to 70 PPM
{ When Less than 40 PPM - Increase Treatment Dosage
{ When More 70 PPM - Decrease Treatment Dosage
BOILER WATER TOTAL DISSOLVED SOLIDS: 2600-3200 PPM (3600-4600
8. 0-50 ppm
micromhos/cm)
{ When less than 2600 PPM decrease blowdown intervals/duration
{ When more than 3200 PPM minimum increase blowdown intervals/duration
CUSTOMER NAME: TESTED BY:
CONTACT: COMPANY:
ADDRESS: ACTION TAKEN:
CITY, STATE & ZIP: ____ MAILED COPY CALLED CUSTOMER E-MAILED
____ FILED FAXED
PHONE: FAX:
____ FWD TO CHEMICAL CO.
CELL: EMAIL:
NOTES:
W:\Bulletin\Water Treatment\1001-C.doc
BULLETIN 1002-B
6C
IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS
BOILER WATER SAMPLE BOTTLES AND CONTAINERS
TWO (2) WATER SAMPLE BOTTLES WITH MAILING CONTAINERS ARE FURNISHED FOR YOUR CONVENIENCE WITH EACH NEW
PARKER STEAM BOILER. THESE BOTTLES ARE FURNISHED FOR TAKING RAW WATER AND BOILER WATER SAMPLES AND
MAILING TO THE SMITH LABORATORY FOR ANALYSIS. THIS INITIAL WATER ANALYSIS IS DONE AT NO COST TO THE CUSTOMER.
PLEASE READ THE MANUFACTURER'S WATER TREATING BULLETIN #1001-B AND 1001-C SO THAT YOU WILL BE FULLY
INFORMED THAT EVERY STEAM BOILER REQUIRES A PROPER WATER TREATING PROGRAM FOR LONG LIFE SERVICE. THE
BOILER IS NOT GUARANTEED FOR REPAIRS RESULTING FROM SCALE OR CORROSION CAUSED BY BAD WATER CONDITIONS.
IF YOUR WATER TREATING PROGRAM AND BOILER WATER ANALYSIS IS NOT SATISFACTORILY HANDLED BY A LOCAL, CAPABLE
WATER TREATING REPRESENTATIVE IT IS REQUESTED THAT YOU SEND IN WATER SAMPLES OF THE BOILER WATER EVERY
FOUR WEEKS.
PLEASE SEND IN THE FOLLOWING WATER SAMPLES IN THE CONTAINERS FURNISHED IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH II,
BULLETIN 1002 IN THE MAINTENANCE CATALOG:
1. SAMPLE OF THE RAW WATER SUPPLY.

2. SAMPLE OF THE BOILER WATER.
THIS IS THE SHEET THAT IS INCLUDED WITH THE WATER SAMPLE BOTTLES
INSTRUCTIONS FOR WATER SAMPLES

Every Steam Boiler installation must be properly supervised with a proper Water Treating Program and Blowdown Procedure. The
recommended method to initially determine the Water Treating Program is by an actual Analysis of the raw water supply, soft water,
return tank water, and boiler water. Regular Water Analysis should be made at least every 30 days to assure water treatment is
properly regulated. If there are indications of scale, corrosion, or any unfavorable condition, water analysis may need to be performed
more often until condition is corrected. We recommend a full service Chemical Program which includes a chemical feed system,
chemicals and a monthly on site analysis. If a month is missed from this schedule, forward a sample per the following instructions.
The purpose of these instructions is to inform the operator on the correct method of taking Water Samples so that the information on
the Analysis may be proper and accurate.
I. GENERAL INFORMATION:
A. Water Samples should be taken in a 4 to 6 ounce clean glass or plastic screw type medicine bottle.
Always rinse the bottle and cap thoroughly before taking sample and fill to the top with little or no air in bottle.
Always wear safety glasses.
B. Each Sample Bottle should be properly labeled with the following information:
1. Date: __________________________________________________________________
2. Distributor: ______________________________________________________________(if other than Parker Boiler)
3. Customer Name: _________________________________________________________
4. Address: _______________________________________________________________
5. Boiler Operator's Name:____________________________________________________
6. Indicate Source of Water - Raw Water: ______________________________________
- Soft Water:
- Boiler Water: _____________________________________
(I.D. which boiler if there is more than one of the same size boiler i.e. mark bottle B1, B2)
- Return Tank Water: ________________________________
7. Make and H.P. of Boiler: ____________________________________________________
8. Boiler manufacturer's SN or National Board #: ___________________________________
9. Approximate % of Return Condensate:_________________________________________
10. Type of Water Treatment now used: ___________________________________________
11. Specifically state only if steam may come in contact with water or products used for
human and animal consumption:
C. Water Samples should be safely packed to prevent breakage.
D. Deliver or Mail Parcel Post direct to Laboratory or Parker Boiler in container supplied.
BULLETIN 1002-B
6C
II. METHOD OF TAKING WATER SAMPLES:
A. BOILER WATER: Take Samples from the try cock, sample valve or water glass drain on the Boiler Water
Column. WARNING! Always wear safety glasses when taking water samples.
USE CAUTION AND SAFETY AS FOLLOWS:
1. Before taking the Sample, make a partial blowdown or flush at the point where taking
sample so that it will be more representative of the Boiler Water.
2. Take the sample just before making the regular blowdown so that the concentrated
solids will be at maximum for determining necessity of any revision in the blowdown.
3. Hold bottle or container with long handle tongs and place securely over the valve
outlet. Open valve slightly being careful not to splash hot water outside of bottle. If
glass bottle is used, be sure bottle has been warmed and proper precautions taken
for safety. Keep hands and body at a safe distance and open valve just slightly so
water will not splash.
B. SOFTENED WATER: Should be taken initially and periodically if the Boiler Water does not test continuously
soft. Take at the soft water service outlet.
C. RAW WATER: Should be taken initially on each new installation and periodically if some problem or
change develops in the water source.
D. RETURN TANK WATER: Should be taken only if the Return Tank water is assumed to contain contaminates or relating
to some problem such as steam line corrosion. The sample can be taken from the
Return Tank drain line. Before taking the sample, let the line flush so that the sample
will be representative of the tank water.
NOTE: Water in the return tank should be 2/3 of the way up the internal well so the pump cannot empty the return tank and pull
in oxygen.
III. ANALYSIS REPORT:

When the Sample of water has been Analyzed, a report is supplied by the Laboratory to Parker Boiler Co. A detailed letter of
recommendation is then written to the customer, explaining the findings and if any revisions should be made in the use of
the Compound and the Blowdown procedures. Any questions regarding the reports or recommendations should be directed
to Parker Boiler.
Parker Boiler provides initial Water Analyses and Water Treating Recommendations to all customers without charge. Two water
Sample Containers for convenient mailing are furnished with each boiler and additional Containers will be gladly mailed on
request. A Charge of $10.00 for each Analysis is applicable only when using Boiler Compound not furnished b y Parker Boiler.
For important information on Boiler Water Treatment, refer to Parker Bulletin 1001-B & 1001-C. See Important Guide on proper
Boiler Operation and the Daily Operating Blowdown Instruction Sheet.
1002-B.DOC
TU-1146L
P1 0H7
PARKER BOILER CO.
ENERGY EVALUATION/TUNE-UP PROCEDURES FOR PARKER STEAM & HOT WATER BOILERS
EQUIPPED WITH PARKER PREMIX METAL FIBER BURNER SYSTEM
FACILITY
COMPANY/ADDRESS: BOILER MODEL NO.:
PHONE:
CONTACT:
SERIAL NO.:
MFB (METAL FIBER BURNER) GENERAL MAINTENANCE
The Parker Premix Metal Fiber Burner System should be checked and tuned by a competent personnel normally on a
yearly basis. Only trained and qualified personnel should install, start-up, operate, adjust, repair or maintain this boiler
equipment. The Parker Premix Metal Fiber Burner System is an extremely durable ultra Low NOx High Efficiency
Burner System incorporating a premixed blower mixer. This System offers very durable burners and outstanding
repeatability from year to year in terms of gas/air ratios, and NOx emissions.
In some situations dirt, dust, debris, etc. may accumulate on the burner surface and have the effect of increasing the
pressure drop through the burner surface slightly. These type of aberrations can be easily corrected by slight
adjustments of the burner system and or burner cleaning.
The following procedure summarizes the recommended servicing, maintenance and tune-up procedures for Parker
Premix Metal Fiber Burner Systems. Please note that it is quite important that large particles, dust, beads, etc. do not
enter the Burner System as this could create blockage of the Premix Metal Fiber Distribution System. The frequency of
maintenance required on the particular items on the Burner System is extremely dependent on environmental
conditions. In dusty, corrosive, or salt atmospheres more maintenance/lubrication is required.
THIS BULLETIN EXPLAINS THE TUNE UP PROCEDURES FOR A MAXON PREMIX SYSTEM 1 FOR
OTHER LOW NOX BURNER SYSTEMS REFER TO CORRESPONDING SUPPLEMENTARY START UP
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THAT PARTICULAR SYSTEM. I.E. (VFD SYSTEM 4)
SYSTEM 1 SYSTEM 2
Maxon "PL" Series Premix: Maxon "M" Series Premix Mini-Mixer:
SYSTEM 3 SYSTEM 4
Post Mix System: Variable Speed Drive Fan Post Mix System, Siemens SK70
controller:
SYSTEM 5
Variable Speed Drive Fan Premix System, Honeywell Valve/ Venturi:
TU-1146L
P2 0H7
Please follow the instructions below for check-out and tuning.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:
1. Combustion Analyzer 5. Barometric Damper Weights
2. Gas Pressure Gauges 6. Gas Line Soap Test Solution
3. Draft Gauges or Manometer 7. AMP meter
4. Tube Inspection Wrench, Plugs, Gaskets 8. Grease
I. PRELIMINARY ANALYSIS (REVIEW WITH OWNER)
A. CHECK THE OPERATING PRESSURE OR TEMPERATURE. Operate the boiler at the lowest pressure or
temperature that will satisfy the load demand not less than 130oF for hot water boilers. This will minimize heat and
radiation losses. Determine the pressure or temperature that will be used as a basis for comparative combustion
analysis before and after tune-up.
B. CHECK OPERATING HOURS. Plan the work load so that the boiler operates only the minimum hours and days
necessary to perform the work required. Less operating hours will reduce fuel and other costs.
C. CHECK INSULATION. Check condition of (or absence of) appropriate insulation on all cabinet, steam pipes,
return tank, heat exchangers, storage tanks, etc. Lack of insulation will significantly increase fuel usage.
D. CHECK AIR SUPPLY. Sufficient fresh air supply is essential to insure optimum combustion and the area of
openings must be in compliance with local codes. Air openings must be kept wide open and clear from restriction.
Air openings must comply with the Uniform Mechanical Code. Insure air supply is from safe source.
E. CHECK VENT. Proper venting is essential to assure efficient combustion. Insufficient draft or over-draft
promotes hazards and inefficient burning. Check to be sure that vent is in good condition, sized properly and with
no obstructions.
F. AS IS COMBUSTION. Perform an AS IS combustion analysis with a warmed up boiler at High, Medium and Low
fire if possible. Insure blower modulating circuit drives from hi to low properly. Close all doors and windows in
boiler room, turn on any exhaust fans that may run at the same time as the boiler. In addition to print out from
Combustion Analyzer, also record:
1. Gas Pressure at blower inlet: High fire "W.C. Med fire "W.C. Low fire " W.C.
2. Premix Manifold Press: High fire "W.C. Med fire "W.C. Low fire " W.C.
. 3. Maxon Position: High fire Med fire Low fire
4. Maxon Amps: High fire Med fire Low fire
(Check for proper rotation)
5. Draft below draft hood or barometric damper:
High fire "W.C. Med fire "W.C. Low fire " W.C.
Preferred values are:
1) Draft hood: less than (- .02" W.C.)
2) Barometric Damper: (- .04 to - .06" W.C.) as a minimum.
6. Steam pressure or Water temperature in and out of boiler.
o o
Steam pressure PSI Water temperature in F Water temperature out F
7. Check rate on boiler if meter is available: MBTU/HR
COMMENTS:
TU-1146L
P3 0H7
With Item I, Section F conditions recorded make the following checks and corrective actions as necessary:
II. CHECKS & CORRECTIONS
A. CHECK FOR CLEAN BOILER TUBES & HEAT TRANSFER SURFACES. Internal build-up of sediment
and scale on the heating surfaces creates an insulating effect that quickly reduces efficiency. A 1/16" of scale will
reduce efficiency and increase operating costs in excess of 14%. External build-up of soot and sediment will have a
comparable effect. Excessive fuel cost will result if the boiler is not kept clean. Clean tube surfaces, remove scale
and soot, assure proper boiler water flow and flue gas flow.
COMMENTS ON INTERNAL & EXTERNAL TUBE CONDITION:
B. CHECK BOILER WATER TREATMENT & BLOWDOWN PROGRAM. Soft water and the proper Boiler
Water Treatment must be uniformly used to minimize scale and corrosion. Daily flushing and the proper blowdown must be
employed to eliminate sediment and scale build-up on a steam boiler.
COMMENTS:
C. CHECK FOR STEAM LEAKS. Repair all leaks immediately as even small leaks at high pressure quickly add up
to considerable fuel and water treatment losses. Be sure there are no leaks through the blow-off, drains, safety
valve, by-pass lines or at the boiler feed pump.
COMMENTS
D. CHECK METAL FIBER BURNER & PREMIX SYSTEM CONDITION
1. Remove boiler doors and observe normal light off sequence. Insure all burners light off smoothly and flame
carryover is good.
2. Insure boiler drives to low fire for pilot ignition if appropriate for that model. NOTE: Not lower than 5-6 on
Maxon (for boilers greater than 1,500,000 BTUs.) Most systems employ a purge period and the pilot trial for
ignition occurs at low fire.
3. Insure purge time is correct.
4. Insure that all burners are straight and level. Insure that no holes, cracks or warps have developed on top or on
sides of burner or on mating flanges. Insure the entire surface has even flame distribution, thru all firing rates.
5. Look for dirt or metal flakes on burner surface.
6. Burner surface dirt, dust, metal flakes, etc. should be cleaned off of burner surface. Use air, soft rag or soft
brush to dust burners off. It is also effective to vacuum the burners with a strong vacuum with a soft
attachment. Do not use wire brush. If burners are still dirty after above procedures, the burners can be
removed and washed. If CO & NOx cannot come into conformance it is likely the burners need cleaning.
7. Check carryover tube condition and mounting. Insure carryover is proper from tube to tube.
8. Insure premix manifold and piping have no gas/air leaks and no damage or warpage has occurred.
9. Check all bolts and nuts from transition from pipe to MFB burners. Insure no deformations have occurred.
10. Repair all defective or questionable items.
COMMENTS ON BURNER CONDITION: ____________________________________________________________

TU-1146L
P4 0H7
E. BLOWER MIXER CHECK
1. Check rotation
2. Check motor and casing bolts, tighten if required.
3. Check impeller hold down Allen screws for tightness, insure impeller is firmly mounted to shaft.
4. Insure impeller is centered in casing.
5. Check for smooth rotation, no rubbing should occur.
FOR SPECIFIC TUNE UP PROCEDURES REFER TO CORRESPONDING SUPPLEMENTARY START
UP INSTRUCTIONS FOR PARTICULAR BURNER SYSTEM. FOR SYSTEM 1, MAXON "PL"
SYSTEM SEE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS.
6. It should be insured that the Maxon Ratio Valve does not drive to a position of less than 5 at the low fire and light
off positions. (Applicable for boilers greater than 1,500,000 BTU.) For low fire positions lower than this consult
factory.
7. It should also be insured that the Maxon Ratio Control Valve has stainless steel shafts installed. Please note that
Parker Boilers shipped before 9/1/95 may be provided with a carbon steel shaft riding in the cast iron housing.
This situation may create corrosion and shaft binding. Maxon's solution to the problem has been to change this
shaft to a slightly smaller diameter stainless steel shaft with O-rings to retain grease and a groove recessment in the
shaft to also retain grease at the point where lubrication is required. It should be insured on jobs where tune-ups
are accomplished that shafts have been changed to stainless steel and lubricated. It is critical that both the gas and
the air shaft be changed and lubricated so it is insured that neither the gas or air shaft will bind.
8. Lubrication: The gas and air shafts should be lubricated either yearly or more often to insure continued smooth
operation. In corrosive atmospheres i.e. near the ocean, lubrication should occur more frequently. Maxon shaft
assembly should be disassembled to allow shaft removal, see Maxon literature. Sand or buff shaft smooth as
required, grease and reassemble. Insure positioning of shaft upon reassembling is identical to previous positioning.
(Note: Allen screw countersinks on air shaft).
9. As part of the check out process for the Maxon Ratio Valve it is recommended that when the quadrant is removed
the gas shaft be compressed all the way and it should be insured that the spring return on the gas shaft is working
properly and that this shaft will not bind at the high fire position.
10. Check that blower mixer drives from hi to low properly and does not attempt to overdrive stops.
11. Check linkage and Maxon cam for tightness.
12. Check amps on Maxon blower mixer. Record with combustion readings.
COMMENTS:
F. SAFETY CHECKS
1. Check gas line for leaks.

2. Check boiler vent.
3. Insure combustion air is from safe clean source and per Code.
4. On Steam Boilers Check tubing to pressure controls to confirm clean tubes and accurate pressure readings.
5. Test primary and secondary low water controls.
6. Check operating, modulating and limit controls (Pressure, temperature, high and low gas and flue gas spillage).
Operating Control PSI High Limit PSI
7. Check pilot safety shut off operation.
8. Check fan air switch.
9. Check electrical starter interlock to insure burner shuts off with loss of power to blower.
10. Check safety valve pressure and capacity to meet boiler requirements and trim pressure. Lift relief valve with
Customer pre-approval and Customer pre-arrangement to pay for replacement if required, or insure that Customer
will test relief valve on a monthly basis. It is important the valve be re-seated properly.
COMMENTS:
TU-1146L
P5 0H7
V. ADJUSTMENTS
A. Determine the required emission levels on subject boiler by the terms of it's Permit to Operate or as appropriate.
While taking combustion readings with a warmed up boiler at high fire perform adjustments and analysis as follows:
FOR SPECIFIC TUNE UP PROCEDURES REFER TO CORRESPONDING SUPPLEMENTARY START
UP INSTRUCTIONS FOR PARTICULAR BURNER SYSTEM. FOR SYSTEM 1, MAXON "PL" SYSTEM
SEE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS.
B. Adjust boiler to fire at rate. (Note Maxon position at least 1/2 step down from maximum).
Note that combustion readings on Parker Premix Metal Fiber Burner Systems can be affected by:
1) Gas Pressure:
A) Regulator adjustment
B) Maxon cam adjustment. By decreasing the amount of fuel by a gas pressure reduction or by closing the Maxon
Butterfly valve (i.e. screw out on Maxon Allen cam) the O2 level at that firing position will be increased and
the NOx decreased. Refer to Parker and Maxon start-up instructions for Maxon adjustment. If gas pressure is
increased or Maxon Butterfly opened, opposite effect occurs.
C) By decreasing the fuel flow the flame may tend to blow out and CO may result. Increase fuel to alleviate CO.
2) Draft adjustment: By decreasing draft on boiler O2 levels will be lowered and NOx increased. By increasing
draft opposite effect occurs. Add weights to barometric damper to increase draft. Always check high fire heat
roll out around cabinet bottom when setting draft.
3) Determine the required emission and adjust as required.
C. When adjusting a boiler it is important to insure that the burner does not sit in low fire for prolonged periods of
time. This can be accomplished by adjusting either the L91 Pressure Trol, the Modulating Control or Hi-Low
Control on the boiler to insure that the boiler will purge, light, drive towards high fire, return towards low fire and
then shut off. If the boiler does sit for prolonged periods at low fire in the radiant mode (rich fuel mixture, High
NOx) burner damage may occur:
D. Perform combustion analysis with a warmed up boiler at High, Medium and Low fire if possible. Adjust for
maximum efficiency lowest oxygen level while still holding NOx and CO below the terms of the Permit to Operate
or as appropriate. Look for blue flame not orange, radiant glowing. In addition to print out from Combustion
Analyzer, also record the following, note approximate sample settings (note sample point for flue gas is below draft
control.
.
1.NOx @ 3% O2 15-27 PPM thru all firing rates.
2. CO @ 3% O2 less than 125 PPM thru all firing rates.
3. O2: High fire % Med fire % Low fire %
Sample Settings: High fire 6-8.5 % Med fire 7-10 % Low fire 8-13.5 %
4. Gas Pressure at blower inlet: High fire "W.C. Med fire "W.C. Low fire "W.C.
Sample Settings: High fire 3 - 5 "W.C. Med fire 4 - 6.5 "W.C. Low fire 4 - 7 "W.C.
5. Premix Manifold Press: High fire "W.C. Med fire "W.C. Low fire "W.C.
Sample Settings: High fire .5 - 2.8 "W.C. Med fire .4 - 2.4 "W.C. Low fire .4 - 1.6 "W.C.
6. Maxon Position: High fire Med fire Low fire
Sample Settings: High fire 1/2 step down from maximum Low fire Position 4 to 6
(Check for proper rotation) Record RLA or FLA on Motor ________ and Service Factor ____________
o o
COMMENTS:
TU-1146L
P6 0H7
(Mail Combustion Emission Data to customer.)
TUNE-UP PERFORMED BY:

PARKER BOILER CO. DATE OF INITIAL VISIT:
5930 BANDINI BLVD.
LOS ANGELES, CA 90040 DATE OF FINAL VISIT:
PHONE: (323) 727-9800
THE BOILER HAS BEEN CHECKED AND TUNED PER THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS TUNE-UP PROCEDURE.
TECHNICIAN SIGNATURE: DATE
COMMENTS:
TU-11146L.doc
PARKER STEAM BOILER - WEEKLY MAINTENANCE REPORT BULLETIN WMR 101-5
7D
NAME__________________________________________________________ WEEK OF____________________________
MAINTENANCE ITEM DAY SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT REMARKS
SHIFT 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
I. DAILY FOR EACH SHIFT
1. Test low water cutoff, check water level and gage glass.
2. Flush out water column and switch drain valve.
3. Partial blowdown (start & middle of each shift).
A. Main bottom blow-off valve (2 on 30 HP* & larger).
B. Both header blow-off valves (70-150 HP only)
4. Complete blowdown from full pressure on days recommended.
5. Add boiler water treatment as recommended.
6. Test hardness of water softener.
7. Check steam pressure gage.
8. When boiler is not in service, manually shut off fuel supply.
II. WEEKLY MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. Test flame safeguard and check pilot.
2. Check burner operation.
3. Check high limit control.
4. Check fuel supply piping. Correct any leaks.
5. Check all piping and traps for leaks - repair as required.
6. Inspect boiler feed pump - pack and lubricate as required.
7. Rockwell blow-off valve only, tighten stem after every 7 blowdowns and add sealant
as required.
III. MONTHLY MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. Complete check on low water cutoff.
2. Check safety valve.
3. Complete check on all boiler controls.
4. Inspect blowdown piping and tank.
5. Inspect complete boiler feed water system.
6. Test water feed check valve.
7. Test steam traps repair all leaks.
8. Oil burner should be serviced, cleaned and adjusted by competent personnel.
9. Send sample of boiler water for analysis. Sample should be taken every 6 weeks
until water treatment program is determined proper and thereafter, every 6 months or
immediately on indication of an unfavorable condition.
WORK PERFORMED BY:
THE ABOVE WEEKLY MAINTENANCE IS ABSOLUTELY ESSENTIAL FOR SATISFACTORY BOILER OPERATION.
OPERATOR SHOULD CHECK OFF DAILY ITEMS AS PERFORMED AND SIGN AT END OF EACH SHIFT.
TESTING OF LOW WATER CUTOFF, BLOWDOWNS AND MAINTENANCE MUST CONFORM TO DAILY OPERATING AND BLOWDOWN INSTRUCTION SHEET.
QUARTERLY INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT ITEMS REQUIRED EVERY 3 MONTHS.
IMMEDIATELY REPORT ANY UNSATISFACTORY CONDITION FOR PROMPT MAINTENANCE ATTENTION.
*Two blow-off valves also on 22 HP U-Drum boiler.
WMR101-5.DOC
PARKER STEAM BOILER - WEEKLY MAINTENANCE REPORT BULLETIN WMR 101-5
7D
NAME__________________________________________________________ WEEK OF____________________________
MAINTENANCE ITEM DAY SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT REMARKS
SHIFT 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
I. DAILY FOR EACH SHIFT
1. Test low water cutoff, check water level and gage glass.
2. Flush out water column and switch drain valve.
3. Partial blowdown (start & middle of each shift).
4. Complete blowdown from full pressure on days recommended.
5. Add boiler water treatment as recommended.
6. Test hardness of water softener.
7. Check steam pressure gage.
8. When boiler is not in service, manually shut off fuel supply.
II. WEEKLY MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. Test flame safeguard and check pilot.
2. Check burner operation.
3. Check high limit control.
4. Check fuel supply piping. Correct any leaks.
5. Check all piping and traps for leaks - repair as required.
6. Inspect boiler feed pump - pack and lubricate as required.
7. Rockwell blow-off valve only, tighten stem after every 7 blowdowns and add sealant
as required.
III. MONTHLY MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. Complete check on low water cutoff.
2. Check safety valve.
3. Complete check on all boiler controls.
4. Inspect blowdown piping and tank.
5. Inspect complete boiler feed water system.
6. Test water feed check valve.
7. Test steam traps repair all leaks.
8. Oil burner should be serviced, cleaned and adjusted by competent personnel.
9. Send sample of boiler water for analysis. Sample should be taken every 6 weeks
until water treatment program is determined proper and thereafter, every 6 months or
immediately on indication of an unfavorable condition.
WORK PERFORMED BY:
THE ABOVE WEEKLY MAINTENANCE IS ABSOLUTELY ESSENTIAL FOR SATISFACTORY BOILER OPERATION.
OPERATOR SHOULD CHECK OFF DAILY ITEMS AS PERFORMED AND SIGN AT END OF EACH SHIFT.
TESTING OF LOW WATER CUTOFF, BLOWDOWNS AND MAINTENANCE MUST CONFORM TO DAILY OPERATING AND BLOWDOWN INSTRUCTION SHEET.
QUARTERLY INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT ITEMS REQUIRED EVERY 3 MONTHS.
IMMEDIATELY REPORT ANY UNSATISFACTORY CONDITION FOR PROMPT MAINTENANCE ATTENTION.
*Two blow-off valves also on 22 HP U-Drum boiler.
BULLETIN QTR 101-5
7A
PARKER STEAM BOILER
QUARTERLY INSPECTION REPORT
CUSTOMER'S NAME DATE
ADDRESS BOILER SIZE
CITY SERIAL NO.
IMPORTANT: GAS OIL
Before making inspection be sure the boiler is cold with no pressure and the electricity and main fuel valve are manually shut off.
INSPECTION RESULTS
REPAIRS
ITEMS FOR INSPECTION CONDITION REPAIRS REMARKS
MADE
SATISFACTORY REQUIRED
I. INTERNAL BOILER INSPECTION: Inspect, clean, flush, test and replace as needed. Inspection Frequency may be
extended after establishing power Water Treatment Program.
1. Inspection Tubes: Remove 2 or more plugs from
each header, at least one upper and one lower.
A. If Scaled:
(1) Remove all plugs and flush.
(2) If hard and over 1/8", chemically clean.
(3) Send water samples for analysis.
B. Repair all leaks in unions, nipples, etc.
C. Always replace gaskets and if required,
replace the tube plugs.
D. Check for soot on exterior of tubes,
particularly pilot area.
2. Steam Drum and Connecting Lines.
A. Steam Drum: Remove all inspection
openings.
B. Remove plugs on Water Feed Line and
inspect.
C. Remove caps on Blowdown and Mud Legs.
D. Inspect all Drain Lines.
II. LOW WATER CUTOFF AND WATER LEVEL CONTROL: Inspect, test, and repair as needed. See Bulletin.
1. Dismantle for complete internal cleaning and
repairs. (Float type only).
2. Clean float chamber and equalizing piping (Float
type only).
3. Inspect internal assembly. Replace if necessary
(Float type only).
4. Remove control cover and check electrical
contacts.
5. Sand scale buildup off of probes if needed.
6. Reassemble control.
7. Carefully test switch action for low water cutoff
and pump.
8. Check secondary low water cutoff, if furnished.
III. OTHER BOILER TRIM AND CONTROLS: Inspect, clean, test, and repair as needed.
1. Pump motor starting relay.
2. Water glass.
3. Safety valve.
4. Blow-off valve.
5. All drain and shut-off valves.
6. Pressure gauge.
IV. GAS BURNER AND CONTROLS:
1. Clean pilot burner, air inlet, and orifice.
2. Inspect main burners and clean if dirty.
3. Clean thermocouple or flame sensor.
4. Test ignition and plot for smooth light.

5. Test flame safeguard.
6. Test high limit for proper setting and operation.
7. Check modulating fire control if furnished. Be
certain the control is adjusted for proper
modulation and low fire.
8. Check pressure line to modulating control.
QTR 101-5.DOC
BULLETIN QTR 101-5
7A
INSPECTION RESULTS
REPAIRS
ITEMS FOR INSPECTION CONDITION REPAIRS MADE
REMARKS
SATISFACTORY REQUIRED
V. OIL BURNERS AND CONTROLS:
1. Remove and clean burner. See Burner Service Sheets.
Frequency depends on use.
2. Clean and set electrodes.
3. Clean burner nozzles.
4. Clean photocell.
5. Reassemble and properly position all parts.
6. Check for proper air adjustment for clean fire and
smooth ignition. On two-stage fire or modulating check
for clean fire on both, high and low firing. See
Adjustment Bulletin.
7. Check for Proper setting of pressuretrols. See Burner
Control System Sheet.
8. Inspect combustion chamber.
9. Clean all soot from combustion chamber and external
tubes.
10.Test flame safeguard.
VI. WATER FEED SYSTEM:
1. Clean and thoroughly flush return tank and strainer.
2. Inspect all water feed line. Clean as necessary.
3. Check float and water tank level. Replace valve disc
and leather if leaks.
4. Inspect pump. Lubricate as needed.
5. On piston pumps, replace cups and valves annually or
as needed.
6. Lubricate motors as required.
7. Check and align pump motor.
8. Test pump discharge. Check valves.
VII. BLOWDOWN TANK:
1. Inspect and clean as required.
2. Inspect all blowdown piping and valves. Replace if there
are leaks or indication of weakness.
3. Inspect blowdown vent.
4. Inspect drains.
VIII. OTHER MAINTENANCE:
1. Check all equipment and repair leaks.
2. Inspect traps and valves. Repair leaks.
3. Report any unsafe condition.
4. Report any increase in fuel costs.
5. Inspect boiler vent and cap.
6. Check for adequate air supply to boiler room area.
IX. OPERATOR'S MAINTENANCE CHECK-UP:
1. Are complete blowdowns made on days recommended?
2. Are partial blowdowns made daily?
3. Is the water column and switch drain flushed daily?
4. Is water softener tested and regenerated before water?
5. Is boiler compound used properly?
6. Have all leaks been repaired?
7. Are all items on Weekly Boiler Maintenance Report
followed?
8. Are water samples taken periodically?
X. REMARKS AND RECOMMENDATIONS:
THE PURPOSE OF THIS INSPECTION REPORT IS TO SERVE AS A DETAILED INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE GUIDE TO THE OPERATOR
FOR OBTAINING THE BEST IN SAFETY AND OPERATING LIFE FROM THE EQUIPMENT. PROPER ATTENTION TO ALL ITEMS WILL MAKE
POSSIBLE THE CORRECTION OF UNSAFE CONDITIONS, BEFORE EXPENSIVE REPAIRS ARE EXPERIENCED.
IT IS SUGGESTED THAT THE OPERATOR MAKE OUT THIS REPORT MONTHLY UNTIL CERTAIN THE MAINTENANCE IS PROPER AND
EVERY 3 MONTHS AS A MINIMUM. IT IS SUGGESTED TO REVIEW THIS REPORT WITH THE BOILER INSPECTOR AT THE ANNUAL BOILER
INSPECTION AND ADD ANY ITEMS OF INSPECTION SUGGESTED. THIS REPORT SHOULD BE FILED WITH THE MANAGER OR OWNER
WITH RECOMMENDATIONS.
___________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________
BOILER OPERATOR DEPARTMENT MANAGER
QTR 101-5.DOC
GENERAL BASIC INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS GBI 101-5
PARKER BOILER CO. STEAM BOILERS 3C
For a proper installation and in order to receive the best in operating life and efficiency from your Parker Steam Boiler, it is essential to
follow the Manufacturer's Minimum Standards and all the Requirements of State and Local Codes. Before installing the Boiler carefully
review these General Basic Installation Instructions, the specific Installation Instructions, the Installation Drawings, and the Boiler
Room Floor Plan Drawings as these instructions illustrate the Recommended Installation Procedure.
CAUTION: ALL INFORMATION ON THESE SHEETS IS IMPORTANT. Failure to give all factors proper consideration may result in
an unsafe and inefficient installation. Manufacturer's Recommendations are a Minimum Standard for Satisfactory Installation. The
installation must also follow all Safety Codes including the ASME Boiler and Controls Codes, National Fuel Gas Code (NFPA 54/ANSI
Z223.1), National Electric Code (NFPA 70), Uniform Codes and other applicable National, State, Local and Servicing Gas Supplier
Codes. Only trained and qualified personnel should install, startup, operate, adjust, repair or maintain this boiler equipment.
Parker Boilers are equipped with Code required safety controls which will automatically shutdown boiler when unsafe conditions are
sensed. Customer must provide adequate supervision when service interruption or freeze-up presents a problem. Boilers, tanks,
pumps and piping, in areas subject to freezing conditions must be drained or protected. All components in the steam system under
pressure must be rated for a pressure at least equal to the Boiler Maximum Allowable Working Pressure or a Pressure Reducing Valve
and additional Low Pressure Safety Valve must be installed. If a hot water storage tank is used, it must be equipped with a safety
relief valve. A Combination Temperature and Pressure type is recommended for domestic or potable water supply heating.
I. SELECTION OF A BOILER:
THE FOLLOWING FACTORS SHOULD BE GIVEN VERY CAREFUL CONSIDERATION IN SELECTION OF THE BOILER:
(1) SIZE OF THE BOILER: The Boiler must be of adequate capacity to handle the maximum hourly load of the particular application,
plus radiation losses. It is considered good practice to install a Boiler of sufficient capacity to handle future expansion
requirements or to allow space for an additional future Boiler. On critical or large installations, it is recommended to install two or
more Boilers, each sufficient size to handle the minimum load so that the operation is not interrupted when one of the Boilers is
being serviced. If the load is not definitely known, it is advisable to consult the boiler manufacturer or competent personnel to
determine the load.
(2) APPROVED TYPE QUALITY BOILER: The Boiler should be a quality, approved Boiler, manufactured and furnished in full
compliance with the Safety Requirements of the A.S.M.E. Code. The Boiler selected should be safe, efficient and easy to
maintain to provide economical and reliable service. The Parker Sectional Bent Water Tube is highly recommended as it provides
one of safest, most economical and long life systems that is easy and inexpensive to maintain.
(3) TRIM AND CONTROLS: The Boiler should be equipped with fully automatic controls to provide automatic and safe operation. All
Trim and Controls should comply with Local Code, the State Safety Orders, the A.S.M.E. Codes and Underwriters' Laboratories.
A flame safeguard, operating control, high limit, primary and secondary low water cutoffs and dual safety shutoff fuel valves are
considered essential on all Boilers.
(4) PROPER BOILER SPECIFICATIONS: The complete Boiler Specifications should be thoroughly reviewed for the proper working
pressure required, the most economical fuel available and proper electrical requirements.
II. INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PERMITS:
Before installing the Boiler be certain that all Permits for the installation and operation of the boiler have been taken out and installation
conditions approved by the Building Inspection Jurisdiction. Permits are usually required on the Boiler and Utilities including Gas,
Electrical, Water, Vent and Plumbing Connections. Some States and Cities require a Field Inspection by a State or National Board
Commissioned Boiler Inspector and a "Permit to Operate" issued before the Boiler is placed in service. Heavy Penalties and Unsafe
Conditions may result when these Permits and Inspections are not obtained from the Inspection Jurisdiction. If Local Codes or
Insurance Carrier require additional or special controls, the boiler manufacturer should be consulted so that the equipment can be
furnished as required.
III. BOILER ROOM AREA AND BOILER BASE:
Consult with Local Codes for Boiler Room and Fire Resistive Separation if required and refer to Paragraph IV. The Standard Boiler is
not recommended for outside installation without providing the required protection from weather and drafts. An approved floor sump or
drain must be provided in the Boiler area to accommodate safety valves, boiler drains and leaks from any source. Floors should be
properly planned and graded to the floor sump or drain to prevent water damage.
When Boiler Rooms are necessary, two access doors are always recommended and normally required. The larger door should be
adequate to permit the Boiler to be moved in and out without disassembly. Location of the Boiler Room should be selected as
conveniently near the load as possible with all installation factors considered. Do not install the boiler in any location where flammable
liquids or vapors are likely to be present or drawn. Keep the area around the boiler free of combustible materials, gasoline, paint,
thinner, solvents and other flammable liquids and vapors.
Adequate space should be arranged for the Return System, Blowdown Tank and the Water Treatment Equipment. Boilers can be
installed in smaller areas than the recommended size but the area should never be less than the minimum shown on the Boiler Room
Specification Sheet.
BOILER MUST BE INSTALLED ON A NON-COMBUSTIBLE FLOOR preferably of concrete and properly designed to support the
required weight and to protect against any Fire Hazard. Combustible floors require an Approved Fire-Proof Base, consult
Manufacturer. Do Not install on wood, carpet, vinyl tiles, black-top or on concrete with wood or electrical conduit imbedded or directly
underneath without consulting Manufacturer for an approved base.
GBI 101-5 3C
PAGE 2
IV. BOILER CLEARANCES:
MINIMUM UL LISTED BOILER CLEARANCE TO COMBUSTIBLES CONSTRUCTION (Atmospheric Nat. Gas Only): Cabinet Sides
and Rear: 12"; Cabinet Top: 48"; Single Wall Chimney Connector for Models with Barometric Damper: 12"; Single Wall Vent
Connector for Models with Draft Hood: 6"; Steam and Hot Water Piping: 1".
MINIMUM UNLISTED BOILER CLEARANCE TO COMBUSTIBLES CONSTRUCTION (Unlisted & Power Burner Models): Cabinet
Sides and Rear: 18"; Cabinet Top: 48"; Single Wall Chimney Connector for Models with Barometric Damper: 18"; Single Wall Vent
Connector for Models with Draft Hood: 18"; Steam and Hot Water Piping: 1".
RECOMMENDED CLEARANCE FOR ACCESS: Boiler must also be installed with adequate clearance for Maintenance, Repair and
Inspection Access. Passageways and Inspection Doors: 18" (2/3 Cabinet Width in front of one Inspection Door on the 30-150 H.P.
Boilers); Controls: 24"; Boiler Control Panels: 30" Additional space may be required by the Local Inspection Jurisdiction.
V. AIR SUPPLY:
The Boiler requires fresh air for safe operation and must be installed so there are provisions for adequate combustion and ventilation
air. In confined rooms (rooms whose volume is less than 50 cu.ft. per 1000 BTU aggregate input) or unconfined boiler rooms of tight
construction, two permanent air openings shall be provided, one within 12" of the top and one within 12" of the bottom of the boiler
room.
AIR SUPPLY FROM OUTSIDE BUILDING: If the boiler room is confined or the building is of tight construction, openings shall be
provided that communicate freely with outdoors. The two openings should have a total free area of 1 sq.in. for each 1000 BTU of input
if attached to horizontal ducts; or a total free area of 1/2 sq.in. for each 1000 BTU if attached to vertical ducts or connected directly
through an outside wall. Consideration should always be given to the blocking effect of louvers in determining total free area. Wood
louvers may be assumed to have 20-25% free area and metal louvers and grills to have 60-75% free area.
AIR SUPPLY FROM INSIDE BUILDING FOR CONFINED ROOMS: The two openings should have a total free area of 2 sq.in. for each
1000 BTU of input communicating directly with an unconfined space with adequate infiltration.
In hot climates additional ventilation should be provided to maintain reasonable temperatures in boiler room. Always leave adequate
clearance around the base and legs of the Boiler so that air freely enters the combustion area. Be certain that additional air supply is
provided if there are exhaust fans or other equipment installed which draw air from the boiler room. Air supply should be provided from
a non-hazardous and clean source so that no flammable vapor, lint or dust is admitted to the boiler room. THE BOILER AIR SUPPLY
MUST BE ISOLATED FROM ANY SOURCE OF CORROSIVE CHEMICAL FUMES SUCH AS PERCHLORETHYLENE, ETC. Consult
Local Code or Manufacturer for any unusual conditions.
VI. VENT:
A. COMBUSTION VENTS:
The proper Boiler Venting System is required to assure the necessary draft for efficient combustion and to develop a positive flow
adequate to convey all products of combustion safely to outside atmosphere above the building. All venting must be in conformity with
accepted engineering practices, to the Manufacturer's Minimum Standards, and in compliance with the Local Code in every respect.
All Vent Systems should be installed in a safe workmanlike manner, properly supported and joints secured to prevent leakage. Never
drill holes or screw metal screws into double wall vent. DO NOT SUPPORT THE WEIGHT OF THE VENT ON THE BOILER.
The Boiler Vent should preferably be circular and of metal, installed to Local Code Specifications for Vent Material and all Installation
Conditions. Do not reduce vent size or connect more than one appliance to a single vent unless in compliance with good safe
accepted practices and with approval of the Building Inspection Authority. The Main Vent should run straight up from the Boiler and if
horizontal runs are necessary, these should be as straight and direct as possible with a minimum rise of at least 1/4" per lineal foot.
Long horizontal runs are not recommended and must not exceed 75% of the vertical height of the vent above the connector. Proper
vent clearance must be provided from any combustible material, wall openings or exit way. In cold climates, outside vents must be
properly insulated.
The Draft Hood or Barometric Damper must be installed directly on the Boiler Vent Outlet as shown and in the same room with the
Boiler. Do not terminate vents near windows, doors, ducts, air conditioning or air supply fans which might pick up flue products
exhausted from the boiler room and return them into the building, causing a serious health hazard to occupants. An unrestricted full
size vent cap should be installed on the top of the stack to protect from wind and rain.
When installation conditions require special vents or draft inducers, the design and safety controls should be approved by Competent
Combustion Personnel. When a draft inducer is required, always install a suitable draft switch and wire this into the boiler control
circuit to prevent the boiler from firing unless the draft is proven. If a draft inducer is used, the boiler requires a positive pressure type
chimney from the outlet of the inducer to the termination. In planning the vent installation, carefully review these Instructions and
consult with the Building Inspection Authority on the Local Code for the Required Approval.
These are the Manufacturer's Recommended Minimum Standards but all installation materials and conditions must conform to the
Local Code Requirements and good safe engineering practices for the particular installation.
GBI 101-5 3C
PAGE 3
VI. VENT - Continued
When installation conditions require special vents or draft inducers, the design and safety controls should be approved by Competent
Combustion Personnel. When a draft inducer is required, always install a suitable draft switch and wire this into the boiler control
circuit to prevent the boiler from firing unless the draft is proven. If a draft inducer is used, the boiler requires a positive pressure type
chimney from the outlet of the inducer to the termination. In planning the vent installation, carefully review these Instructions and
consult with the Building Inspection Authority on the Local Code for the Required Approval.
These are the Manufacturer's Recommended Minimum Standards but all installation materials and conditions must conform to the
Local Code Requirements and good safe engineering practices for the particular installation.
(1) VENTS FOR ATMOSPHERIC GAS FIRED BOILERS WITH DRAFT HOODS:
PARKER UL LISTED GAS FIRED BOILERS EQUIPPED WITH DRAFT HOODS ARE APPROVED FOR INSTALLATION WITH TYPE
B GAS VENT. Type B Vents should always be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's Instructions. Listed Double Wall Vent
is preferred and must be used in any attic, concealed space and for any combustible floor, ceiling or roof penetration. Vent connectors
should be galvanized steel minimum 24 gage thru 12" diameter and 22 gage on larger diameters. Elbows used as vent connectors
may be one gage lighter. The Vent must terminate at least 2 feet above the roof or any part of the building within 10 feet. If single wall
metal pipe vent is allowed as the main vent by the Local Inspection Jurisdiction, it should be a minimum 20 gage galvanized material
and used only for runs directly from the boiler area to the outside. Single wall metal pipe vent installed through a combustible roof or
wall must be guarded at the point of passage with the required ventilated thimble or the combustible material cut away to provide not
less than 18" clearance (6" UL Listed Models) on all sides of the vent. With full size vent installed, no spillage should be experienced
at the draft hood. A minimum draft of .01" W.C. negative pressure should be experienced above the draft hood. If the draft below the
draft hood registers in excess of .02", Competent Combustion Personnel or Gas Company Engineer should be consulted for
combustion test and adjustments to control draft for best efficiency. Draft Hood equipped LPG and other special Models that are not
UL Listed also have stack temperatures below 400°F and are safe for connection to a Type B Vent per Manufacturer's
Recommendations; however some Jurisdictions require suitable chimneys on all unlisted equipment [see Parg. (2)].
(2) CHIMNEYS FOR BOILERS WITH BAROMETRIC DAMPERS:

ALL BOILERS EQUIPPED WITH BAROMETRIC DAMPERS MUST BE CONNECTED TO SUITABLE CHIMNEYS. These Boilers may
be classified as Residential-Type, Building Heating or Low Heat Appliances with flue gas temperatures below 600°F. A UL Listed
Factory Built Chimney (Minimum Residential Type or Building Heating Appliance Type for Negative Pressure) should be installed in
accordance with the Manufacturer's Instructions. Chimney connectors shall be galvanized steel minimum 22 GA thru 12" diameter, 20
GA thru 16" diameter, and 16 GA over 16" diameter. The chimney must terminate at least 3 feet above the roof and 2 feet above any
part of the building within 10 feet. When a chimney extends through any story above that in which the boiler is located, including drop
ceilings and crawl spaces, it should be enclosed within continuous non-combustible construction of the appropriate fire resistive rating
with a minimum 12" clearance for access. If a single wall metal chimney is used it should be steel minimum of 10 GA. Support for this
type chimney should be independent of building construction with the load transferred to the ground. Single wall metal chimney
installed through a combustible roof or wall must be guarded at the point of passage with the required ventilated metal thimble or the
combustible material cut away to provide not less than 18" clearance (12" UL Listed Atmospheric Gas Fired Models) on all sides of the
chimney. The Red Stops on the Barometric Damper should be removed on gas fired boilers but must remain in place on all oil and
combination fired boilers. When a Flue Gas Spillage Switch is furnished on gas fired boilers it is pre-wired but must be properly
mounted above the damper as described on a separate bulletin. On all jobs, particularly high altitudes or restrictive vent conditions, it
is advisable to call in Competent Combustion Personnel to make a Complete Combustion Test for setting of draft to obtain best
efficiency and safety. Draft should be set for best efficiency as low as possible without CO or Smoke in the flue gas.
(a). ATMOSPHERIC GAS FIRED MODELS: With full size chimney installed to proper height never less than 5', a min. draft of not
less than .02 to .04" W.C. negative pressure should be experienced below the barometric damper.
(b). POWER BURNER MODELS: With full size chimney installed to proper height, never less than 12', a minimum draft of not less
than .04 to .06" W.C. negative pressure should be experienced below the barometric damper.
B. CONTROL & VALVE VENTS:

On certain Systems, the gas pressure regulator and other gas components require separate vent lines to outside atmosphere. These
controls are Marked when vents are required and they must be piped full size outside the building to a Safe Point of Discharge away
from all personnel, ignition sources and air intakes. Gas pressure regulators above 1" size (above 3/8" size for medium or high
pressure gas service) must be piped outside.
Controls requiring atmospheric vents such as gas pressure switches and gas pressure regulators that are not equipped with integral
vent limiters, must be piped outdoors to a safe point of discharge. Do not vent into combustion chamber. A means must be provided
at the termination point to prevent a stoppage of the line by foreign material, moisture, or insects. In the event of diaphragm rupture,
gas will be discharged from vent.
Atmospheric vent lines must not be connected to any gas vent, bleed or relief line. Atmospheric vent lines, when manifolded, shall be
connected to a common vent line having a cross sectional area not less than the area of the largest vent line plus 50 percent of the
areas of all the additional vent lines.
NORMALLY OPEN FUEL VENT VALVE (if furnished) is sized in accordance with the following chart of nominal pipe sizes:
FUEL LINE SIZE: Up to 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2 to 3" 4"

VENT LINE SIZE: 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 2"
GBI 101-5 3C
PAGE 4
VI. VENT - Continued
During installation, remove plug and pipe this valve out of building to a safe point of discharge in outside atmosphere. Vent Line is to
be run full size out of building with no traps. Vent piping shall terminate away from all windows, doors and building air inlets. A means
must be provided at the termination point to prevent stoppage of the line by foreign material moisture, or insects. This vent line must
be run separate from atmospheric control vent lines such as gas pressure regulator and gas pressure switches. NOTE: Some gas will
be discharged from the normally open fuel vent valve during normal operation. Valve should be tested frequently for any sign of
leakage.
C. BLOWDOWN AND RETURN TANK VENTS:

PROPER SEPARATE VENTS MUST BE PROVIDED FOR BOTH THE RETURN SYSTEM AND THE BLOWDOWN TANK. For the
required size, refer to the Boiler Room Floor Plan Specification Sheet. Blowdown vent sizes are based on a straight up, unrestricted
vent and should be increased in size if not run straight up. Blowdown and Return System Vents should be installed to discharge in a
safe location above roof and must be run separate from each other and any other vent.
VII. SAFETY VALVE:
The discharge drain outlet must be piped full size independent of all other piping without any shut-off valves. Safety Valve Drain may
be larger than valve inlet size and must always be piped full size. Install piping with sufficient flexibility to allow for free expansion and
properly support so there is no strain on the Safety Valve Body and Piping. Pipe to a safe point of discharge to prevent any possibility
of personal injury and within 18" from the floor or into an open receptacle protected by a Splash Shield. If discharge cannot be piped
to a completely Safe Location in the boiler room, such discharge should be piped outside the room to a Safe Location. If piped
upwardly a drain line should be provided at the low point to keep this line drained. Secure the piping so it cannot rise to cause
personal injury when Safety Valve discharges. If piping is a considerable distance, install a union near the Safety Valve Outlet for
convenience of changing valve when required. Do not connect the Safety Valve discharge piping to any other piping.
VIII. PIPING:
PIPING IN GENERAL: Do not use galvanized pipe or fittings on the steam lines, blowoff lines or on the water feed piping from pump
to the boiler. Use only black Code pipe, fittings and valves approved for pressures of not less than the MAWP (Maximum Allowable
Working Pressure) stamped on the boiler and never less than 100 PSI. EXCEPTION: Blowoff Piping, Water Feed Piping and Valves
for same must be for a pressure of plus 25%, or for 125 PSI when MAWP is 100 PSI. For pressures above 100 PSI (MAWP stamped
above 100 PSI) an additional slow opening blowoff valve is required and all fittings between the boiler and blowdown tank must be
steel and the pipe must be equal to extra heavy Schedule 80.
BLOWDOWN AND DRAINS: A proper Blowdown System should be provided and must comply with Local Code Requirements. A
Blowdown Tank of approved design and proper size should be installed as the boiler cannot be satisfactorily operated without
adequate blowdown facilities. See Sheet 115 for the Blowdown Tank recommended with each size Parker Boiler. Size of Blowdown
Tank, Vent, and Blowdown Lines must not be smaller than recommended for each size Boiler.
It is important to connect the main blow-off and drain valves from the water level control in the proper manner. When the boiler
operating pressure exceeds 100 PSI, the Water Gage Glass Drain Valve should be piped to a safe point of discharge. The blowdown
lines should be full size unrestricted. A proper drain from the blowdown tank to the sump should be provided of same size as the
blowdown line and a cleanout should be available on the blowdown tank. All blowdown piping should be safely installed, inspected
before each blowdown, and replaced as required on indication of leaks or deterioration.
The Boiler Blowdown and Drain Lines should not be connected directly to the sewer. An adequate approved floor sump should be
provided conveniently near the boiler to drain any water on the floor of the boiler room, to serve the drain from the blowdown tank
without overflow, to handle the overflow from the return tank and all other drain lines. The recommended floor sump is a 12x12x18"
size up to 25 H.P. boilers; 18x18x24" up to 50 H.P., and 24x24x30" up to 150H.P. The recommended drain line size connecting the
floor sump to the sewer is listed on the Boiler Room Floor Plan Specification Sheet, Item "33FS". The proper sized floor sump and
floor sump drain line are essential as an inadequately sized drainage system will cause excessive water buildup on the boiler room
floor. Boiler room floors should be properly planned and graded to the floor sump to prevent water damage.
Do not pipe Return Tank Overflow line to the Safety Valve Discharge, boiler drains or blowdown piping. Under some conditions
pressure may back up and spray Hot Water out of Return Tank Well. Return Tank Drain Valve and Drain Piping is necessary so that
Return Tank can be regularly flushed and cleaned.
WARNING: ALL PIPING MUST BE SECURED SO THAT IT CANNOT COME LOOSE DURING BOILER OPERATION OR
BLOWDOWN. DO NOT STAND ON OR APPLY ANY STRAIN TO PIPING, CONTROLS AND VALVES.
GBI 101-5 3C
PAGE 5
IX. UTILITIES:
(1) FUEL SUPPLY:

Do not use this boiler with any other fuel than the one listed on the nameplate. Provisions must be made for adequate fuel supply,
proper size fuel lines, proper size gas meter and correct gas pressure if required. Refer to the correct Specification Sheet (D-101
through D-105) for the BTU Input, gas pressure required and G.P.H. oil required. It is essential that the correct type fuel to
specification and an adequate fuel supply be provided to assure efficient operation, proper boiler operating capacity and safety. All
fuel piping must conform to the Local Code Requirements. Piping must be securely braced and fittings must always be clean and free
of excessive pipe joint compound, teflon tape and cutting and threading burrs and chips. Pressure test fuel piping in accordance with
national and local codes. Never pressure test a fuel line with the Boiler connected as this may cause damage. Before firing the boiler,
be sure that all controls, valves and piping are tight and did not come loose in shipment. Use a soap-and-water solution to check for
fuel leaks. Never use a match or open flame. Check that all test plugs on the fuel line are securely in place before firing and after
making all adjustments. ONLY QUALIFIED BURNER SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD START-UP, ADJUST OR SERVICE THIS
EQUIPMENT.
On Gas Fired Boilers one upstream Gas Cock is furnished and an additional Gas Shutoff Cock (not furnished) is required to be
installed near the Boiler. A drip leg should be installed at low point on the gas line just before connecting to the Boiler controls. Gas
lines should be cleaned out before connecting to the Boiler. Before starting the boiler, open the cabinet inspection door and make
certain that all burners and the pilot are securely in place and properly positioned.
A. NATURAL GAS: Natural Gas Burners are satisfactory for use on Natural Gas Fuel, 950 to 1150 B.T.U. content per cubic foot with
.65 specific gravity. The Manufacturer should be notified of any change in pressure or fuel specifications that are not Standard so that
the burner will be properly furnished for best operating efficiency and safety. The Gas Company should be notified before installation
so that proper gas facilities can be provided.
(a.) NATURAL GAS WITH ATMOSPHERIC BURNERS: A pressure of 7" to 14" W.C. is recommended at the Gas Inlet for Models up
to 90 H.P. (larger sizes require 10-14" W.C.). The Gas Pressure Regulator furnished will reduce pressure to 4" W.C. required at
the burner orifice for the proper Boiler rating. On inlet pressures exceeding 14" W.C., the proper high pressure regulator must be
ordered or field installed. On inlet pressures below the above values, the Factory should be consulted.
Proper flame should be blue, approximately 1-1/2" above burner head with a slight orange tip. Orifice in burner spuds are drilled
for best efficiency at the B.T.U. rating and gas pressure furnished. If combustion is not proper, call Gas Company Engineer or
Factory Representative for regulation.
(b.) NATURAL GAS WITH POWER BURNERS: A pressure of 7 to 14" W.C. up to 50 HP or 12" to 27.7" W.C. for larger sizes is
recommended at the Gas Inlet. Each Boiler is marked with the appropriate manifold gas pressure. The gas pressure regulator
furnished should be adjusted so the manifold gas pressure will not exceed this setting.
B. LIQUID PETROLEUM GAS (L.P.G.): The burner may be furnished for Liquid Petroleum Gas (Butane or Propane) firing when so
specified. Provisions should be made with the Gas Supplier for the proper capacity, pressure requirements and pressure regulator
when required.
The Local Requirements for installation of the tank and supply lines should be properly investigated prior to installation and fully
conform to Code Requirements. The Manufacturer should be furnished Gas Specifications with the Order.
(a.) LPG WITH ATMOSPHERIC BURNERS: On LP Gas a pressure of 1 PSI to 5 PSI is recommended at the Gas Inlet. The regulator
furnished will reduce pressure to 18" W.C. required at burner for proper rate. A separate pilot line gas pressure regulator is
furnished and should remain set for 11" W.C. at the pilot burner even though a higher pressure is required at the main burner.
(b.) LPG WITH POWER BURNERS: A pressure of 12" to 27.7" W.C. is recommended at the Gas Inlet. Each boiler is marked with the
appropriate manifold gas pressure. The gas pressure regulator furnished should be adjusted so the manifold gas pressure will not
exceed this setting.
C. FUEL OIL: Oil burners are standardly furnished for No. 2 light fuel oil, A.S.T.M. Specification D-396, with approximately 141,000
BTU content per gallon. Oil tank installation and connecting lines should be in full compliance with Local Code Requirements. The
size of the oil supply tank should be to the advantage of the particular installation in considering the capacity for the most economical
quantity purchase and of sufficient storage for the delivery service available.
A Two Pipe System (suction and return) is recommended on all installations and required on jobs with oil supply tank below burner
level. A minimum 3/8" suction line is required up to 12 H.P. size, 1/2" suction line up to 22 H.P., 3/4" suction line size up to 90 H.P.
and 1" suction line size 115 H.P. and larger. Increase size of suction line if over 30' long. The return line may be one size smaller. On
any suction line exceeding 50' or more than 10' lift, an auxiliary oil pump is required to keep continuous flow of oil circulating through
line at all times while boiler is in use. An oil filter must be installed near the burner. If the oil supply inlet pressure is above 3 PSI, a
special pressure regulating valve is required. The fuel line connections at the burner should be flexible pipe or copper tubing for
service convenience. For proper oil piping details, see the oil burner instructions.
The proper size oil nozzle(s) are furnished for the rated pressure of the burner. Competent trained service personnel should install oil
gage(s) as shown in burner manual to check pressure. Remove gages when pressure settings are correct to prevent damage to the
gages.
GBI 101-5 3C
PAGE 6
IX. UTILITIES - Continued)
(2) ELECTRICAL:
Each Parker Steam Boiler is Standardly furnished with the control circuit completely wired and factory fire tested. Field installation
requires a main line disconnect switch (es). Use Copper Conductors Only. The main line disconnect switch (es) should be of the
circuit breaker or fused disconnect type. The Boiler must be grounded in accordance with the National Electric Code. Do not use
gas piping as an electrical ground. All electrical connections should be furnished in complete accordance with the Local Code
Requirements and must be in conduit. ALWAYS TURN OFF ALL MAIN LINE DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ALL OTHER
SOURCES OF POWER BEFORE WORKING ON ANY ELECTRICAL CONTROLS. The Electrical Service must match the
Specifications of the Equipment.
(a). ATMOSPHERIC BURNER MODELS:
(1) All 15 PSI and 1-1/2 H.P. to 16 H.P. up to 125 PSI. Standardly furnished for 115 Volt, 60 Hertz, 1 Phase Service. Adequate
supply for at least 15 Amps is recommended. 70 H.P. to 150 H.P. require two line services.
(2) 1-1/2 H.P. to 16 H.P. above 125 PSI and 20 H.P. to 50 H.P. above 15 PSI. Standardly furnished for 230 Volt, 60 Hertz, 3 Phase
with control transformer for 115 Volt Boiler Controls. Adequate supply for at least 15 Amps is recommended.
(3) 70 H.P. to 150 H.P. above 15 PSI. Standardly furnished for two 230 Volt, 60 Hertz, 3 Phase services with control transformer for
115 Volt Boiler Controls. Two supplies for at least 20 Amps each are recommended.
(b). POWER BURNER MODELS:
Electrical Service for Boiler Feed Pumps must be furnished as shown above under Atmospheric Burner Models. In addition, Power
Gas Fired Models up to 50 H.P., Oil Fired Models up to 30 H.P., and Gas/Oil Fired Models up to 50 H.P. require an additional 115 Volt,
60 Hertz, 1 Phase service for burner blower motor. Larger size boilers require an additional 230 Volt, 60 Hertz, 3 Phase service for
burner blower motor. On all power burners where a separate oil pump is furnished, an additional line service may be required. A
control transformer for the 115 Volt boiler controls will be furnished where necessary. NOTE: Special Power Burners, higher
elevations, etc. may change electrical requirements. Adequate electrical supply for at least 20 Amps is recommended for each burner
service.
(3) WATER SUPPLY:

Provisions must be made for proper and adequate water supply and piping to comply with Local Code Requirements. A minimum size
water supply line to the return tank float valve of 1/2" is required for boilers up to 12 H.P., 3/4" up to 25 H.P., 1" up to 90 H.P. and 1-
1/4" up to 150 H.P. Boilers. If pressure is below 40 PSI, the line size should be increased. The boiler evaporates approximately 4.14
gallons of water per hour per horsepower but supply lines should have sufficient safety factor to accommodate the capacity of the
boiler pumps.
When the Parker Feedwater Return Tank is used, a water pressure not exceeding 50 PSI is desirable and higher pressures require
installation of a water pressure reducing valve or water hammer arrestor. The Parker Return Tank has an automatic float valve and
provides the required separation from the city water so that no back flow preventive device is required.
When a direct water feeder is used or the boiler connected directly to the city line, the necessary check valves and back flow device
must conform to Local Code. On direct water feed when the pumps are not used, the water supply pressure must exceed the boiler
operating pressure by a minimum of 10 PSI to assure positive water feed to the boiler. Pressure rating of direct water feeders must be
equal or greater than boiler safety relief valve setting.
X. BOILER WATER TREATMENT:
EVERY STEAM BOILER REQUIRES THE PROPER WATER TREATMENT AND BLOWDOWN PROGRAM BASICALLY ESSENTIAL
FOR LONG LIFE SERVICE. See Bulletin 1001-B. A raw water analysis should be taken initially of each installation so that the correct
Water Treatment and Operating Program can be established. Periodic samples should be taken of the boiler water as a matter of
proper follow-up. The Manufacturer offers analysis service and assistance for proper boiler water control when such competent water
treating facilities are not locally or conveniently available. Review "GUIDE ON PROPER BOILER OPERATION", BULLETIN 101-5.
The Manufacturer is sincerely interested to cooperate with the planning of all Installations to fully comply with Code and to the
advantage of a safe and efficient Installation. Refer to the Installation Drawings for more complete details. Consult the Manufacturer
or Representative at any time for assistance. Refer to the Manufacturer's Operating and Maintenance Instructions for proper care of
the boiler.
INST BD 105
70 - 150 H.P.
8A
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS BLOWDOWN AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS
PARKER INDUSTRIAL HORIZONTAL DRUM STEAM BOILERS 70 TO 150 H.P.
ATMOSPHERIC GAS FIRED
The proper installation of the Blowdown System and drains are essential to the life and safety of the boiler. The diagram furnished
illustrates the recommended installation method and by following these instructions, the equipment will be installed in the best manner
for safe and economical operation. It is the experience of the Manufacturer that the life of the equipment will be considerably increased
if the Blowdown System is correctly installed and blowdowns made regularly to Manufacturer's Minimum Recommendations.
11. BOILER BLOWDOWN CONNECTIONS: Two Main Blowdown connections are provided directly off of the two bottom mud traps at
the rear of the boiler. If more convenient, these may be connected to the front as capped nipples extend out the front side for this
purpose and also for convenience of cleaning. Two Header Blowdown Connections are provided on the front and rear center of
the boiler above the main blowdown level for purpose of blowing down the tube headers.
11A. MAIN BOILER BLOW-OFF VALVES: Two 2" Main Blow-off Valves are furnished with each boiler and should be installed at the
blowdown connection near the boiler in an accessible location for safely and easily blowing down the equipment regularly. The
fast-opening blow-off valve is very advantageous on the design of boiler as it provides quick full opening with a quarter of a turn for
effectively and thoroughly flushing the boiler. This valve does not require any lubrication, adjustment or maintenance. Always
open the valve fully and do not throttle. On complete blowdowns, let the boiler feed pump run 30 to 60 seconds before closing the
valve. If the valve does not close freely, do not force, but let the pump run longer to flush any foreign material through the valve to
be sure it is clear to close freely.
11B. HEADER BLOW-OFF VALVES: Two 1" Header blow-off Valves, the same type as the main blow-off valves, are furnished with the
boiler and should be installed conveniently near the boiler and connected full size into the main blowdown line.
11D. MAIN BLOWDOWN LINE: Connect full 2" size as straight and low as convenient to an approved blowdown tank. The two 2"
blowdown lines off of the mud trap and the two 1" header blowdown lines should be piped full size into the 2" main blowdown line
as shown on the drawing. All piping, valves, and fittings installed in the blowdown line must be rated for a minimum pressure at
least 25% above the working pressure of the boiler. All lines should be safely installed and properly supported. All blowdown lines
should be inspected regularly and replaced yearly or immediately on indication of leaks or weakness. Every precaution should be
taken to the best interest of safety in preventing personal injury. There should be a means provided for draining the boiler when
not under pressure and it is recommended that a 3/4" gravity drain valve be installed at the low point of the main blowdown line as
shown and piped to a drain. This valve should be plugged and never be opened during blowdown or while the boiler is under
pressure. Use black steel pipe only, no galvanized or copper in these services.
NOTE: On pressures above 100 PSI, one additional 11C. Slow Opening Blow-off Valve (NF) is required for each boiler and should
be installed as shown. Blowdown line piping from the boiler to the second blow-off a valve must be extra heavy steel and should
be comparable to Schedule 80.
12D. SAFETY VALVE DRAIN: One 12A. Safety Valve is standardly furnished with the 70 or 90 H.P. Boiler and two safety valves with
boilers 115 H.P. and larger. The drain line from the safety valves should be connected full size to a safe point of discharge or in full
compliance with Local Code. It is recommended if connected upward and out of room, a drain line should be provided at low point
to keep this line drained. Safety valve line should be properly supported to prevent any strain or damage to the valve body.
18D. DRAIN LINE FROM WATER LEVEL CONTROL: Connect full 1" size to the main blowdown line as shown. The drain valve under
the water level control should be flushed daily to keep these lines clean and free from sediment.
30. BLOWDOWN TANK: An adequate size, properly designed approved blowdown tank should be provided for the boiler system,
having a capacity of not less than twice the volume of the boiler water so that the boiler can be blown down completely without
restriction. See Manufacturer's Blowdown Tank Specification Sheet 115.
31. INTERNAL TANK BAFFLE: All Tanks must have an internal baffle at the blowdown inlet so that the steam distribution will be
equalized and directly discharged against the shell of the tank.
32L. BLOWDOWN TANK VENT LINE: Must be run upward to safe location above roof to Local Code Requirements. A full 5" size vent
may be required by Local Code; however, a 4" vent is adequate to relieve the pressure on the proper size of Parker Blowdown
Tank for pressures up to 150 PSI providing the vent is straight up and not restrictive. Consult the local inspection authority for
approval before reducing to this size of vent.
33. BLOWDOWN TANK DRAIN OUTLET: The drain outlet must be connected to an approved open floor sump or safe drain. Run this
line the same size as the main blowdown line unless a larger size is required by Local Code. If this water is being discharged into
a sewer system, the temperature of the water entering the drainage system should not exceed 140ºF. On Parker Blowdown Tanks,
the drain outlet is built with a siphon breaker and located so that the tank remains at least 1/2 full of water after each blowdown.
The drain outlet is also properly trapped so that water is drained within 6 inches from the bottom of the tank. On multiple boiler
installations, a blowdown cooling assembly is recommended.
34. BLOWDOWN TANK CLEANOUT OPENING: A cleanout drain connection of 2" minimum size should be provided at the bottom of
the tank. The tank should be inspected and cleaned out every 30 days or as required.
INSBD105.DOC
INST. 106 DUAL
9D
PARKER RETURN SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
RETURN SYSTEMS R-7 TO R-9 WITH DUAL BURKS PUMPS
FOR STEAM BOILERS 70 H.P. TO 150 H.P.
The drawing furnished illustrates the recommended installation of the Return System with the required connections that must be properly followed for correct
operation of the System. The equipment should be installed in an accessible location near the boiler for efficient operation.
10. WATER FEED LINE TO BOILER: This line should be connected from the pump discharge lines to the boiler at least 1-1/2" size and increased in
over 10' in length. The pump discharge lines should be piped full 1" size from the 10C check valve to the main water feed line on boilers 70 to 90
H.P., and full 1-1/4" size on boilers 115 to 150 H.P. A 10C check valve, 10PA pump discharge shut-off valve (not furnished) and a union should be
installed near each boiler feed pump. A 10A shut-off valve (not furnished) must be installed near the boiler. Both valves 10A and 10PA must be
open at all times the pump or boiler is in operation. 10D relief valves (not furnished) should be installed on each pump discharge line on the pump
side of the check valves to protect the pumps in event of restriction or stoppage in the discharge line.
20. PUMP INLETS FROM RETURN TANK: These lines are furnished completely piped as shown in the drawing from the Return Tank to the boiler
feed pumps. The 20A shut-off valves must be open at all times when the boiler or pumps are in operation. The 20S strainers have been installed to
prevent dirt, foreign particles or scale from damaging the pump. The strainers should be cleaned at least every 30 days. The 20FH high
temperature flexible rubber hoses have been installed to eliminate vibration and piping strain on the pump.
21. TURBINE BOILER FEED PUMPS: The pumps are furnished for the purpose of pumping water into the boiler under pressure. The heavy duty
Burks Pumps are a close coupled bronze fitted turbine type equipped with stainless steel shafts. The pumps are standardly furnished with
mechanical shaft seals so that no leakage should be experienced from the pumps. The pumps themselves do not require any packing or
lubrication. The motor bearings should be lubricated annually. After years of service, it may be desirable to adjust the impellers to compensate for
water wear. This may be necessary because of reduced capacity or pressure and may be done without disturbing piping or disassembling the
pumps by use of the external impeller adjustment. The pumps must always be securely mounted to the mounting brackets and motors. Never
operate the pumps without water as this may damage the seals.
Caution should be taken never to close a valve (10PA or 10A) on the pump discharge line while the pumps are in operation as no relief valve is built
into the pumps and closing the valve would seriously harm the pumps. To protect from the danger of closed valves or restriction in the discharge
line (10), A 10D relief valve should be installed. All piping should be installed to the pumps in the proper manner so there is no strain on the pumps.
The boiler pumps are to be wired through the motor starting relays on the boiler and are controlled by the water level control for the purpose of
maintaining proper water level in the boiler. The pump motors are wired to start the first pump when water is required in the boiler and to start the
second pump at a slightly lower level.
22. RETURN TANK: The Return Tank serves as the storage supply for water make-up and condensate return. Each tank is standardly equipped with
an automatic float valve and assembly which should be adjusted to maintain a satisfactory water level in the tank with and additional volume available
for condensate return. The proper water level in the tank is at least 2" above the bottom of the well but normally not above half full. On installations
where this is no condensate return, the water level can be adjusted to an increased height. The float valve is installed so that there is always an air
gap between the valve discharge nozzle and the top of the tank to comply with Code Requirements. The well is designed so that the lower end is
always below the water level, thereby, preventing steam returning from escaping out of the tank. The water level can be checked by looking at the
water level in the 22WG water gauge glass. The dust cover cap should always be kept over the valve to prevent dirt or dust from getting into the
system. Each tank is standardly furnished with two suction shut-off valves, strainers and flexible rubber hoses. The Return Tank should be
inspected every 30 days and cleaned to eliminate any accumulation from damaging the pump.
23. CONDENSATE RETURN CONNECTIONS: All return lines should be properly trapped and connected back to the Return Tank. It is considered
good practice to conveniently grade the return lines back to the tank so that condensate return will flow by gravity to the tank. It is very beneficial to
return all clean condensate to the tank and no steam should be dissipated when the condensate can be piped to the Return Tank. If only one
connection is used, the other connection should be sealed with a capped nipple or plug.
25. CASA FLOAT VALVE: The Casa Float Valve is furnished for the purpose of admitting water to the Return Tank as required. The valve is designed
with a plunger having a removable rubber disc which should be replaced when the valve leaks. The plunger leather should also be replaced when
the valve leaks around the plunger. It is considered advisable to have extra rubber discs and leathers in stock available for immediate replacement.
Adjustment of the tank water level can be made easily by loosening the screw on the arm of the valve and rotating to the proper shut-off point. If
additional adjustment is require, the clevis must be loosened and the vertical float rod either lengthened or shortened to the proper shut-off point by
screwing the clevis either up or down. Two Casa Float Valves are furnished on Return Systems for 115 H.P. and larger boilers.
26. WATER INLET: The main water supply should be connected with galvanized pipe to the tee furnished on the Return Tank. A 26A shut-off valve
(not furnished) should be installed near the tank with a union on the tank side. This valve should be shut-off any time the system is not in use. A
minimum 1" size line should be installed for boilers 90 H.P. and smaller, and 1-1/4" up to 150 H.P. boilers. If water pressure is less than 40 PSI,
the line should be increased sufficiently to supply at least 20 gallons per minute for boilers up to 90 H.P. and at least 30 gallons per minute for
boilers up to 150 H.P. If water pressure exceeds 75 PSI, a water pressure reducing valve should be installed to prevent leaks and possible damage
to the float valve.
27. RETURN TANK VENT OUTLET: Should be connected upward to a safe location. A minimum 2" vent size should be installed. If the vent is not
straight, size should be increased. Vent is preferably galvanized pipe installed to prevent leaks and in accordance with Local Codes.
28. RETURN TANK OVERFLOW: Should be piped downward to a safe open drain or floor sump. Overflow should be piped minimum 1-1/4" size. If
the overflow continuously leaks, the valve assembly should be properly adjusted or repaired.
29. RETURN TANK DRAIN: This line should be installed full 1" size to a safe drain with 29A shut-off valve (not furnished) conveniently near the tank.
The drain line should be piped from the opening provided on the bottom of the tank opposite the well assembly. The other drain opening should be
sealed with a capped nipple or plug and used for inspection or additional drain. The Return Tank should be flushed and cleaned out every 30 days
or as required.
INST106DUAL.DOC
SERVICE AND ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONS SI 106-10
PARKER RETURN SYSTEM 8D
Before installing the return tank, carefully review the installation and maintenance instructions on the
Parker Return System. On completion of installation, test the float valve to be certain it shuts off properly.
Tighten any loose parts of the valve or float rod assembly. It is possible for the float assembly to vibrate
out of adjustment due to shipping, handling or excessive water pressure.
If the float valve and rod assembly is out of adjustment, the rubber disc or leather is worn, or water
pressure exceeds 75 PSI, valve leakage can be expected. For proper adjustment and repair, follow the
steps below.
I. FLOAT VALVE ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONS:

1. The valve and float rod assembly are properly adjusted if the water supply shuts off when the water
level in the tank is 2" or more above the bottom of the tank well. The water level should never be
less than 6" from the bottom of the tank and normally not more than half full. On installations where
there is no condensate return, the level can be adjusted to an increased height.
2. Adjustment of the water level shutoff point can be made easily by loosening the screw in the arm
of the valve and rotating to the proper shutoff point. After the proper level has been obtained,
tighten the screw.
3A. Return Systems with Non-Removable Wells (Rectangular Return Systems R1 to R4):
If satisfactory adjustment of the water level cannot be obtained by rotating the arm of the valve, it is
necessary to bend the float rod to the proper shutoff point. care should be taken that the float rod
does not touch the tank well before the valve shuts off.
3B. Return Systems with Removable Wells (Round Return Systems R5 to R10):
If satisfactory adjustment of the water level cannot be obtained by rotating the arm of the valve, the
height of the vertical float rod should be adjusted to the proper shutoff point. The height of the
vertical float rod can be adjusted by removing the pin and screwing the clevis bar to either lower or
raise the water level. If necessary, the entire well assembly can be removed by shutting off the
water supply, disconnecting the union at the tank and removing the four nuts attaching the well
assembly to the tank. This will permit free removal of the entire assembly so that the entire
linkage and float ball can be checked. Large return systems are furnished with dual float valve
assemblies and each valve should be adjusted separately.
II. REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTIONS OF THE DISC AND LEATHER:

If the valve does not shut off with the proper adjustment, the plunger tube can be easily removed and
the disc replaced as follows:
1. Close shutoff valve in water line to tank.
2. Remove the small cap over the end of the valve plunger. Remove U-bar from plunger.
3. Slide out the plunger. Replace the disc if it shows signs of wear. The leather wiper can easily be
replaced by unscrewing the plunger at the point where the leather is attached. Reassemble valve
and test for proper shutoff.
III. EXCESSIVE WATER PRESSURE:

The valve assembly is approved for pressure up to 75 PSI. On water pressure above 75 PSI, a water
pressure reducing valve should be installed to prevent leaks and possible damage tot the float valve.
IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS:
When the boiler and return system are not in service, always be sure to close the Main Water Supply
Valve (26a) to the return tank if there is any possibility of water damage to the building, equipment or
supplies should the float valve fail to shut off. Never operate the boiler feed pump with any valve in the
suction or discharge piping closed as this will damage the pump.
SI 106-10.DOC
BULLETIN 127 DURABLA
9D
PARKER BOILER CO.

DURABLA BSS STAINLESS STEEL CHECK VALVE
The Durabla BSS Check Valve is designed and

recommended as the water feed line check valve to be
used on the pump discharge line on Steam Boilers for
operating pressure to 200 PSI. This is a spring loaded
check valve with all parts constructed of stainless steel
and designed for 300 PSI steam pressure. This is a
quality check valve that has proven to be very reliable
on Parker installations and provides certain
advantages to eliminate many of the problems for this
application.
DURABLA BSS CHECK VALVE

MOUNTED IN BELL REDUCER
ADVANTAGES
1. Design Simplicity: The Durabla Check Valve consists of five simple components in a small
unit, which resembles a bushing in outside appearance. The basic unit
screws into a bell reducer or any standard pipe fitting and makes a
complete check valve.
2. Long Life Service: The rugged construction assures long reliable service life and freedom
from costly shutdowns and maintenance. The valve member is
precision lapped to the seat. Since the valve is free to rotate
continuously during operation, it should provide long life service.
3. Stainless Steel
Construction: Protection against corrosion and erosion is provided by making all parts
of stainless steel. This construction almost eliminates any possibility of
wire drawing the seat or valve face if a particle sticks within the valve.
4. Spring Load: The valve is equipped with a spring which applies pressure on top of
the valve to assist in the quick positive close action and minimize the
problem of siphoning water into the boiler when not in service.
5. Operation In
Any Position: Durabla Check Valves operate perfectly in any position, however,
vertical is preferred.
INSTALLATION
Always install the Durabla Check Valve with a union connection nearby, as cleaning the valve
requires breaking into the line and removing the check valve.
BULLETIN 127 DURABLA
9D
As illustrated below, the Durabla Check Valve consists of five simple components. The guard
cage protects the spring and valve member from damage. The retaining ring locks the parts
together, yet permits easy disassembly. The seat is threaded to receive the proper line size
into the inlet side. The outlet side is threaded to fit into a bell reducer or standard pipe fitting,
which becomes the valve body.
PROBLEM:
If the check valve should leak,
the pump may become vapor-
locked and fail to pump. This
GUARD CAGE will cause a low -water condition
in the boiler and cause water in
the return tank to over-heat
creating a hammering noise as
steam backs into the return tank.
SPRING REMEDY:
Tap lightly on side of valve and
bell reducer. This may loosen
any particles which have
become lodged between valve
VALVE face and seat. If this does not
stop valve from leaking, follow
the complete instructions below.
CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS:
1. Turn off electricity.
RETAINING RING 2. Blow boiler down to zero
pressure.
3. Close Water Feed Stop
Valve (10A) near boiler.
4. Loosen union near check
valve, and remove it from
line.
5. Disassemble and thoroughly
SEAT clean valve and seat so that
a tight fit is obtained. In
extreme cases of scale
formation, the entire valve
may be immersed in acid to
clean properly.
VALVE SIZE: 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2"

REDUCER SIZE: 1/2 X 1" 3/4 X 1-1/2" 1X2 1-1/4 X 2-1/2"* 1-1/2 X 3" 2 X 4"
For boiler pressures 100 PSI use standard reducer rated 150 PSI, for pressures up to 200 PSI
use 300 PSI fittings.
*1-1/4 X 2 -1/2" Bell Reducer not available in 300 PSI pressure, use coupling and bushing for
this application.
127 BSS.doc
PARTS SHEET 106
8B
P A R K E R B O I L E R C O.
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
RETURN TANK PARTS
R9 UPPER CLEVIS W/BOLT & NUT
106 RETURN TANKS
FOR ALL WR-RETURN TANKS
CURRENT RETURN TANK NOTE: WRH TANKS W/
R10-25.5 1/4X25-1/2" VERT FLOAT ROD & NUTS,
PRE-HEATER REQ SPECIAL WELL.
FOR WRH4260
PRE-HTR. N.A. ORR1020
WRH3036 RETURN TANK W/FVA FOR R5&6 SYSTEMS
FOR WRVV2230
WRH3036-FVA 3/4" FL OAT VALVE ASSEMBLY
WRH3036-WO 6X18" WELL ONLY
FOR WRH4896
ORR1020 RETURN TANK W/FVA FOR R1 SYSTEMS
ORR1020-FVA 1/2" FLOAT VALVE ASSEMBLY
FOR WRVV3036
ORR1036 RETURN TANK W/FVA FOR R2&3 SYSTEMS
R11 LOWER CLEVIS W/ BAR & BOLTS,
ORR1336 RETURN TANK W/FVA FOR R4 SYSTEMS
R12 10/32X1" BRASS BOLT & NUT,
WRH3036-WFA 6"WELL, 3/4"FLOAT VALVE ASSY. & CAP
WRH3648 RETURN TANK W/FVA &WGF24(R7 SYSTEM)
FOR WRH1824
WRH3648-FVA 3/4" FLOAT VALVE ASSEMBLY
FOR WRH2230
WRH3660 RETURN TANK W/FVA &WGF24(R8 SYSTEM)
FOR WRH3036 & WRVV1824
WRH3660-FVA 3/4" FLOAT VALVE ASSEMBLY
FOR WRH3648 & WRH3660
R13 1/4X1-1/2" BRASS BOLT & NUT,
WRH4260 RETURN TANK W/WFA2 &WGF24(R9 SYS.)
FOR ALL WR RETURN TANKS
WRH4260-FVA2 DUAL 3/4" FLOAT VALVE ASSEMBLY
R14-6 1/4X6" HORIZ FLOAT ROD & NUT,
WRH4260-WO2 5X7X24" WELL ONLY
FOR CWT71614 & ALL WRVV
WRH4260-WFA2 WELL,DUAL 3/4"FLOAT VALVE ASSY.&CAP
R15-6 6" COPPER FLOAT BALL,
WRH4896 RETURN TANK W/WFA2 &WGF30(R10 SYS.)
FOR WRH2230 & LARGER
WRH4896-FVA2 DUAL 3/4" FLOAT VALVE ASSY.
R16-4 4" DUST CAP FOR RETURN TANK,
WRH4896-WO2 5X7X27" WELL ONLY
FOR WRH1824 TO WRH3660 BEFORE 4/93
WRH4896-WFA2 WELL, DUAL 3/4"FLOAT VALVE ASSY.&CAP
R16-4X7 4X7" DUST CAP FOR WRH4260 & WRH4896
R16-6 6" DUST CAP FOR RETURN TANK
SPECIAL ITEMS
FOR ORR,ORH1020-2230,4/93 WRH30-36"
WGF WATER GAGE FIXTURES & GLASS MOUNTED
R16-7X16 7X16" DUST CAP FOR CWT71614 CW TANK
PHO OPENINGS INSTALLED FOR PRE -HEATER
R14-11 1/4X11" HORIZ FLOAT ROD & NUT,
FOR ALL WRH
COLD WATER TANKS 16GA
R14-18.5 1/4X18-1/2" BENT FLOAT ROD & NUT,
CWT71614 COLD WATER TANK W/FVA
FOR ORH & ORR 1020 & 1320
CWT71614-FVA 1/2" FLOAT VALVE ASSEMBLY
R14-25.5 1/4X25-1/2" BENT FLOAT ROD & NUT,
FOR ORR1036 ORR1336 ORH1824 ORH2230
PRE-HEATERS & PARTS
R15-3.5 3" COPPER FLOAT BALL, FOR ORR1020 BUILT
PH2 PRE-HEATER INSTALLED WITH 43" T.A.,
BEFORE 11/78, FOR ALL ORH & ORHV1320
150-F-.5, 77S-.5 & BMT250 FOR R2 -6
R15-5 5" COPPER FLOAT BALL,
PH2-LC PRE-HEATER INSTALLED WITH 43" T.A., FITTINGS,
FOR ORR1020 AFTER 11/78; ORR1036 & 1336; ORH
LESS CONTROLS & TRIM
& WRH1824; ORH2230; CWT --
PH2-T A 43" COPPER PRE -HEATER TUBE ASSY.
20FH-1 4X1-3/8" RUBBER HOSE FOR 1"PIPE
20FH-1.25 4X1-5/8" RUBBER HOSE FOR 1-1/4"PIPE
151-F-.75, 77S-.75 & BMT250 FOR R7
20FH-1.5 4X1-7/8" RUBBER HOSE FOR 1-1/2"PIPE
PH3-LC PRE-HEATER INSTALLED WITH 55" T.A., FITTINGS,
20FH-2 4X2-3/8" RUBBER HOSE FOR 2"PIPE
20FHC-1.5-2 CLAMP FOR 1-1/2" OR 2" HOSE 2 REQ.
20FHC-1-1.25 CLAMP FOR 1" OR 1-1/4" HOSE 2 REQ.
151-F-.75,77S-.75 & BMT250 FOR R8 -9
PH4-5-LC PRE-HEATER INSTALLED WITH 67" T.A., FITTINGS,
PH4-5-T A 67" COPPER PRE -HEATER TUBE ASSY.
PH6 PRE-HEATER INSTALLED WITH 103"T.A.,
152-F-1, 77S-1 & BMT250 FOR R10
PH3-T A 55" COPPER PRE -HEATER TUBE ASSY.

PARTS SHEET 106-108
8B
COND. TRANSFER SYS.
5GV6-9 COND.TRANSFER SYS. 9GL-CI 1/2HP 1PH
8514 5/8" MECHANICAL SEAL FOR CT G5 GB
106 BOB FLOAT VALVES
9530 O-RING FOR CT
25-.5 1/2" BOB FLOAT VALVE 75WWP
FOR ALL ORR & ORH PART S N.A.
CT PUMP PARTS
FOR VALVES BUILT B4 7/78
2258 IMPELLER LOCKNUT FOR CT
25-.5-1 VALVE DISC FOR 1/2"
8105 SLINGER WASHER FOR CT
25-.5-2 VALVE CUP FOR 1/2"
9162 IMPELLER ADJUSTING SCREW FOR CT
25-.5-3 COMPLETE PLUNGER ASSY. FOR 1/2"
20158-5 REPAIR KIT FOR CT5
25-.75 3/4" BOB FLOAT VALVE 75WWP,
FOR ALL WRH2230 & LARGER,
PARTS N.A. FOR VALVES BUILT B4 7/78
9521 FRAME FOR CT
25-.75-1 VALVE DISC FOR 3/4"
9896 1/3HP 1PH MOTOR 115/230V FOR CT
25-.75-2 VALVE CUP FOR 3/4"
25-.75-3 COMPLETE PLUNGER ASSY. FOR 3/4"
25-6 THUMBSCREW
25-SG GALV. SPLASHGUARD FOR FV
NOTE: Pump prices do not include suction strainer 9622 3/4HP 3PH MOTOR 208/460V FOR CT
nor discharge check valve. 8991 3/4" MECHANICAL SEAL FOR CS ES
For suction strainer, see Sheet 220.
9791 O-RING FOR CS ES
Order 77S-__(size-chart below).
For Discharge check valve, see Sheet 127.
Order BSS-__(size-chart below) CS & ES PUMP PARTS
SUCTION STRAINER & DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE SIZE 4231 SUCTION SLEEVE FOR CS ES
BOILER SIZE SUCTION STRAINER DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE 20522-5 REPAIR KIT FOR CS5 ES5
1-1/2 TO 3 H.P. 1" 1/2" 20522-6 REPAIR KIT FOR CS6 ES6
5 TO 25 H.P. 1" 3/4" 20522-7 REPAIR KIT FOR CS7 ES7
30 TO 90 H.P. 1-1/4"* 1" 20522-8 REPAIR KIT FOR CS8 ES8
115 TO 150 H.P. 1-1/2" 1-1/4" 20522-9 REPAIR KIT FOR CS9 ES9
1404 IMPELLER LOCK NUT FOR CS ES
*1-1/2" size furnished with 5G5-1-1/4-3.25 Pump
8324 SLINGER WASHER FOR CS ES
107 BURKS PUMPS 9781 IMPELLER ADJUSTING SCREW FOR CS ES
TURBINE PUMPS 9787 FRAME FOR CS
5CT6M 1/2 HP 1 PH PUMP 115/230V, 9790-B PUMP CASING FOR CS ES
1.5-16HP 15-125 PSI; 20-25HP 15 PSI 9806 1HP 3PH MOTOR 208/460V FOR CS
35CT6M 1/2 HP 3 PH PUMP 208/460V 9808 1.5HP 3PH MOTOR 208/460V FOR CS
7CT7M 3/4 HP 1 PH PUM P 115/230V 9810 2HP 3PH MOTOR 208/460V FOR CS
37CT7M 3/4 HP 3 PH PUMP 208/460V, TO16HP150#; 9812 3HP 3PH MOTOR 208/460V FOR CS
20-25HP100-150#;30HP100# 9855 5HP 3PH MOTOR 208/460V FOR CS
310CS7M 1 HP 3 PH PUMP 208/460V 21109 7.5HP 3PH MOTOR 208/460V FOR ES
315CS6M 1.5 HP 3PH PUMP 208/460V, 21348 POWER FRAME ASSY. FOR ES
40-70HP 100 PSI 5J-3/4X1-1/8 COMPLETE COUPLING FOR ES9
320CS6M 2 HP 3 PH PUMP 208/460V, 5J-SLEEVE COUPLING SLEEVE FOR ES9
30-70HP 125-150 PSI
330CS8M 3 HP 3 PH PUMP 208/460V, 90HP 100 PSI CENTRIFUGAL PUMP PARTS
350CS9M 5 HP 3 PH PUMP 208/460V, 9680-3.25 IMPELLER FOR 5G5-TI 3GB5
90-150HP 125-150 PSI 9581 1/3HP 1PH MOTOR 115/230V FOR G,GB
375ES9M 7.5 HP 3 PH PUMP 208/460V, 9582 1/2 HP 1 PH MOTOR 115/230V FOR G,GB
90-150HP 200 PSI 9662 1/2HP 3PH MOTOR 230/460V FOR G,GB
21333 O-RING FOR G5 GB5
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
5G5-1-1/4-3.25 1/2 HP 1 PH PUMP 115/230V, MISCELLANEOUS
30-150HP 15 PSI 482-2 2" SPANNER WRENCH *
35G5-1-1/4-3.25 1/2 HP 3 PH PUMP 208/460V 107-B3 PUMP MTG. BASE W/BOLTS FOR CT CS
3GB5-1.5F 1/3 HP 1 PH IL PUMP W/FLGS 115/230V,
REPAIR KIT INCLUDES IMPELL,RACEWAY, SEAL,O-
STD. ON WH300 TO WH730 (H52) RING,LOCKNUT&INST. (CS MODELS ALSO
5GB5-1.5F 1/2 HP 1 PH IL PUMP W/FLGS 115/230V, INCL.SUCT.SLV,RW SCR,SHFT.KEY)
STD. ON WH970 TO WH1410 (H53)
3104G6-2-5.88 1 HP 3 PH END-SUCTION PUMP 208/460V, 108 MTH PUMPS TURBINE PUMPS
STD. ON WH1900 TO WH3000 (H67) T51E-3HP MTH 3 HP 3 PH PUMP 208/460V,
320G6-1.5-MJ-4.38 2HP 3PH WATER COOLED CENT. PUMP 1.5-25HP 250 PSI
330G6-2-MJ-4.63 3HP 3PH WATER COOLED CENT. PUMP T51M-5HP MTH 5 HP 3 PH PUMP 208/460V,
350G6-2-MJ-5.19 5HP 3PH WATER COOLED CENT. PUMP 30-90HP 250PSI

BULLETIN GRI 101-5
4C

GENERAL RETUBE INSTRUCTIONS
I. WHEN SHOULD TUBES BE REPLACED:

Boiler tubes should be replaced only if deemed advisable from an internal and external inspection. If the tubes are
leaking resulting from a general scale condition, corrosion or excessive burning, it is considered advisable to replace
the entire set if such condition is present in several tubes. It is not considered advisable to replace only one tube
unless a careful internal inspection is made and all other tubes are found to be in perfect condition. Boiler tubes can
be reversed to provide longer life after years of service on Parker Boilers when considered advisable from inspection.
If a heavy scale condition is present in the boiler tubes, but there are no signs of leaks or excessive warping, it is
considered advisable to clean the boiler tubes in accordance with Bulletin 1003-821-E.
II. BASIC INSTRUCTIONS REQUIRED ON RETUBING:

1. Thoroughly test steam drum with heavy hammer, particularly over the upper section, to be certain the drum is in
perfect condition and will pass inspection. If the drum shows any weakness, it should be replaced.
2. Thoroughly clean the internal steam drum. Inspect to be certain all scale and deposits are properly removed from
the drum before new tubes are installed. Remove inspection plugs and wash out thoroughly.
3. Replace all internal fittings including all blowdown connections, water feed line, tube connections and water
column connections.
4. Replace the internal safety valve connection, steam valve connections, and water column connections.
5. Clean burners and orifices in burner spuds on gas fired models. Care must be taken to prevent damage to
burner or orifices.
6. Install tubes and all connection fittings in a correct manner so that each of the tubes and fittings are connected
properly without leaks and strain.
7. Hydrostatically test the unit for 1-1/2 times the working pressure.
8. Be certain to locate baffles and tube braces in proper position. See drawing furnished.
9. Inspect and repair cabinet. Insulation should be replaced if the boiler has been overheated, or on signs of
deterioration of the insulation. Cabinet should be properly repaired and painted with a heat resistant enamel or
equal.
10. Check and clean the condensate tank, blowdown tank and all connecting lines to and from the boiler.
11. Fire test the boiler and bring up to operating pressure, making a complete test to be certain that performance is
satisfactory. Blow the boiler down at least two times in the normal manner before the system is put into service to
remove all foreign matter.
III. IMPORTANT REQUIREMENTS FOR PROPER BOILER OPERATION:

Determine the cause of the tube replacement and take the proper precautionary measures to prevent recurrence. If
the replacement resulted from overheating, proper controls should be installed and sufficient maintenance undertaken
to eliminate future problems. If replacement resulted from a water condition, samples should be taken in accordance
with Water Sample Bulletin 1002 and proper water treating program and blowdown program started in accordance
with Water Treatment Bulletin 1001-B. See Guide on Proper Boiler Operation Bulletin 101-5 and Daily Boiler
Blowdown Instruction Sheet.
FOR COMPLETE INFORMATION ON RETUBING, SEE SPECIFIC RETUBE INSTRUCTION BULLETIN AND RETUBE
INSTRUCTION AND BAFFLE PLACEMENT DRAWING.
GRI101-5.DOC
BULLETIN SRI 105
70 TO 150 H.P.
PAGE 1 OF 2 / 4B
SPECIFIC RETUBE INSTRUCTIONS
70 TO 150 H.P. PARKER INDUSTRIAL HORIZONTAL DRUM STEAM BOILER
BEFORE RETUBING THE BOILER, THOROUGHLY READ THESE SPECIFIC RETUBE INSTRUCTIONS, THE
GENERAL RETUBE INSTRUCTION BULLETIN GRI 101-5, AND CAREFULLY REVIEW THE RETUBE
INSTRUCTION AND BAFFLE PLACEMENT DRAWING.
I. GENERAL INFORMATION:
1. It is not necessary to remove the cabinet for retubing as the tubes can be replaced through the cabinet
doors.
2. The boiler has multiple tube sets and each set consists of 2 tube sections. All tube sections are identical
and can be interchanged.
3. Each section is attached by 2 union connections. Tubes can be removed in sections by removing tube
baffles, tube braces, and disconnecting these 2 unions. The tube sections can be pulled through the
cabinet door. If a fork lift truck or hoist is available, this is ideal for supporting the weight and making it
easier to remove the tubes.
4. Before disconnecting the unions to remove the tubes, place adequate bracing such as 2x4's across the
tube headers so that the tubes will slip out easier and will not be allowed to drop down causing damage.
Pipe rollers can be placed on top of the 2x4's making it possible to roll the tube sections through the
cabinet door.
5. When installing tube sections in the front of the boiler, always install with the short length tube on the
top. When installing tube sections in the rear of the boiler, always install with the short length tube on
the bottom.
6. Since all tube sections are identical, any individual tube set consisting of 2 sections can be reversed or
turned upside down by turning end over end but it is necessary to pull the sections apart and move over
one tube for proper fitting.
II. RETUBE INSTRUCTIONS:

1. Remove the cabinet doors and door baffles. On larger models with 5 tube sets or more, there are 2
doors on each side with a sectional brace between the doors. On these larger models, unbolt this brace
and remove.
2. On gas fired models, remove burners under the tube sections, which are to be replaced.
When Removed by Individual Sections:
(a) Remove the 3 tube baffles in each set to be replaced. When tube baffles are tack welded in place,
it will be necessary to use a sharp chisel to loosen before removing.
(b) Remove the tube braces by using a heavy hammer and rod driving the braces parallel with the
tubes. When all tube braces have been driven to a parallel position, they will slip out of the way.
(c) Loosen the 2 union connections.
(d) Pull out the tube section through the cabinet door.
When Removed in Sets of 2 Sections:

If the tube set is badly burned or warped, it may be impossible to split tube sections apart. In this case
remove the entire set without splitting.
(a) It is not necessary to remove the tube braces or individual tube baffles.
(b) Loosen the 4 union connections (2 on each side of cabinet).
(c) Be sure that the weight is properly supported, as the tube set is very heavy and could cause
damage if it should slip down.
(d) The two outside sets can be removed by forcing the tubes to the outside toward the downcomer leg
when slipping them out. To remove an inside set it may be necessary to disconnect the unions on
an outside set and push over to the outside so that the inside set will come out.
BULLETIN SRI 105
70 TO 150 H.P.
PAGE 2 OF 2 / 4B
3. Removal of Tubes: Be sure to place bracing under tubes, see above Item 4.
4. If all tube sections are not replaced, the other sections should be inspected and thoroughly cleaned.
5. The water feed piping should be removed and thoroughly cleaned or replaced as necessary. On newer
models there is an internal fitting extending into the drum, which should be completely cleaned.
6. It is very important that the (2) tube headers connected to the lower unions of the tube sections be
carefully inspected and thoroughly cleaned or replaced as necessary. On a complete retube job, these
should be disconnected, inspected and cleaned.
7. The blowdown piping and inspection nipples from the downcomer leg should be removed. The drum
inspection openings on the head of the drum should be removed. The drum and downcomer leg should
be washed out and cleaned thoroughly. It is possible to run a hose down into the downcomer leg
through the drum inspection opening to assist in washing out the downcomer leg. All piping and fittings
should be cleaned and replaced as necessary. Replace gasket when installing drum inspection
opening.
8. All piping to and including the water level control should be removed and cleaned or replaced as
necessary.
9. The tube sections removed should be replaced following the same procedure as used in removing the
old tubes.
10. Re-install the baffles exactly as shown on the drawing. Baffles incorrectly installed may be hazardous.
11. Tube braces provide support to the tube sections and must be correctly installed. Drive tube braces into
proper position with hammer. Refer to drawing for correct placement.
12. Hydrostatically test the boiler and tighten any loose connections.
13. Be certain that all work is performed in a good workmanship and code manner. Carefully review the
General Retube Instruction Bulletin 101-5 to be certain that all instructions are carefully followed.
NOTE:
All pipe fittings should be fitted with teflon tape and properly lubricated with steam pipe dope to assure a
satisfactory installation.
Upper fittings connecting the tube sections to the drum should be thoroughly inspected and cleaned or replaced
as necessary.
SRI105.DOC
PARTS SHEET 105
8B
105 70-150 H.P. COMMON PARTS
105-ALLAI INDIVIDUAL BENT TUBE 115 H.P. 593 SF HS,
105-ALLAT TUBE SECTION - 200SWP, 22"BD, 3"MGV, 1&2"BOV, (2)1.5"HPSV,
12 PLUGS, 6 TUBES, SECTION WGT 300# 10 SECTIONS, 120 PLUGS, WGT 3000#
105-ALLATS TUBE SET GAS (2 SECTIONS) 200SWP 105-115AC COMPLETE TUBES-GAS 200SWP W/INST
105-ALLATSO TUBE SET GO (2 SECTIONS) 200SWP 105-115ACO COMPLETE TUBES GO 200SWP W/INST
105-ALLBD BLOWDOWN LINE 105-115AH LOWER TUBE HEADER 2REQ
105-ALLBDI BD INSPECTION LINE & CAP 105-115BF BOILER FRAME
105-ALLBDIS DOWNCOMER SHORT INSP. LINE & CAP 105-115BG COMPLETE SET GAS BAFFLES
105-ALLBGT GAS BAFFLE FOR TUBE SET 11X17" H-3, 105-115BO COMPLETE SET GO BAFFLES
3 REQUIRED PER SET 105-115BP BURNER STRINGER PIPE LESS ORIFICES
105-ALLBT BRACE FOR TUBE SET 5/8"SQ. X16-3/4", 105-115BS BURNER STRINGER ASSY. LESS ORIFICES
9 REQUIRED PER SET 105-115CC-XX COMPLETE CABINET 150SWP
105-ALLDF 3" CL 150 BLIND FLANGE 105-115CC2-XX COMPLETE CABINET 200SWP
105-ALLDFG 3" FLANGE GASKET 105-115CDFL FRONT LEFT CABINET DOOR W/PID
105-ALLUFH UPPER HI TUBE/DRUM BEND 105-115CDFR FRONT RIGHT CABINET DOOR W/PID
105-ALLUFL UPPER LO TUBE/DRUM BEND 105-115CDR REAR CABINET DOOR 2REQ
105-ALLWCL LOWER WC PIPING 150SWP 105-115CH CABINET HALF SECTION 2REQ
105-ALLWCU UPPER WC PIPING 150SWP 105-115CL-XX CABINET OUTER LID
105-ALLWF WATER FEED LINE 240SWP 105-115CT-XX CABINET TOP & INNER LID
105-115D-XX BOILER DRUM ONLY
70 H.P. 349 SF HS, 105-115DB-XX DRUM W/AH&BD&BDI&BDIS&UF&WF
18"BD, 2"MGV, 1&2"BOV, 1.5"HPSV, 105-115DI-XX DRUM & TUBE INSERT
6 SECTIONS, 72PLUGS, WGT 1800#
105-70AC COMPLETE TUBES-GAS 200SWP W/INST 150 H.P. 793 SF HS,
105-70ACO COMPLETE TUBES GO 200SWP W/INST 26"BD, 3"MGV, 1&2"BOV, (2)1.5"HPSV,
105-70AH LOWER TUBE HEADER 2REQ 14 SECTIONS, 168 PLUGS, WGT 4200#
105-70BF BOILER FRAME 105-150AC COMPLETE TUBES-GAS 200SWP W/INST
105-70BG COMPLETE SET GAS BAFFLES 105-150ACO COMPLETE TUBES GO 200SWP W/INST
105-70BO COMPLETE SET GO BAFFLES 105-150AH LOWER TUBE HEADER 2REQ
105-70BP BURNER STRINGER PIPE LESS ORIFICES 105-150BF BOILER FRAME
105-70BS BURNER STRINGER ASSY. LESS ORIFICES 105-150BG COMPLETE SET GAS BAFFLES
105-70CC-XX COMPLETE CABINET 150SWP 105-150BO COMPLETE SET GO BAFFLES
105-70CC2-XX COMPLETE CABINET 200SWP 105-150BP BURNER STRINGER PIPE LESS ORIFICES
105-70CDF FRONT CABINET DOOR W/PID 105-150BS BURNER STRINGER ASSY. LESS ORIFICES
105-70CDR REAR CABINET DOOR 105-150CC-XX COMPLETE CABINET 150SWP
105-70CH CABINET HALF SECTION 2REQ 105-150CC2-XX COMPLETE CABINET 200SWP
105-70CL-XX CABINET OUTER LID 105-150CDFL FRONT LEFT CABINET DOOR W/PID
105-70CT-XX CABINET TOP & INNER LID 105-150CDFR FRONT RIGHT CABINET DOOR W/PID
105-70D-XX BOILER DRUM ONLY 105-150CDR REAR CABINET DOOR 2 REQ.
105-70DB-XX DRUM W/AH&BD&BDI&BDIS&UF&WF 105-150CH CABINET HALF SECTION 2REQ
105-70DI-XX DRUM & TUBE INSERT 105-150CL-XX CABINET OUTER LID
105-150CT-XX CABINET TOP & INNER LID
90 H.P. 456 SF HS, 105-150D-XX BOILER DRUM ONLY
20"BD, 2.5"MGV, 1&2"BOV,(2)1.5"HPSV, 105-150DB-XX DRUM W/AH&BD&BDI&BDIS&UF&WF
8 SECTIONS, 96 PLUGS, WGT 2400# 105-150DI-XX DRUM & TUBE INSERT
105-90AC COMPLETE TUBES-GAS 200SWP W/INST
105-90ACO COMPLETE TUBES GO 200SWP W/INST
105-90AH LOWER TUBE HEADER 2REQ
105-90BF BOILER FRAME
105-90BG COMPLETE SET GAS BAFFLES
105-90BO COMPLETE SET GO BAFFLES
105-90BP BURNER STRINGER PIPE LESS ORIFICES
105-90BS BURNER STRINGER ASSY. LESS ORIFICES
105-90CC-XX COMPLETE CABINET 150SWP
105-90CC2-XX COMPLETE CABINET 200SWP
105-90CDF FRONT CABINET DOOR W/PID
105-90CDR REAR CABINET DOOR
105-90CH CABINET HALF SECTION 2REQ
105-90CL-XX CABINET OUTER LID
105-90CT-XX CABINET TOP & INNER LID
105-90D-XX BOILER DRUM ONLY
105-90DB-XX DRUM W/AH&BD&BDI&BDIS&UF&WF
105-90DI-XX DRUM & TUBE INSERT
PARTS SHEET 117-118
8B
117 ACCESSORIES
TUBE ACCESS PLUG GLASS ONLY
IP TUBE ACCESS PLUG 3/4" NPS WGL12 5/8X12" WATER GAGE GLASS ONLY
IG TUBE ACCESS GASKET 3/4"
IW TUBE ACCESS WRENCH 1/2" SQ. X 13" RED LINE GAGE GLASS
IHC TUBE ACCESS HALF COUPLING 3/4" NPS WGRED12 RED LINE GAGE GLASS W/WGR
IT TUBE ACCESS TAP 3/4" NPS *
IB COUNTER-SUNK BRASS PLUG 3/4" NPT * GASKET & RUBBERS
WGR 5/8" W.G. REF.-TEFLON RUBBER
S.S. STEAM LINE ORIFICE WGR-SR 5/8" W.G. SILICONE RUBBER
D-.5-XX 1/2" ORIFICE DISC ONLY WGG 5/8" W.G. FIBER GASKET
UD-.5-XX 1/2" 250# UNION WITH ORIFICE DISC,
FOR 1-1/2 & 3 H.P. PIPE THREAD SEALANT
D-.75-XX 3/4" ORIFICE DISC ONLY PJC-S PIPE JOINT STICK 1.25 OZ.
UD-.75-XX 3/4" 250# UNION WITH ORIFICE DISC, PJC-1/2 PIPE JOINT COMPOUND 1/2 PT. *
FOR 7 H.P. PJC-5 PIPE JOINT COMPOUND 5 LB. *
D-1-XX 1" ORIFICE DISC ONLY TT TEFLON TAPE 1/2 X 520" ROLL
UD-1-XX 1" 250# UNION WITH ORIFICE DISC,
FOR 5, 8, 9.5 & 15 H.P. 118 BOILER ALARMS
D-1.25-XX 1-1/4" ORIFICE DISC ONLY 2BZ-115V 2" ROUND ALARM BUZZER W/BRK. & SCR.
UD-1.25-XX 1-1/4" 250# UNION WITH ORIFICE DISC, LMC LINE ALARM BUZZER 115V
FOR 12, 16, 20 & 25 H.P. 4H-115V 4X4" HORN ONLY 115VAC
D-1.5-XX 1-1/2" ORIFICE DISC ONLY F350 FEDERAL HORN ONLY 115VAC
UD-1.5-XX 1-1/2" 250# UNION WITH ORIFICE DISC, 4HJB 4X4X1-1/2" HORN J-BOX
FOR 22 & 30 H.P. 4B-115V 4" ALARM BELL 115VAC
D-2-XX 2" ORIFICE DISC ONLY 4B-8V 4" ALARM BELL 8VAC,
UD-2-XX 2" 250# UNION WITH ORIFICE DISC, REQUIRES 590 OR 590Y TRANS. PG.123
FOR 40 TO 150 H.P.
** SPECIFY SIZE OF HOLE TO DRILL
WATER GAGE & COLUMN

1RM6 PENBERTHY W.G.FIX. 350SWP
PFVK-150 FITTINGS,VALVES&INST.FOR 1RM6 150#
PFVK-250 FITTINGS,VALVES&INST.FOR 1RM6 250#
B6/#6 PENBERTHY GLASS W/GASKETS
#6 PENBERTHY GASKET (2REQ.)
PEN-UB PENBERTHY 7/16" U-BOLT W/NUTS
WATER GAGE GLASSES: RATED 200 SWP

Gage Glass Length Required:
GLASS SIZE WATER LEVEL CONTROL
12" P3, P4, 17WC, MM157B(before 1984), MM291,
1419 Expansion Tank
11-1/2" MM193, MM194
11" MM293, 1014 Expansion Tank
10-1/2" MM194, MM157(after 1984)
8" 1010 Expansion Tank
WATER GAGE GLASSES

WG7 5/8X7" WATER GAGE GLASS W/WGR
WG10.5 5/8X10.5" WATER GAGE GLASS W/WGR
WG11.5 5/8X11.5" WATER GAGE GLASS W/WGR
WG12-SR 5/8X12" WATER GA GLASS W/WGR-SR&WGG
BULLETIN 122-HR
0 B1
PARKER BOILER HEAT RECLAIMER
GENERAL DESCRIPTION: The Parker Boiler Heat Reclaimer is a device designed to reclaim heat in the form of additional hot water
from exhaust stacks of gas and oil burning appliances. On Parker Steam & Hot Water Boilers and Indirect Fired Heaters it is inserted in
the vent stack between the boiler and the draft hood or barometric damper.
APPLICATIONS: The concept and use of a stack economizer or heat reclaim device dates from the turn of the century and should be
considered on installations requiring additional hot water and increased boiler plant efficiency. As fuel bills continue to rise, the
installation of a Parker Heat Reclaim device should be evaluated. The device can raise the net boiler efficiency and also increase
bottom line profitability by more fully utilizing the energy already paid for. Typical savings range from 6-10%. There is a wide variety of
ways to install the heat reclaimer, some utilizing hot water storage tanks or pressurized boiler feed tanks. Refer to recommended
installation drawing INST-122-HR.
PARKER HEAT RECLAIM SYSTEM: The Parker Boiler Heat Reclaimer is sold as an energy recovery package and includes the
following components:
1. Parker Stainless Steel Heat Reclaimer Coil 6. Two Stack Temperature Gauges
2. Stack Adapters (if required) 7. Limit Control (Pump Controller)
3. Stainless Steel Housing w/Hinged Access Panel(s) 8. Temperature & Pressure Relief Valve
4. Iron Fitted or Bronze Circulating Pump 9. Check Valve
5. Bronze Balancing Valve
With the Parker Heat Reclaim System, only a small amount of field piping and electrical work is required to bring the device on-line to
recover waste stack heat.
PARKER HEAT RECLAIM ACCESSORY PACKAGE: This package includes the following components:
1. (2) BMT-250 Water Temperature Gauges 2. (2) Ball-Type Shut-off Valves
PARKER PRE-HEAT KIT: This package includes the following components for preheating boiler feedwater on a steam boiler only:
1. Parker Stainless Steel Heat Reclaimer Coil 7. Limit Control (Pump Controller)
2. Stack Adapters (if required) 8. Temperature & Pressure Relief Valve
3. Stainless Steel Housing w/Hinged Access Panel(s) 9. Check Valve
4. High Temperature Bronze Circulating Pump 10. Pressurized Storage Tank
5. Bronze Balancing Valve 11. The contents of the ACCESSORY package above
6. Two Stack Temperature Gauges
CERTIFICATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS: All Parker Boiler Heat Reclaimers are designed for 250 PSI pressure and 7500F
temperature.
The Heat Exchanger (see Spec. Sheet on reverse side) is constructed of TP316 .065”-.130” wall stainless steel tubing with 0.020”
aluminum fins spaced 6 FPI (which are metallurgically bonded to the stainless). The heat exchanger is encased in a 304 18 Ga.
polished stainless steel housing with gasketed hinged access door panel(s). A stainless steel emergency flue bypass and balancing
assembly is standardly furnished. Typical flue gas loss through the heat exchanger on Parker Selections are less than 0.01" W.C. and
water side pressure drops are generally under 8.3 PSI. These units are built to ASME Sections I & VIII, and are AGA Certified.
SELECTION AND INSTALLATION ANALYSIS: Heat recovery requires engineering calculations to assure that the maximum heat - no
more and no less - is removed from the hot exhaust gases. Parker Boiler has performed a computer analysis of each boiler product and
selected the proper size heat reclaimer. These selections are summarized on the Specification Sheet. Parker is interested in insuring
Heat Reclaimers are employed properly in assuring boiler operation is not adversely affected and that the customer is deriving
maximum energy recovery from his Heat Reclaimer Installation.
BUL122HR.DOC
SPEC. SHEET D122-HR
0B1
PARKER BOILER HEAT RECLAIMER
ITEM EM8 EM10 EM12 EM14 EM16 EM20 EM24 EM28

PARKER BOILER MODEL SELECTIONS
DRAFT HOOD EQUIPPED MODELS
Steam Boiler MAX. 7 HP 9.5 HP 15 HP 25 HP 40 HP 50 HP - -
Hot Water Boiler - One Required MAX. T300 T490 T760 T970 T1140 T2160 - -
Hot Water Boiler - Two Required MAX. - - - - T2600 T4600 T6800 -
Indirect Hot Water Heater MAX. WH300 WH490 WH730 WH970 WH1410 WH1900 WH3000 -
PARKER BOILER MODEL SELECTIONS
BAROMETRIC DAMPER EQUIPPED MODELS
Steam Boiler MAX. 12 HP 16 HP 30 HP 40 HP 50 HP 90 HP 115 HP 150 HP
Hot Water Boiler - Atmospheric Gas Fired MAX. T600 T760 T1140 T1730 T2160 T3600 T4600 T6800
Hot Water Boiler - Power Burner Type MAX. *-528 *-672 *-1296 *-1536 *-2304 *-3456 *-5000 *-6250
Indirect Hot Water Boiler MAX. WH600 WH730 WH1210 WH1410 WH2270 WH3000 - -
PARKER HEAT RECLAIMER
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Flue Diameter of Reclaimer (Dimension B) IN. 8 10 12 14 16 20 24 28
Width (Dimension A) IN. 18 20 24 28 30 36 42 44
Collar Length (Dimension E) IN. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Height (Dimension C) IN. 23 24.5 28.5 31.8 35.3 39.3 43.3 43.3
Water Inlet & Outlet Size (Dimension D) IN. 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 1 1
Balancing Valve, Check Valve & Shutoff Valve Size IN. 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 1 1
Median Water Flow Range GPM. 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10
Median Water Pressure Drop PSIG. 2.4 2.4 3.4 2.9 4.11 5.7 7.41 8.34
Heating Surface SQ. FT. 48 67 100 134 199 282 379 437
Safety Relief Valve OUTLET IN. 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 1 1-1/2
Pump Model Depends on System Configuration
Net Weight LBS. 60 79 110 150 175 230 280 340
Approximate Shipping Weight LBS. 120 158 220 300 350 460 560 680
NOTES: 1. Dual stack hot water boilers require two reclaimers of indicated size.
2. * = Model O- Oil Fired, GO- Combination Gas/Oil Fired, G- Power Gas Fired.
3. Condensate Drain 1” NPT
BUL122HR.DOC
BULLETIN 122-BD
TYPE M + MG2 FIELD BAROMETRIC DAMPER PAGE 1 7A
The type M + MG2 Field Barometric Damper is a specialized, precision made, three fuel control for the purpose of controlling
boiler draft conditions. It will serve gas, oil or coal with equal efficiency and requires only minor changes in the field to adjust
from one fuel to another. It is a control of extreme sensitivity and structural strength. It has been designed exclusively for
industrial furnaces and boilers.
The damper's sensitivity is increased by holding the clearance between the ring and the gate to a minimum. A heavy die-
formed gate ring is employed. This heavy gate provides extreme rigidity and structural strength. This gate is mounted on a
long, thin, stainless steel knife edge which in turn rests on self aligning, stainless steel bearings. The bearings are self
cleaning. Soot or dirt cannot accumulate to cause binding or friction. They are also self leveling, assuring that the knife edge
is always in contact across the full width of the bearing for an even distribution of weight. When the gate moves, only the sharp
corner of the knife's edge rests on the bearings, an area of contact so minute that friction is virtually non-existent. The result is
extreme and instantaneous sensitivity to draft change.
ADVANTAGES AND FEATURES

EFFICIENCY AND SAFETY: The barometric damper can be adjusted to the proper draft setting to obtain the desired efficiency.
Where a draft deficiency exists, the Field Double Acting Control can make the draft assistance of the entire stack available to
the boiler. The control handles overdraft conditions to maintain constant draft pressure within the limits of the control's opening.
VERSATILITY: The damper is a very versatile control with respect to fuel served, input changes and installation location. The
control will serve gas, oil, or combination fired boilers. The damper permits flexibility in that it can be adjusted to changes of
input. The control also is self adjusting for changes in weather conditions. The Field Control offers a wide range of approved
installations to fit the particular job.
LOW INITIAL AND INSTALLATION COSTS: On larger sized applications, the damper may be lower in initial cost than a draft
diverter since a smaller sized control can be used. The chimney size is usually smaller than with draft diverters since the
whole height of the boiler stack may be employed to create draft. The damper is a very compact unit and can easily be
installed in locations with limited ceiling heights.
UL LISTED: Every barometric damper used by the Parker Boiler Company is listed by Underwriter's Laboratory.
I. APPLICATIONS:
The Field Barometric Dampers are standardly recommended and furnished on the following Parker Boilers:
1. All Power Gas, Gas/Oil, or Oil Fired Boilers.

2. All Gas Fired Steam Boilers 70 H.P. and larger.
3. Applications requiring damper.
4. Approved applications requiring smaller size stacks.
II. INSTALLATIONS: (Refer to General Basic Installation Instructions Paragraph VI, Combustion Vents.)
1. The damper should be installed with the "tee" type fitting furnished. It should be installed directly above the boiler
connecting to the collar provided on top of the boiler cabinet.
2. The control must be installed in the up-right position on either a vertical or horizontal chimney. The front face of the
control must be plumb and the bearing surfaces level.
DO NOT SUPPORT THE BAROMETRIC TEE AND STACK ON THE BOILER CABINET.
3. The damper must be handled with a reasonable amount of care since this is a precision constructed instrument with
delicate balancing.
4. The boiler stack should be run upward to required height above the roof in accordance with specifications and local
codes.
5. Care should be taken that the stack is properly supported so that there is no excessive strain on the boiler cabinet.
6. A non-restrictive cap must be installed on the top of the stack of the type to prevent against down-draft and weather
conditions.
7. The control should not be located within 18" of any wall or combustible material.
III. OPERATION:
With the Field Barometric Damper, barometric pressure opens the gate and all draft, except the minimum needed to carry
flue gases up the stack, is checked by the action of the draft control. The swinging gate is under the control of a
counterweight, thereby, maintaining the desired draft for best combustion. In normal operation, the gate will usually swing
back and forth in the inward position approximately one-third its normal travel. In the event of up-draft, the gate opens
inward to admit dilution air so that the normal draft through the boiler is not interrupted. When the draft is weak, the gate
stays closed because the differential pressure is too small to move it, and the entire stack draft is placed at the service of
the burner.
122-BD.DOC
BULLETIN 122-BD
PAGE 2 7A
TYPE M + MG2 FIELD BAROMETRIC DAMPER ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONS
IV. ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONS:

1. The control must be adjusted to the desired draft setting by adding or removing the washer-type weights supported by
the two small chains. Do not move the large weights attached directly to the gate. (Fig. 1, Item G.)
2. Once the desired setting has been obtained, be sure to securely tighten the screw and nut holding the washer weights.
3. The damper should be set to maintain as low a draft as will give good combustion. NOTE, THE DAMPER DOES NOT
COME ADJUSTED FROM THE FACTORY DUE TO VARYING DRAFT CONDITIONS. THE FOLLOWING
INSTRUCTIONS SHOULD BE FOLLOWED:
A. ALL GAS FIRED BOILERS:

Check to be certain that the stop and two cover plates (three parts painted red) have been removed. Refer to Fig. 1. To
remove stop, Item A, remove (2) screws securing it to ring. To remove cover plates, Item B, bend or break off the tab
that goes through the small hole in ring. Do not remove stop, Item C.
VISUAL CHECK:
When the boiler is operating normally after being in service for at least 15 minutes, the gate should be balanced so that
it swings inward approximately one-third of its travel. It should not be binding against either stop. If the gate is in the
out-ward position more than temporarily, the cause of the down-draft should be immediately detected and corrected.
These rules generally apply, but an accurate draft setting can be obtained only by the use of proper instruments as
follows:
DRAFT GAUGE:
1. Readings with a draft gauge should be taken after boiler is in operation for at least 15 minutes.
2. Readings should be taken in center of vent stack below barometric damper but above top of boiler cabinet. Drill hole
if necessary.
3. A minimum draft of not less than .04" to .06" W.C. negative pressure should be experienced below the barometric
damper. If the draft is less than this, add washer weights required to swing damper gate towards vertical, which
increases draft through the boiler.
4. On altitudes above 3,000', draft pressure should be increased as necessary for good combustion.
COMBUSTION TEST:
On all jobs, particularly high altitudes or restrictive vent conditions, it is advisable to call in competent combustion
personnel to make a complete combustion test to achieve the best efficiency and safety. Draft should be set for best
efficiency as low as possible without presence of CO in the flue gas.
B. OIL OR COMBINATION GAS/OIL FIRED BOILERS: Check to be certain that the stop and two cover plates (three parts
painted red) are in place. The gate should never be able to swing to the out-ward position.
VISUAL CHECK
During normal operation, the gate will usually swing in
one-third of its travel. Proper draft settings must be
obtained by use of instruments.
DRAFT GAUGE:
1. Readings with a draft gauge should be taken after
boiler is in operation for at least 15 minutes.
2. Readings should be taken in center of vent stack
below barometric damper but above the top of the
boiler. Drill hole if necessary.
3. A minimum draft of not less than .04" to .06" W.C.
negative pressure should be experienced below the
barometric damper. If the draft is greater than this,
remove washer weights as required to swing bottom
of damper out toward vertical, which increases draft.
4. On altitudes above 3,000', draft pressure should
be increased as necessary for good combustion.
COMBUSTION TEST:
On all jobs it is advisable to call in competent
combustion personnel to make a complete
combustion test to achieve the best efficiency and
safety. Draft should be set for best efficiency as low
as possible without the presence of CO or soot.
BULLETIN 117-1001
9D
MODEL 1001 PARKER TUBE INSPECTION PLUGS WITH GASKETS
The PARKER EASY-TO-REMOVE GASKETED INSPECTION

PLUGS are provided standard on the tube headers of all Parker
Steam Boilers 7 HP and larger. The inspection plugs are
accessible through the cabinet doors making it easy and FLANGED HEAD HEADER
convenient to regularly internally inspect the tubes and tube PLUG GASKET COUPLING
headers.
The design is similar to the spark plug on a car using loose

fitting threads with a copper sealing gasket. The inspection plug
is a specia l 3/4" heavy steel flanged head plug with an inset to fit
a 1/2" drive socket wrench. Both the plug and coupling have
loose fitting straight threads. The copper ring gasket is
furnished to seal between the plug flange and the coupling. The
plug is norma lly easy and simple to remove and re-install.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR REMOVING INSPECTION PLUGS:
1. Before attempting to remove plugs, be sure the boiler has been turned off and completely blown
down with the blowoff valves left open so there is no pressure on the boiler.
2. Apply several solid taps to the plug with a hammer. Insert the wrench drive socket tightly into the
inset section of the plug and move with a quick jerk. Continue to repeat this procedure until the
plug is removed.
3. If due to some unusual reason the plugs cannot be removed they can be heated with a torch.
Apply heat only to the plug and not the coupling. Heat until the plug is red hot and then
immediately spray with cold water. Apply several solid taps again with a hammer and quick jerks
with the wrench.
RE-INSTALLATION OF INSPECTION PLUGS:
1. Inspect the threads on the coupling. If rough or worn, re-tap with a 3/4" National straight pipe tap.
2. Inspect the coupling seating surface to be certain that it is smooth and uniformly faced for a good
seating surface. If the coupling seating surface is not smooth and uniform, reface carefully with a
flat file.
3. The inspection plugs can normally be reused. The plug should be replaced if the threads are not
good, if the inset hole is chewed up or if the flange is cracked or not uniform.
4. The threads should be well doped with the pipe joint compound stick furnished or with a good pipe
dope so that they will seal tightly and be easy to remove on the next inspection.
5. Always replace the gasket and it is important to center uniformly when tightening the plug.
6. Tighten securely to prevent leaks.
Each Parker Boiler is furnished standard with a Tube Inspection Plug Wrench and a small supply of Extra
Inspection Plugs, Gaskets and Stick of Pipe Joint Compound. It is advisable to order a stock of these
accessories and extra gaskets and a few inspection plugs should be available before making inspections.
BULLETIN 117-100
9D
SUGGESTIONS FOR INTERNAL TUBE INSPECTIONS
When making internal tube inspections it is good practice to remove at least two inspection plugs from
each header. Preferably select at least one at or near the center and one near the end of both the top and
bottom headers. When making future inspections, alternate so that different inspection plugs will be removed
each time.
Regular internal tube inspections are recommended every three (3) months until the Water Treating and
Blowdown Program is properly regulated. Inspections are then recommended at least every twelve (12) months,
but preferably every six (6) months.
If an unsatisfactory condition of scale, rust or pitting is found then additional inspection plugs should be
removed for further inspection. When the internal condition is found to be satisfactory it is not usually necessary
or recommended to remove additional or all of the inspection plugs.
If the water treatment and blowdown program is properly regulated the internal tubes should be found
clean with just a thin film of protective coating. If an unsatisfactory condition of scale, rust or pitting is found,
competent water treatment personnel should be called in or consulted to determine the cause and outline the
preventive maintenance program recommended. See Parker Bulleting 1001-A Boiler Water Treatment for Steam
Boilers.
If a scale coating of more than 1/16" is present in the boiler tubes, the boiler should be descaled with an
approved chemical. Do not attempt to descale tubes that are leaking or show excessive overheating and
warping or that are completely plugged with solid scale. See Parker Bulleting 1003 for chemically cleaning scale
from boilers.
WHEN TUBES SHOULD BE REPLACED
Boiler tubes should be replaced when determined advisable from the results of an internal and external
inspection. If the tubes are leaking resulting from a general scale condition, corrosion or excessive overheating,
it is advisable to replace the entire section. A condition of this nature is usually general throughout all of the
tubes. It is not advisable or recommended to replace only one tube unless the tube section is of reasonable age
and all other tubes are found to be in excellent condition. Only in rare cases would it be advisable to replace a
single tube as the labor cost would not justify this consideration if it was necessary to replace additional tubes in
the near future.
IMPORTANT
Determine the cause of any scale or unsatisfactory condition in the boiler and take the necessary steps
to correct any deficiencies in the Water Treatment, Blowdown and Maintenance Program. Proper care and
preventive maintenance is important to prevent excessive repairs and fuel costs.
PARKER BOILER CO.

5930 BANDINI BLVD.
LOS ANGELES, CA. 90040
323-727-9800
117-1001 S&G.DOC
BULLETIN 117-WGV PG1
WATER GAUGE & GAUGE GLASS INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
INSTALLATION
Only properly trained personnel should install and
maintain water gauge glass and connections.
Remember to wear safety gloves and glasses
during installation. Before installing, make sure
all parts are free of chips and debris.
1. Apply Teflon tape or pipe dope to pipe threads. TOP GAUGE FITTING
Install top gauge fitting (fitting without a drain A
valve) into the uppermost tapping. Wrench
tighten the fitting until it is snug and the glass
outlet is pointing at five o'clock (about 1/8
turn from its final downward vertical position).
2. Install the bottom gauge fitting (the fitting with

a drain valve) until it is snug and the glass
VESSEL
outlet is pointing directly upward. Verify top WALL
and bottom fittings are threaded into the
tappings the same number of turns
(distance A = distance B).
GAUGE
GLASS
3. Remove glass packing nut, friction washer (or GUARD ROD WG_ _
packing gland, depending upon the model),
and glass packing from the fittings, and place
them, in same order, on to both ends of the
FRICTION GLASS
gauge glass. Push both packings about an inch WASHER PACKING
up the gauge glass. 5/8” WG GASKET: NUT: C140806
-WGG-B BRASS WASHER
-WGG FIBER GASKET
4. Gently insert one end of the glass into the top
gauge fitting. Keeping the glass inside the top
fitting, gently rotate the top gauge fitting GLASS
PACKING:
clockwise until vertically aligned with the -WGP-V VITON
bottom gauge fitting, then insert glass into BLK/WHT
-WGP-S SILICON
bottom fitting until glass bottoms out on the RED
shoulder inside the bottom fitting. -WGP-T TEFLON
GRAY
5. Carefully raise glass about 1/16" and slide

lower glass packing down until the glass
packing contacts the lower gauge fitting. DO
NOT allow the glass to remain in contact with B
any metal! BOTTOM
GAUGE DRAIN CONNECTION
FITTING
6. Carefully slide upper glass packing up as far as
possible.
WARNING! This product contains chemicals known to the State of
7. Hand tighten both glass packing nuts, then California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
tighten 1/2 turn more by wrench. Tighten only harm. (California law requires that this warning be given to the
consumers in the State of California.).
enough to prevent leakage. DO NOT OVER For more information visit www.apollovalves.com.
TIGHTEN! If any leakage should occur,
THIS PRODUCT MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE EPA SAFE
tighten slightly, a quarter turn at a time, DRINKING WATER ACT.
I-5334-00.ai
checking for leakage after each turn.
WATER GAUGE GLASS WATER GAUGE GLASS
READ ALL WARNINGS AND

DO's
NOTICE: INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE
PERFORMING INSTALLATION
OR MAINTENANCE.
DO verify proper gauge has been supplied.
DO examine gauge glass and packings carefully
for damage before installation.
WARNING!
DO install protective guards and utilize
automatic ball checks where necessary to
SAFETY GLASSES AND GLOVES help prevent injury in case of glass
SHOULD BE WORN AT ALL TIMES breakage.
WHEN WORKING WITH OR
EXAMINING WATER GAUGE GLASS DO inspect the gauge glass daily, keep
AND CONNECTIONS. maintenance records, and conduct routine
replacements.
IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR
MAINTENANCE OF GAUGE GLASS DO protect glass from sudden changes in
AND CONNECTIONS CAN CAUSE temperatures such as drafts, water spray,
IMMEDIATE OR DELAYED BREAK-
AGE RESULTING IN BODILY INJURY
etc.
AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
MAINTENANCE
USE AND CARE Examine the gauge glass regularly for any signs
of clouding, scratching, erosion, or corrosion.
DO NOT's The glass should be inspected daily until the
need for replacement becomes apparent. This
DO NOT use the glass if it contains any scratches, will help establish the routine inspection and
chips, or any other visible signs of damage. routine replacement schedules.
DO NOT reuse any tubular glass or glass
packings. CLEANING
DO NOT subject gauge glass to bending or Use commercial non-abrasive glass cleaners to
torsional stresses. keep the glass clean. Use diluted acids such as
Hydrochloric (muriatic) acid when regular
DO NOT over tighten glass packing nuts. cleaners do not seem to work. Do not use wire
brushes or any other abrasive materials which
DO NOT allow glass to touch any metal could scratch the glass.
parts.
INSPECTION
DO NOT exceed the recommended pressure of
the gauge or gauge glass. Examine the surface of the glass for scratches,
corrosion, chips, cracks, surface flaws, or nicks.
DO NOT clean the gauge or gauge glass while To do this, shine a very bright concentrated
pressurized or in operation. light at an angle of about 45 degrees. A
defective glass will glisten as the light strikes
imperfections. Glass which appears cloudy or
roughened, and will not respond to cleaning,
should be replaced.
STORING
Manufactured by Conbraco Industries, Inc.
1418 S. PEARL ST.
PAGELAND, SC 29728
Keep gauge glass in original packaging until
TELEPHONE (704) 841-6000 ready to install.
www.apollovalves.com I-5334-00.ai
PARKER BOILER CO. BULLETIN 143-B
WARRICK SERIES DFL & 26B TYPE BOILER WATER LEVEL CONTROL 8B
The Warrick Series DFL & 26B controls are very dependable, solid
state, floatless, probe type boiler water level controls. The system
consists of a control and a separate electrode probe fitting with a sensor
rod that extends into the boiler water. An insulated probe wire connects
the control to the sensor rod. The control is reliably designed to operate
by sensing current flow in the water through the probe(s) and comparing
it to the current flow through a fixed set point resistor. Considered to be
exceptionally dependable since there are no moving parts exposed to
water.
The Warrick Series 26B and right side of the DFL control are
recommended to be used as a low water cutoff on steam boilers and hot
water boiler systems. The left side of the DFL control is used as a pump
control on steam boilers and as a high water alarm when required. It WARRICK 26B LOW
may also be used as an electric water feed valve control. WATER CUTOFF CONTROL
1. RELIABLE: The control is very dependable and requires a minimum

of service as it is a floatless type with only the stainless sensor rod
exposed to the water and no moving parts in the liquid. An isolation
transformer in the control separates the low voltage (12V) electrode
circuit from the supply line.
2. LONG LIFE AND LOW MAINTENANCE COST: There are no

moving parts on the liquid side to require regular cleaning or
replacement. The control is remote mounted in the boiler control
WARRICK DFL LOW WATER
panel in a cooler area to prevent conduction of heat which increases
CUTOFF & PUMP CONTROL
life of the electrical components.
3. SIMPLICITY: The control does not have complicated parts or require

daily maintenance attention (other than normal blowdown on steam
boiler). There are no critical adjustments and the level can be
controlled to close limits by the length of the probe extension. The
control does not utilize floats, stuffing boxes, bellows or mercury
switches, which can cause nuisance shutdowns and costly repairs.
4. UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES: Underwriters' Laboratories

lists the 26B and right side of the DFL as "Limit Controls". The left
side of the DFL control is listed as a "Motor Controller".
5. QUALITY CONSTRUCTION: Solid state circuitry with LED status

indicators (level safe and pump on). Low water cutoffs feature time
delays for surge protection and automatic recycle on power
interruption even when equipped with manual reset. Pump controls
feature time delays for pump start and stop to prevent short cycling of
pump. WARRICK 3E1B
PROBE WITH EXTENSION
I. RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS:
1. Furnished as a low water cutoff and pump control on standard steam boilers with the probes installed in the water
column.
2. Furnished as a secondary low water cutoff on standard steam boilers. On all boilers except U-Drum models, the
probe is mounted in vertical position on upper fitting of the water column connection to the steam drum with the
sensor rod extending inside the drum to within 1" from the bottom.
3. Furnished as a low water cutoff on all standard Direct Fired Hot Water Boilers with the probe installed in a vertical
position in the boiler header or at the system water level.
4. Furnished as a low water cutoff on all sizes of standard Indirect Water Heaters. The probe is mounted in a vertical
position in the upper header.
5. Recommended as a high water alarm only when required by Code with the probe installed in a vertical position in
the upper water column connection.
BULLETIN 143-B
II. COMPONENTS: PAGE 2 8B
1. CONTROLS:
The controls are open circuit boards with encapsulated SPDT relay contacts rated 10 AMP, 1/3 HP. An isolation
transformer supplies 12 Volts to the relay coil and probe circuit. The Series 26B are low liquid level cutoffs
furnished with a 6 second time delay. When equipped with a normally closed push button switch they are manual
reset. The Series DFL relays contain all the functions of the Series 26B plus a differential level control with
inverse contacts and time delays for pump (feed valve) on and off.
2. ELECTRONIC PROBE:
Consists of a sturdy, brass casting with a 1" screwed mount, Teflon insulated sleeve and stainless steel sensor
rod, suitable for pressure up to 250 PSI and temperatures to 500ºF. Always use high temperature (200ºC) heat
and moisture resistant probe wire for the connection between the probe fitting and control.
III. OPERATION:
1. Low Water Cutoff: 26B and right side contacts and right LED of DFL.
115 Volts is applied to the primary side of the transformer (L1, L2). 12 Volts is induced to the secondary side of
the transformer. One side of the control is grounded (G), or connected to a second probe. The other side (LLCO)
is connected to the Low Water Probe. If water is in contact with the probe, the reference circuit is completed
through the water to the ground (or second probe), the control energizes changing the state of the load contacts.
The LED indicator will be lit indicating water level safe. If the water level recedes below the probe, a 6 second
time delay takes place before the control will de-energize (LED OFF) and load contacts will return to normal state.
Use load contacts (located on lower right side of control) C – NO for low water cutoff and C - NC for low water
alarm, if furnished. One Manual Reset Low Water Cutoff is furnished with a standard, normally closed push button
wired across the "RESET" terminals. With the water level below the probe for more than 6 seconds the control de-
energizes and will not re-energize until the water level returns to probe and the push button is depressed. Power
interruption protection is furnished as a standard item. Loss of power will cause the control to de-energize but will
automatically re-energize upon return of power providing water is at a safe level.
2. DFL Level Control (Left side and left LED indicator on control)
The left side of the DFL control is used for single or differential level control but not Low Water Cutoff. It uses the
same transformer (Line Service L1, L2) and secondary ground (G) as the right side. For differential level service
two probes are used, high (H) and low (L). For single level service only the (H) terminal is used. The DFL Level
Control features Inverse Load Contacts and 4 second time delays on rising water level (high probe H) and falling
water level (low probe L). Energizing control causes load contacts to change to change state and left LED
indicator to light indicating pump or feed valve energized. Four seconds after rising water level reaches the probe
wired to H, the contacts return to their normal state and the LED Indicator turns off. Water level falling below the
(H) probe causes the load contacts to change state immediately unless a second probe is wired to (L). With (L)
wired, the water level must fall below it for more than four seconds before the load contacts will change state and
the LED will light. Use load contacts C - N.O. for pump starters and feed valves. Use contacts C - N.C. on
separate DFL for high water alarm. When used as a High Water Alarm, a lighted left LED indicates a safe high
water condition (below probe). If two DFL relays are used for starting two pumps, the (H) terminals are jumpered
together.
NOTE: BECAUSE OF 4 SECOND TIME DELAY, PUMP (FEED VALVE) ALWAYS RUNS 4 SECONDS WHEN POWER
IS TURNED ON EVEN IF BOILER IS FILLED WITH WATER.
CAUTION: LOW WATER CUTOFFS SHOULD BE CHECKED ON A DAILY BASIS.
STEAM BOILERS: At the beginning of each shift, open the water column drain valve carefully and slowly until
water drains to the low level in glass and main burner shuts off. Then close valve.
HOT WATER BOILERS: Press "LOW WATER TEST" pushbutton and hold eight seconds. Release pushbutton
after Main Burner shuts off. Press manual reset pushbutton to resume operation.
IF ANY LOW WATER CUTOFF FAILS TO TURN OFF OR OPERATE PROPERLY, OPERATOR SHOULD
SHUTDOWN BOILER AND TAKE BOILER OUT OF SERVICE UNTIL COMPETENT SERVICE PERSONNEL
REPAIR CONTROL.
NOTE: DFL-X ELECTRIC WATER FILL VALVES DO NOT HAVE 4 SECOND TIME DELAY.
IV. PARTS:
1. DFL Dual Level Control 115V, 50/60 HZ, LWC-SPDT, Pump Inverse SPDT.
2. 26B Low Level Cutoff, 115V 50/60 HZ, SPDT.
3. PBS-NC Normally Closed Push Button for Manual Reset.
4. FIQC-250 Fully Insulated Quick Connect, 1/4".
5. FIQC-187 Fully Insulated Quick Connect, 3/16".
6. 3E1B Single Probe Fitting – 1" (does not include extension).
7. 3R-XX 1/4" by XX" Stainless Steel Probe Extension (XX specify length).
8. SF2-18 Probe Wire 18 GA, 200ºC Heat & Moisture Resistant.
9. 3B3A 5/8" Electrode fitting for 3E1B Probe Fitting.
10. 3PO13 Hex CPL for 3B3A.
11. 3PO16 Gasket for 3B3A.
143-B.doc
BULLETIN 143 TS-2
8B
TROUBLE SHOOTING BULLETIN – WARRICK SERIES 26B AND DFL

FLOATLESS, ELECTRODE TYPE BOILER WATER LEVEL CONTROL
TROUBLE POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY

Control will not Water level below probe. Check water level and make certain that water in boiler is at
energize proper height.
If control has manual reset, Push manual reset low water push button on top of
manual reset device has tripped. electrical panel with correct water level in boiler.
No electricity to boiler. Check source of power, fuses, breakers, line switch, etc.
There should be 115V line voltage across Warrick control
terminal pair L1-L2.
Incorrect electrical supply. Make certain voltage to control is 115v. Replace control if
damaged.
Loose or dirty electrical Carefully check for loose connections at terminals. Do not
connections. pull on wires. Replace loose quick connects with fully
insulated type.
Control not properly grounded. Check to make certain Terminal G is properly grounded to
boiler panel. When two low water probes are used with one
control, do not ground G.
Probe circuit does not energize. Check for broken probe rod. Probe must extend to desired
level of control. Check for loose probe rod or probe wiring.
On Hot Water Boilers, check for air bound probe fitting.
Check for dirty boiler with film of oil insulating probe from
water.
Defective relay. Replace control.
Control will not Probe grounded to boiler. Make sure probe(s) and probe wire are not grounded to
release when boiler.
water level Faulty control. Replace control.
drops below
probe.
Relay cycling on Incorrect electrical supply Check supply voltage for correct specifications and
and off continuous supply. Tighten all electrical connections.
repeatedly. Loose probe wire connection. Check wire from relay to probe fitting to be certain
connections are made properly. Remove cap from probe
fitting; check connection and tighten.
Loose ground connection. Check ground wire from Terminal G of relay to be certain
this is tightly grounded.
Probe not in contact with water. Check to be certain probe rod is located in water. On Hot
Water Boilers, probe rod should extend down into center of
upper header, but not below centerline of header.
On Hot Water Boilers, probe Loosen probe fitting and relieve air so that probe is
fitting is air bound. submersed in water.
When replacing relays do not press on electronic components, flex or twist circuit board or bend spade
terminals. 115 Volts should be connected to 1/4" spade terminals only. 3/16" spade terminals are for 12 Volt
probe circuit only.
CAUTION: SERVICE SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY COMPETENT TRAINED BOILER CONTROL

SERVICE PERSONNEL.
143 TS.doc
BULLETIN 143 TS-2
8B
PARKER BOILER CO. 123 MSR
MOTOR STARTING RELAYS PAGE 1 0E6
Parker Steam Boilers are furnished with a Pump Motor Starting Relay for
each boiler feed pump. These relays are furnished as a means of
switching the heavy current load of each boiler feed pump with the lighter
duty contacts available in the water level control. They may also be used
to energize a water feed valve or remote motor starting relay when the
electrical ratings match the boiler electrical service. All three phase feed
pumps require a motor starting relay with heaters and all boilers with
electrical service over 115 Volts require a control transformer (standard) or
separate 115 Volt 1 Phase service for the control circuit. Additional relays
may be furnished for other motor starting loads when specified.
FIG. 1 CR306 FIG. 2 DP2030B
(R4243B)
WARNING:
1. Only qualified service technicians should attempt to service or repair boiler controls and burner systems.
2. Hazard of electric shock. Line voltage is present in all boiler control circuits. More than one main line disconnect switch may be
required to disconnect all power. Always turn off all main line disconnect switches when working on any electrical controls.
OPERATION: Consult Boiler Wiring Diagram.

The motor starting relay is normally mounted in the boiler control panel. If installed in the field it should be mounted vertically in an
appropriate enclosure in a cool place. Line service is connected to terminals L1 and L2 for single phase service and L1, L2 and L3 for
three phase. The pump motor is connected to terminals T1 and T2 or T1, T2 and T3. When feed pump electrical is over 115 Volts, a
control transformer is normally furnished wired to terminals L1 and L2 to operate the boiler control circuit. Whenever the water level
control energizes its circuit, indicating that more water is required, the motor starting relay coil is energized from the blue wire. This
causes the motor starting relay coil contacts to pull in, starting the boiler feed pump. Single phase motors must have built in overload
protection. Three phase motors are protected by the overload relay heaters on the motor starting relay. In the event of an overload, after
repairing the cause of overload, the reset button must be manually reset before operation may be resumed. Single phase motors may
also use a motor starting relay with overload relay heaters. Owner must provide field installed Motor Branch Circuit Protection in
accordance with the National Electric Code. See Page 2 Chart IV.
HONEYWELL DP2030B5003 (R4243B1004) DPST ELECTROMAGNETIC CONTACTOR:

These two pole normally open contactors are furnished as motor starting relays on Parker Boilers for 115 Volt motors with built in
overload protection up to 1 horsepower. They feature heavy duty, silver alloy, bridge type double-break contacts. There are no
repairable components, therefore, the relay must be replaced if defective.
GENERAL ELECTRIC CR306 MOTOR STARTING RELAY:

The CR306B Nema Size 0 and CR306C Nema Size 1 Motor Starting Relays are furnished on Parker Boilers for motor voltages over 115
Volt. Maximum motor H.P. for each voltage and phasing are labeled on the front of the armature magnet assembly. Overload protection
heaters are furnished with new boilers sized for the standard boiler feed pump motor. If the pump electrical is changed or the pump is
non-standard, be certain the heaters supplied are properly sized for the pump. See Heater Section Chart II on next page. These relays
feature heavy duty vertically-slanted contacts which resist contamination and bounce, easy disassembly of contacts and coil without tools
and coil windings protected against dust, oil, mechanical damage and rust.
COIL REPLACEMENT:
1. Remove power from device. Press against coil while pulling up slightly on coil retainers (A-figure 1) and move retainers away from
coil.
2. Withdraw magnet assembly, coil, molded cover, and moveable arm from device.
3. Withdraw spring clip (B-Figure 1) and remove armature from movable arm. Remove coil from magnet.
4. Replace coil. Reassemble device by reversing procedure.
CONTACT REPLACEMENT:
1. Perform steps 1 through 3 under Coil Replacement.
2. Remove magnet from molded cover and movable arm. Remove return spring from center of movable arm.
3. Remove molded cover from movable arm. Depress and slide movable contact and spring from movable arm.
4. Remove screws holding stationary contacts in place and remove stationary contacts.
5. Reassemble device by reversing process.
CHECK FOR WELDED CONTACTS IN OVERLOAD RELAY:

With power disconnected, disconnect the control wiring from the relay terminals. Place a bell set or resistance measuring instrument
across the relay terminals. Depress and release reset arm to insure relay is reset. In this condition there should be continuity between
the terminals. Depress white manual check operator to trip the relay. In the tripped condition the circuit between the terminals should be
open indicating the contacts are operating normally. Rewire the terminals and reset the relay for normal operation.
MAINTENANCE:
1. Always remove power from device before performing any maintenance.
2. Keep magnet mating surface free from accumulated dirt or dust.
3. DO NOT OIL OR GREASE the magnet mating surfaces.
4. Contacts are carefully designed for maximum life. They need only to be replaced when nearly all the silver tip is gone and the contact
tip support is exposed. DO NOT FILE the contacts. Filing or dressing the contacts only results in lost tip material and reduces life.
5. The ultimate tripping current of the installed relay heater can be adjusted plus or minus 10% by using the adjustment dial, shown in
Figure 1.
123 MSR PAGE 2 0E6
I. TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE:
TROUBLE POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY
Pump not running – No electricity to boiler. Check source of power, fuses, line switch, etc.
relay coil will not energize. Poor electrical connections. Disconnect, clean thoroughly. Reconnect and tighten. Replace any broken
(No voltage at coil) connections.
Water level control not energized. Clean water level control. See water control bulletin. Clean, repair or replace.
Pump not running – Overload heaters have tripped. Manually push reset button. Repair cause of overload.
relay coil will not energize. Relay coil for wrong voltage. Replace with coil for correct voltage.
(Voltage at coil) Defective relay coil. Replace coil or complete relay.
Mechanical bind. Check magnet assembly and movable contacts. Manually operate to check.
Pump not running – Incorrect electrical supply. Check pump for proper electrical service required.
relay coil energized. Defective pump wiring. Check continuity of wiring from motor starter to pump. Tighten all connections.
Burned out pump motor. Replace motor.
No heaters in motor starter. Install correct size heaters.
Defective contacts. Repair or replace.
Pump motor continues to run. Burned relay contacts. Repair or replace contacts or relay.
Relay coil de-energized. Defective armature. Replace armature (CR306 only).
Heaters repeatedly lock out. Motor or equipment. Check motor load. Repair any mechanical difficulty. Check for stoppage in water
(CR306 only) feed line.
Incorrectly sized heaters. See chart below and actual motor nameplate for correct sized heaters. Replace.
Excessive ambient temperature. Adjust temperature compensating dial. Turn counterclockwise to increase setting.
Mount relay in cooler area. Repair cause of excessive heat.
II. HEATER SECTION CHART – THREE LEG OVERLOAD PROTECTION (3 HEATERS) – BURKS PUMPS AND 60 HZ SERVICE:
MOTOR SIZE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE MOTOR SIZE VOLTAGE
230V 3PH 460V 3PH 115V 1PH 230V 1PH 230V 3PH 460V 3PH
1/3 H.P. CR123 C2.20A CR123 C1.09A CR123 C7.78A CR123 C3.79A 2 H.P. CR123 C6.30A CR123 C3.26A
1/2 H.P. CR123 C2.68A CR123 C1.31A CR123 C10.4B CR123 C4.66A 3 H.P. CR123 C8.67A CR123 C4.19A
3/4 H.P. CR123 C3.56A CR123 C1.96A CR123 C13.7B CR123 C6.30A 5 H.P. CR123 C13.7B CR123 C6.30A
1 H.P. CR123 C3.79A CR123 C2.20A CR123 C15.1B CR123 C7.78A 7-1/2 H.P. CR123 C19.3B CR123 C10.4B
1-1/2 H.P. CR123 C5.92A CR123 C3.01A CR123 C21.4B CR123 C11.3B 10 H.P. CR123 C27.3B CR123 C13.7B
III. STANDARD SIZE HEATERS FURNISHED WITH STEAM BOILERS. (SET OF THREE HEATERS)
If the pump or return system is not furnished with the boiler, check to be certain that these heaters supplied are properly sized.
100 PSI 125
BOILER SIZE
HEATER MODEL PUMP MOTOR – 230/60/3 HEATER MODEL PUMP MOTOR – 230/60/3
20 H.P. CR123 C3.56A 3/4 H.P. CR123 C3.56A 3/4 H.P.
25 H.P. CR123 C3.56A 3/4 H.P. CR123 C3.56A 3/4 H.P.
30 H.P. CR123 C3.56A 3/4 H.P. CR123 C6.30A 2 H.P.
40 H.P. CR123 C5.92A 1-1/2 H.P. CR123 C6.30A 2 H.P.
50 H.P. CR123 C5.92A 1-1/2 H.P. CR123 C6.30A 2 H.P.
70 H.P. (2) CR123 C5.92A (2) 1-1/2 H.P. (2) CR123 C6.30A (2) 2 H.P.
90 H.P. (2) CR123 C8.67A (2) 3 H.P. (2) CR123 C13.7B (2) 5 H.P.
115 H.P. (2) CR123 C13.7B (2) 5 H.P. (2) CR123 C13.7B (2) 5 H.P.
150 H.P. (2) CR123 C13.7B (2) 5 H.P. (2) CR123 C13.7B (2) 5 H.P.
IV. OVERLOAD HEATER SELECTION: - HEATER SELECTION TABLES:
For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.15 to 1.25, select the heater with maximum amps equal to or immediately greater than the motor full
load current (provides a maximum of 125% protection). For continuous rated motors with no service factor, multiply the full load current of the motor by
0.90 and use this value to select the heater. To protect the heater during short circuit, provide motor branch circuit protection in accordance with the N.E.
code, but not to exceed the maximum fuse ratings shown opposite each heater. Tables are for Type 1 enclosed.
NEMA sizes 00, 0, and 1 – for three phase, 3-pole starters, three leg overload protection (3 heaters):
MAXIMUM HEATER MAXIMUM MAXIMUM HEATER MAXIMUM When reassembling note that the magnet and moveable arm assembly (Items 5 through
MOTOR NUMBER FUSE MOTOR NUMBER FUSE 10) will fit only one way. The magnet, Item 8, and movable arm, Item 7, will fit either way
but will be quieter if reassembled the same way they were taken apart.
AMPS CR123 RATING AMPS CR123 RATING
.44 C0.54A 3 4.67 C4.66A 15
.48 C0.60A 3 5.11 C5.26A 20
.54 C0.66A 3 5.67 C5.92A 20
.59 C0.71A 3 6.11 C6.30A 20
.66 C0.78A 3 6.89 C6.95A 25
.78 C0.87A 3 7.59 C7.78A 25
.89 C0.97A 3 8.39 C8.67A 30
.95 C1.09A 3 9.19 C9.55A 30
1.02 C1.18A 3 9.84 C10.4B 30
1.17 C1.31A 3 10.8 C11.3B 35
1.31 C1.48A 3 11.3 C12.5B 35
1.42 C1.63A 3 12.5 C13.7B 40
1.55 C1.84A 6 14.5 C15.1B 45
1.66 C1.96A 6 16.5 C16.3B 50
1.82 C2.20A 6 17.9 C18.0B 60 REF NO. PART NUMBER PRINCIPAL RENEWAL PARTS
2.04 C2.39A 6 19.6 C19.3B 60 CR123C--- GE heater for CR306 (specify size)
2.28 C2.68A 6 20.6 C21.4B 70 4 546A300G2 Contact kit for CR306B Size 0
2.61 C3.01A 10 23.1 C22.8B 80 OR OR OR
2.97 C3.26A 10 24.7 C25.0B 80 4 546A301G2 Contact kit for CR306C Size 1
3.37 C3.56A 10 25.9 C27.3B 80 8 546A301G054 Armature and frame (magnet)
3.68 C3.79A 10 27.0 C30.3B 90 9 15021G2 Operating coil for CR306 115V
4.31 C4.19A 15 10 546A588P001 Spring retainer for armature
123 msr.doc
Installation Information
Model- SMD
Air Flow Interlocking Switch
Specifications
Electrical
10A @ 125, 8A @ 250, 7A @ 277 VAC
1/8 HP @ 125 VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250 VAC
Pilot Duty 125 VA @ 125/277 VAC
All Models
Maximum surge pressure: 20” W.C.
Maximum ambient temperature: 170°F
Minimum ambient temperature: -40°F

Model - SMD
You are installing one of the finest switches of its type on the
market. You will find this switch has many superior features
that insure dependable, accurate long life operation. This
switch is highly sensitive and fully approved. It is UL and
CSA listed, and has FM approval (optional).
Please read this instruction sheet carefully to

assure correct installation. This equipment must
be installed only by a licensed electrician who is
experienced with combustion safeguard control
systems and understands the functions of an
interlocking switch such as gas pressure switches.
Prior to being put into operation in conjunction with
the combustion safeguard systems, all switches
should be tested for proper range setting and
proper wiring. Check piping connections and switch
housing for leaks with a soap bubble test. All
exhaust fans and blowers should be inspected and
checked for proper rotation prior to starting up.
RL
SMDI 1010802016 Rev. A 11/07
RL
MODEL - SMD
Dimensions
7/8” 2 1/4”
Mounting Slots
3 19/32”
1/2” Conduit
4 13/32” Knockout
NC O .88 4 29/32”
NO
1/8” NPT
Connection
without fitting
3”
Installation
Models may be mounted in a horizontal or vertical Mounting in horizontal position, micro switch must
position. All switches are tested at the factory in a be on the top. When mounted in this position,
vertical position. Locations of fittings and types of the minimum sensitivity may be higher than that
fittings may vary from unit to unit. specified.
Mounting diaphragm in vertical position is the

preferred method.
Range Adjustment
All settings are made with the diaphragm in a To adjust, turn adjusting screw with screwdriver.
vertical position. The switch is shipped with the To increase pressure setting, turn adjustment
adjustment at minimum .17” W.C. screw down in a clockwise direction. To decrease
pressure setting, turn adjusting screw up, in a
counterclockwise direction.
Notes All Models Optional Fittings

Standard mounting bracket is shown. For other mounting Max. Surge Pressure 20” 1/4” Barb
arrangements, contact factory. W.C.
Max. Ambient Temp. 170º F 1/4” Tube
Max. Ambient Temp. -40º F 1/2” Compression
SMDI 1010802016 Rev. A 11/07

MODEL - SMD
Air Connection
Positive Pressure
Negative Pressure
Adjusting screw
NC
P
v
NO
P
v
C
Port Label
(FM Only)
Air Connection Switch Differential @ 70º F

Tubing: Recommended as minimums: 1/4” copper or Differential Operating Pressure
aluminum tubing; 1/8” pipe. All tubing and pipe must be Range
clean and free from oil, dirt, and chips. If piping runs .015” to .03” W.C. .17” - 1” W.C.
over five feet long, use larger size tubing or pipe, and
.5” W.C. .17” - 6” W.C.
reduce size at switch connection.
1.0 W.C. .17” - 12” W.C.
Air Supply
Should be connected as shown in drawings.
Differential Pressure Only Vacuum Only
High Vacuum or Vacuum

(Low Pressure) Connection
Low Vacuum or Pressure

(High Pressure) Connection
SMDI 1010802016 Rev. A 11/07 Always leave un-used ports open to atmosphere.
Limitation of Liability
It is understood and agreed that seller’s liability whether in The price stated for the equipment is a consideration in limiting
contract, in tort, under any warranty, in negligence or otherwise seller’s liability. No action, regardless of form, arising out of the
shall not exceed the return of the amount of the purchase transactions may be brought by purchaser more than one year
price paid by purchaser and under no circumstances shall after the cause of action has accrued.
seller be liable for special, indirect or consequential damages.
Warranty
1. Antunes Controls products are guaranteed to be free from mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one year
from date of shipment under normal use and service provided installation is made in accordance with manufacturers’
recommendations.
2. Parts deemed defective shall be repaired or replaced at manufacturers option and at manufacturers expense but
shall not include foreign or federal excise taxes, state or municipal sale or use taxes, all such taxes not limited to the
foregoing being responsibility of the purchaser.
3. No charge for travel and/or mileage will be allowed to purchaser.
4. Antunes Controls reserves the right to make changes in design or make any improvements on any products. The
right is always reserved to modify our equipment because of new technology, underwriter’s requirements and/or
government regulations.
5. The following are not covered under warranty:
a. Failure from neglect, abuse, careless handling and mis-application of unit.
b. Failure to observe guidelines for installation or improper voltage hook-up.
c. Failure caused by improper maintenance. (See maintenance guidelines found in operation instructions.)
d. Unless specifically allowed by Antunes Controls, no other charges may be included under warranty.
A.J. Antunes & Co. Antunes Equipment

Headquarters/Manufacturing Manufacturing (Suzhou) Ltd.,
180 Kehoe Boulevard 9 Hou Ju Road, Building #24,
Carol Stream, Illinois 60188 USA S&T Park, SND
Phone (630) 784-1000 Suzhou, Jiangsu, China 215011
Toll Free (800) 253-2991 Phone: 86-512-6841-3637
Fax: (630) 784-1650 Fax: 86-512-6841-3907
www.ajantunes.com
SMDI 1010802016 Rev. A 11/07
LOW NOx BURNER BULLETIN 136LN
1I4
Page 1
PARKER BOILER CO.
PREMIX METAL FIBER LOW NOx BURNER SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
The premix fan assisted combustion system consists of a burner bed of multiple Metal Fiber Burners. These burners
are linked to a single fan through a manifold and gas air premix piping. The Premix Burners provide uniform heat
distribution over all boiler tubes. The system provides a high degree of NOx level repeatability once system is adjusted.
No filters are required.
The burners are capable of generating Low NOx without generating significant CO emissions. NOx emissions are
guaranteed less than 9, 12, 20 or 30 PPM at 3% O2 with CO emissions guaranteed less than 100 PPM at 3% O2.
Different style burners offer different NOx Levels.
The burners consist of a Metal Fiber Hot Face made from an Iron Chromium Alloy. The Metal Fiber is backed by
Stainless Steel distribution plates. The Metal Fiber Burners provide a high degree of resistance to mechanical and
thermal shock, fast cool down and corrosion resistance. Maximum pressure drop through burner at normal firing rates
is 1.2" W.C.
The system utilizes a blower and/or mixer system, which distributes a ratio controlled gas/air mixture to individual Metal
Fiber Low NOx Burners. Blower construction is non-sparking with totally enclosed motor. The burner bed is placed
under the standard Parker tube bundle and contained in a non-pressurized combustion chamber. The gas/air ratio is
controlled by the blower/mixer system. Parker offers 5 different types of Low NOx Mixing Systems, see Bulletin LN-
BSSG.
BLOWER
PREMIX METAL BOILER

FIBER BURNER TUBES
GAS & AIR

MIXTURE
PREMIX BURNER SYSTEM

PREMIX2 DWG
EFFICIENCY
South Coast Air Quality Management District Testing has confirmed 83-85% thermal efficiency on Parker High Pressure
Steam Boilers. Higher efficiencies are realized because of excellent gas/air ratio control, clean complete combustion
and the radiant effect. Most boiler efficiencies can be improved at least 2-5% with the Premix Metal Fiber Burner
System.
GUARANTEE
This Burner System when installed or adjusted by Parker Boiler or an Approved Service Organization, is guaranteed to
produce less than 9, 12, 20 or 30 PPM NOx emissions and less than 100 PPM CO emissions at 3% corrected O2 when
burning natural gas or LPG. These Low NOx levels are achieved by the Metal Fiber Burner and a Premix gas/air
distribution manifold assembly. Varying burner selections are available for different NOx levels.
Parker or Approved Service Organization will adjust and certify these Low NOx and CO levels.
REPEATABILITY
It has been our experience with field installations that the Low NOx and CO levels can be repeated, with ease.
MAINTENANCE
We would recommend that the burner system be checked and tuned up by competent personnel on a yearly basis. The
burners can be blown off with air if the surface becomes dirty. After approximately 5 years, if required, the burners can
be removed, washed and reinstalled. For service, tuning and cleaning information, refer to Energy Evaluation & Tune
up Procedures Parker Bulletin TU-1146L.
W:\Bulletin\136\136LN-1I4.doc
LOW NOx BURNER BULLETIN 136LN
1I4
Page 2
PARKER BOILER CO.
LOW NOx PREMIX BURNER
IDENTIFICATION BULLETIN
Parker Boilers Premix
Low NOx Burner System
utilizes a variety of metal
fiber burners. We use
burners with a 20.5”
length, 22½” length and
36” length.
The burners consist of a

metal fiber surface (hot
face) constructed from a
special metal alloy. The
metal fiber is either
sintered or woven. The
metal fiber offers an
insulating effect which
lowers burner surface,
flame temperatures and
NOx levels. These
burners have distribution
and backing plates. The
metal fiber thickness
varies between 1-8 mm.
The MFB-22.5 and 36 have been in use since 1992. They utilize a sintered metal fiber hot face. We have installed
approximately 10,000 of these burners in the field. The burners are utilized for a 20 or 30 ppm NOx level. These
burners are designed to run in a blue (convective) flame mode.
The PB-20.5, PB-22.5 or PB-36 utilize a woven metal fiber. They were developed as replacements for the MFB Series.
The metal fiber on these burners covers the entire top of the burner offering improved service life under severe heat
conditions. All PB Burners are constructed of stainless steel. These burners can operate in a blue flame or radiant
mode if desired.
The PB-22.5LN and PB-36LN were developed to address the 9 and 12 ppm NOx levels imposed by various air districts.
The burners utilize the NIT100S material on 100% of the firing surface plus they utilize a series of stripes of woven
metal fiber strips to break the surface flame pattern.
Extremely Low NOx Levels can be achieved with these burners and many Parker systems are installed and running at
under 9 ppm with these burners.
All burners bolt to a Parker transitions, which connect to NPT Pipe.
The burners if kept clean and adjusted properly will offer many years of trouble free service. Many burners have been
in the field for 20 years.
For service, tuning and cleaning information refer to Energy Evaluation & Tune up Procedures Parker Bulletin TU-
1146L.
Parker Metal Fiber Burners
PART NO.
MFB-22.5 22½” METAL FIBER BURNER
MFB-36 36” METAL FIBER BURNER
PB-20.5 20½” NIT METAL FIBER BURNER
PB-22.5 22½” NIT METAL FIBER BURNER
PB-22.5LN 22½” NIT/STRIPE METAL FIBER BURNER 12PPM
PB-36 36” NIT METAL FIBER BURNER
PB-36LN 36” NIT.STRIPE METAL FIBER BURNER 12PPM
W:\Bulletin\136\136LN-1I4.doc
SUPPLEMENTAL GUIDANCE SHEET FOR AC TECH %8//(7,1$&7(&+
SCM SERIES VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) +
3DJHRI

7KHIROORZLQJLQVWUXFWLRQVZLOOJXLGH\RXLQWKHXVHRIWKH$&7(&+9)'GULYHLQWHJUDWHGZLWKWKH3DUNHU/RZ12[
%XUQHU6\VWHP

CAUTION: Initial adjustment should be undertaken only by trained and experienced personnel
familiar with combustion systems, with control/safety circuitry, and with knowledge of the overall
installation.

)XQFWLRQ

7KH9)'DFWVDVDPXOWLIXQFWLRQGHYLFHDQGSHUIRUPVWKHIROORZLQJGXWLHV)DQPRWRUVWDUWHUZLWKVRIWVWDUW
IDQYDULDEOHVSHHGFRQWUROZLWKGLJLWDOUHDGRXWRYHUORDGSURWHFWLRQGLDJQRVWLFVDQGORDGWUDFNLQJ

7KH9)'ZLOOUHGXFHIDQHQHUJ\FRQVXPSWLRQ

,QLWLDO9)'FKHFNOLVW

Check input voltage.9HULI\LQSXWYROWDJHWRPDWFKZLWKWKHQDPHSODWHYROWDJHUDWLQJRQWKHGULYH1RWH+3
UDWLQJRQ9)'PXVWDOVRPDWFKRUH[FHHG+3UDWLQJRQPRWRU

Check wiring to VFD.9HULI\ZLULQJFLUFXLWU\ZLWKZLULQJGLDJUDP,QFRPLQJ$&SRZHURXWSXWSRZHUZLULQJ
DQGFRQWUROZLULQJPXVWEHUXQLQVHSDUDWHFRQGXLW1RWH0DNHVXUHLQFRPLQJ$&SRZHULVQRWZLUHGWR9)'
RXWSXWWHUPLQDOV89:RUWHUPLQDOV%%

Check VFD parameter settings. 6HWDWIDFWRU\$SDUDPHWHUGULYHVKHHWLVSURYLGHGLQWKHSDQHO
D 7RDFFHVVSDUDPHWHUVHWWLQJVSUHVVWKHMODEEXWWRQWRDFWLYDWHSDVVZRUGSURPSW

E 8VHŸRUźEXWWRQVWRVFUROOWRSDVVZRUGYDOXH
GHIDXOWDQGSUHVVMODEEXWWRQWRHQWHU,I
SDUDPHWHUPHQXLVDFFHVVHGWKHGLVSOD\ZLOOVKRZWKH
ILUVWSDUDPHWHUPHQX1RWH,IWKHGLVSOD\IODVKHV
³(U´WKHSDVVZRUGZDVLQFRUUHFWDQGWKHSDVVZRUG
PXVWEHUHSHDWHG
SUPPLEMENTAL GUIDANCE SHEET FOR AC TECH %8//(7,1$&7(&+
SCM SERIES VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) +
3DJHRI

F 3UHVVMODE EXWWRQWRYLHZWKHSDUDPHWHUVHWWLQJRQWKHILUVWSDUDPHWHUPHQX&KHFNWKLVDJDLQVWWKH
SDUDPHWHUGULYHVKHHWSURYLGHGLQWKHSDQHO

F ,IWKHYDOXHPDWFKHVZLWKGULYHVKHHWSUHVVMODE WZLFHDQGWKHŸEXWWRQRQFHWRVFUROOWRVHFRQG
SDUDPHWHUQXPEHUWKHQSUHVVMODE EXWWRQWRYLHZVHFRQGSDUDPHWHUVHWWLQJ,IYDOXHPDWFKHV
GULYHVKHHWUHSHDWF1RWH6WRSDWSDUDPHWHU

F ,IWKHYDOXHGRHVQRWPDWFKSUHVVŸRUźEXWWRQVWRVFUROOWRWKHYDOXHVSHFLILHGRQWKHGULYH
VKHHW3UHVVMODE EXWWRQWRHQWHUYDOXH1RWH7KLVZLOODOVREULQJ\RXRXWRIWKHSURJUDPPHQX
,I\RXZDQWWRFRQWLQXHZLWKWKHUHVWRIWKHSDUDPHWHUV\RXPXVWSUHVVMODEEXWWRQDJDLQWRJR
EDFNLQWRWKHPHQX

2QFH\RXKDYHFRPSOHWHGJRLQJWKUXSDUDPHWHUVHWWLQJVRQWKHGULYHPHQX3URFHHGZLWKWKHSURSHUSURFHGXUH
IRUVWDUWXS

CAUTIONS:
'RQRWF\FOHSRZHUWRGULYHPRUHWKDQWLPHSHUPLQXWHV'DPDJHZLOORFFXULIGULYHSRZHUF\FOHV
PRUHIUHTXHQWO\

,IGULYHKDVVDWLGOHIRUPRUHWKDQ\HDU'RQRWDWWHPSWWRUXQGULYH7KHGULYHPXVWEHUHIRUPHG6HH
2 0PDQXDO

7RUHYHUVHEORZHUGLUHFWLRQ6WRSWKHGULYH:DLWPLQXWHVDQGWKHQVZDSDQ\PRWRUZLUHVFRQQHFWHG
WR89:RXWSXWPRWRUWHUPLQDOV

:?%XOOHWLQ??$&7(&+6&0?YIGJXLGDQFHGRF
THE SCL/SCM SUB-MICRO DRIVE
INPUT POWER DC BUS

TERMINALS TERMINALS
ELECTRONIC
PROGRAMMING 3-DIGIT LED
MODULE (EPM) DISPLAY
PROGRAMMING
BUTTONS
CONTROL
TERMINAL
STRIP
OUTPUT (MOTOR) TERMINALS

6.0 INSTALLATION
NOTE!
SCL/SCM Series drives are intended for inclusion within other equipment, by professional electrical
installers according to EN 61000-3-2. They are not intended for stand-alone operation.
WARNING!
DRIVES MUST NOT BE INSTALLED WHERE SUBJECTED TO ADVERSE ENVIRONMENTAL
CONDITIONS SUCH AS: COMBUSTIBLE, OILY, OR HAZARDOUS VAPORS OR DUST;
EXCESSIVE MOISTURE OR DIRT; VIBRATION; EXCESSIVE AMBIENT TEMPERATURES.
CONSULT AC TECHNOLOGY FOR MORE INFORMATION ON THE SUITABILITY OF A DRIVE
TO A PARTICULAR ENVIRONMENT.
SCL/SCM models are suitable for UL pollution degree 2 environment only, and MUST be installed in
an electrical enclosure which will provide complete mechanical protection and will maintain the internal
temperature within the drive’s ambient operating temperature rating. All drive models MUST be
mounted in a vertical position for proper heatsink cooling.
Maintain a minimum spacing around the drive of at least 1 inch (25 mm) on each side and 2 inches (50
mm) on the top and bottom. Allow more spacing if the drive is mounted next to other heat-producing
equipment. Do not mount drives above other drives or heat producing equipment. Fans or blowers
should be used to insure proper cooling in tight quarters.
In order to properly size an enclosure, the heat generated by the drive(s) must be known. Refer to the
HEAT LOSS column in Section 5.0 - SCL/SCM RATINGS. An enclosure manufacturer can then
determine the required enclosure size based on the total heat generated inside the enclosure (from the
drive(s) and other heat sources), the maximum allowable temperature inside the enclosure, the maximum
ambient temperature outside the enclosure, and the enclosure properties.
The SCL/SCM Series is UL approved for solid state motor overload protection. Therefore, a separate
thermal overload relay is not required for single motor applications.
6.1 INSTALLATION AFTER A LONG PERIOD OF STORAGE
WARNING!
Severe damage to the drive can result if it is operated after a long period of storage or inactivity
without reforming the DC bus capacitors!
If input power has not been applied to the drive for a period of time exceeding three years (due to
storage, etc), the electrolytic DC bus capacitors within the drive can change internally, resulting in
excessive leakage current. This can result in premature failure of the capacitors if the drive is operated
after such a long period of inactivity or storage.
In order to reform the capacitors and prepare the drive for operation after a long period of inactivity,
apply input power to the drive for 8 hours prior to actually operating the motor.
7
7.0 INPUT AC POWER REQUIREMENTS
WARNING!
Hazard of electrical shock! Capacitors retain charge after power is removed. Disconnect incoming
power and wait until the voltage between terminals B+ and B- is 0 VDC before servicing the drive.
The input voltage must match the nameplate voltage rating of the drive. Voltage fluctuation must not
vary by greater than 10% overvoltage or 15% undervoltage.
NOTE: Drives with dual input voltage ratings must be programmed for the proper supply voltage
(refer to Parameter 01 - LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION in Section 15.0 - DESCRIPTION OF
PARAMETERS).
The drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5,000 RMS symmetrical
amperes at the drive’s rated voltage.
If the kVA rating of the AC supply transformer is greater than 10 times the input kVA rating of the
drive(s), an isolation transformer, or 2-3% input line reactor must be added to the line side of the
drive(s).
Three phase voltage imbalance must be less than 2.0% phase to phase. Excessive phase to phase
imbalance can cause severe damage to the drive.
Motor voltage should match line voltage in normal applications. The drive’s maximum output voltage
will equal the input voltage. Use extreme caution when using a motor with a voltage rating which is
different from the input line voltage.
7.1 INPUT VOLTAGE RATINGS
SM000S Series drives are rated for 120 Vac single phase, 50-60 Hz input. The drive will function
with input voltage of 120 Vac (+10%, -15%) at 48 to 62 Hz.
SM200S & SL200S Series drives are rated for 208/240 Vac, single phase, 50-60 Hz input. The drive
will function with input voltage of 208 to 240 Vac (+10%, -15%), at 48 to 62 Hz.
SM200 Series drives are rated for 208/240 Vac, three phase, 50-60 Hz input. The drive will function
with input voltage of 208 to 240 Vac (+10%, -15%) at 48 to 62 Hz.
SM400 Series drives are rated for 400/480 Vac, three phase, 50-60 Hz input. The drive will function
with input voltage of 400 to 480 Vac (+10%, -15%) at 48 to 62 Hz.
NOTE: Parameter 01 - LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION must be programmed according to the applied
input voltage. See Section 15.0 - DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS.
8
THIS PAGE IS PURPOSELY LEFT BLANK

MC-5000
MARCH 28, 2013
FIREYE
MODULAR
MicroM
FLAME SAFEGUARD CONTROLS
APPROVED
WARNING: Selection of this control for a particular application should be made by a com-
petent professional, licensed by a state or other government agency. Inappropriate application
of this product could result in an unsafe condition hazardous to life and property.
DESCRIPTION
The Fireye MicroM Series Flame Safeguard Control is a compact, microprocessor based, modular
burner management system designed to provide automatic ignition and continuous flame monitoring
for commercial sizes of heating and process equipment firing any type of fuel.
The MicroM is designed to be backward compatible with existing TFM, UVM and M-Series II con-
trols. The MicroM MEC120 and MEC230 chassis with the appropriate MEP100, MEP200 and
MEP500 series programmers provide operation similar to its predecessors and is usually directly
interchangeable. The MEC320 and MEC480 chassis with the appropriate MEP300, MEP400 and
MEP600 series programmers provide additional enhancements such as early spark termination, pilot
proving, and interrupted pilot.
The advantages of the MicroM are zero dependence on discrete components previously used for tim-
ing functions. The MicroM, through the use of micro-controller technology, incorporates smart diag-
nostic LED's, smart reset function for multi-burner applications, optional alpha-numeric display
output (ED510), and serial communications via a Modbus or E500 Communication Interface. The
MicroM system also provides additional amplifier selections. Along with the standard UV and
Flame Rod amplifiers are UV self-check, Infrared, Cadmium Sulfide and a dry contact amplifier for
use with the Fireye Phoenix scanner. All amplifiers are available with flame failure response times of
0.8 seconds or 3 seconds nominal (4 second maximum) and each provide a set of test jacks with a
uniform range of 0-10 VDC for the measurement of flame signal intensity.
A complete MicroM system includes the appropriate flame detector, plug-in amplifier and program-
mer modules which connect into a standard chassis and wiring base. Interchangeable programmer
and amplifier modules allow for complete versatility in selection of control function, timing and
flame scanning means. Functions such as relight, recycle, non-recycle, two stage capability, non-
recycle air flow, proof of air flow open at start, purge timing, early spark termination, pilot proving
and pilot cutoff are determined by the appropriate programmer module. Type of flame scanner (UV,
Repetitive UV Self-Check, Flame Rod, IR or Cadmium Sulfide or dry contact) and the flame failure
response time (FFRT) are determined by the amplifier module. Optional plug-in daughter boards
provide additional features such as remote reset, alpha-numeric display and serial communications.
The MicroM programmers are micro-controller based modules that control the sequence of opera-
tion and also interface with plug-in amplifiers, meter boards, display drivers and external communi-
cation devices. The programmers are available in an assortment of configurations necessary to
resolve the application requirement. Current families of programmers for use with the MEC120 and
1

MEC230 type chassis include the MEP100, MEP 200 and MEP500 series. Programmers for use with
the MEC320 and MEC480 type chassis include the MEP300, MEP400 and MEP600 series.
Some programmer modules are equipped with a series of dipswitches to select Purge Timing, Pilot
Trial for Ignition (PTFI) timing, Proof of Air flow open at start, Post Purge, Recycle and Non-Recy-
cle operation. LED indicators on the programmer modules indicate the current operating status of the
control and during a lockout condition displays the fault as a coded sequence, simplifying the trou-
bleshooting of a shutdown.
In the event of pilot ignition failure, or following a safety shutdown, the control locks out, activating
an alarm circuit and displays the cause of lockout on the integrated LED’s and on the optional ED510
display. Unless otherwise specified, manual reset is required. Remote reset is available on the
MEC120R, MEC120RC, MEC320RD, MEC230RC, MEC320R, MEC320RC and MEC320RD
chassis. A detailed description of the various programmer, amplifier and chassis modules is found
later in this document. A “run-check” switch, provided to assist in testing size, position and stabiliza-
tion of the pilot, is provided on some specific models and all MEP500 and MEP600 series program-
mers.
Modular MicroM controls incorporate a safety checking circuit that is operative on each start. If
flame (real or simulated) is detected prior to a start or during purge, the fuel valves will not be ener-
gized and the unit will lock out.
The modular MicroM controls use the same wiring base as the Fireye UVM, TFM and M- Series II
controls and are designed to be interchangeable with most models with little or no rewiring. See
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL, SCANNERS AND FLAME DETECTORS (page 8 and 47) for
temperature and wiring requirements.
NOTE: The individual MicroM modules, i.e. MEC chassis, MEP programmers and amplifiers are
? not interchangeable with M-Series II modules, i.e. MC chassis, MP programmers and amplifiers.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply: 120 VAC (min. 102, max. 132) 50/60 Hz. (MEC1XX, MEC3XX)
230 VAC (min. 196, max. 253) 50/60 Hz. (MEC2XX, MEC4XX)
Power Consumption:12 VA (Operating)
Shipping Weight (Approx): 3 lbs (1.4 kg)
Operating Temperature:-40°F (-40°C) to 140°F (60°C)
Table 1: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE LIMITS
MAXIMUM MINIMUM
Control 140F 60C - 40F - 40C
Scanner UV1A, UV2, UV8A, 200F 93C - 40F - 40C
45UV3, UV90
45UV5-1007, 45UV5-1009; 200F 93C - 40F - 40C
55UV5-1007, -1009
Photocell 45CM1 (OBSOLETE) 165F 74C - 40F - 40C
Flame Rod 1500F 816C - 40F - 40C
(Tip 2460 F)
48PT2 140F 60C -40F -40C
CSIA5 140F 60C -40F -40C
2

Table 2: LOAD RATINGS: All Ratings are 120V, 60 Hz
Fireye Terminal Typical Load Maximum Rating @120V 60 Hz

3 or 4 Pilot valve(s) 125 VA pilot duty (solenoid valve) plus
Individual or combined Solenoid valve 250 VA (Transformer)
Ignition Transformer
5 Main Fuel Valve(s) 125 VA pilot duty (solenoid) or
25 VA pilot duty (solenoid) and
400 VA (opening) motorized, 250 VA hold
8 Motor or contactor Terminal 8 rated to energize and de-energize 9.8 FLA,
58.8 LRA on safety lockout.
A Alarm 125 VA, pilot duty
Minimum load requirement = 100mA

Table 3: ALTERNATIVE LOAD RATINGS:
COMBINATION NUMBER PILOT FUEL TERMINAL IGNITION TERMINAL 4 MAIN VALVE TERMINAL
3 5
1 C NO LOAD E
2 B NO LOAD E
3 NO LOAD NO LOAD E
4 E A E
5 NO LOAD A E
6 D A E
7 D A D
8 NO LOAD A D
Table 4: COMPOSITION OF EACH COMBINATION
A B C D E
4.5A Ignition 50 VA Pilot Duty 180 VA Ignition 2A Pilot Duty 65 VA Pilot Duty
plus 4.5A ignition plus motor val- plus Motor valves
ues with: 600VA with: 3850 VA
inrush., 360 VA in rush., 700 VA
open, 250 VA open, 250 VA
hold hold
3

MOUNTING BASE 3/16” DIA. MOUNTING

HOLES (4)
S1
7
KNOCKOUTS (12)
S2 FOR 1/2”
8 CONDUIT
3
5 3/16” 2/N
5
A 4”
4

6
1
3/16” MOUNTING
1/2” HOLES
(4)
5 3/16” 5 5/16” 4” 1/2”’
13/16” HEX 2 3/8” 2.58” 1.06” DIA.

”L” (27.0)
(20.6) (60.3) (50.8)
1 3/16”
15/16” HEX (30)
(23.8) 1/2”
(12.7)
36” (1m APPROX.) 3/8” PIPE THREAD

TC-ER CABLE UV2 UV SCANNER
1/2”-14 NPT
”L” LENGTH AS SPECIFIED: 12”, 18”, 24” (304.8, 457.2, 609.6) 2.53” 1.06” DIA
(64.3) (27.0)
69ND1 FLAME ROD
1.406"
(35.7MM) UV90 MOUNTING BLOCK
(Included with Scanner)
36” TC-ER CABLE (UV-1A-3) 1/2-14 STRAIGHT

1.48" 0.875" 72” TC-ER CABLE (UV-1A-6) FEMALE PIPE THREAD
(37.6MM) (37.6MM)
UV1A UV SCANNER
2 7/8” SCREW,
3.75" (73) 1/4”-20 THD
1.90 0.880" (95.7MM)
(48.2MM) (22.3MM) 0.5"
(12.7MM)
HOLE FOR
UV90 SCANNER 3/4”
SIGHTING 3 1/4”
WHEN ASSEMBLED PIPE (82)
5.04”:(128)
1.063” 2 1/2”
2.5”
DIA. (63.5)
(63.6)
1 1/4”
DIA. UV SCANNER
Type: 45UV3 2” 1 5/8”
Model: 1050 (50.8) (41)
.345” (8.7) HEAT INSULATOR
1/2”-14
TC-ER CABLE 2” (51) CLEARANCE REQUIRED TO REMOVE
1/2”-14 TAPERED
STRAIGHT PIPE THD PIPE THD UV SELF-CHECK
48PT2-1000 SERIES INFRARED SCANNER SCANNER
TYPE 45UV5
WHEN ASSEMBLED MODEL 1009
3.96” (100.6)
1.02” DIA. 2 1/2”
(26.0) 2”
1.46” (63.5) 13/32” (10) 45O 4” (102)
(37.1) (51)
8 1/4” 1 11/16”
(210) HEX
1 1/4” (43)
DIA. 72” LEAD
2.13”
(54.0)
HEAT INSULATOR
1/2”-14
1/2”-14 TAPERED
STRAIGHT PIPE THD PIPE THD
.345” DIA. (8.7) TC-ER CABLE 1”-11 1/2 NPT
3/8”-18 NPT FOR
FOR SIGHT
48PT2-9000 SERIES INFRARED SCANNER PURGE AIR CONNECTION
TUBE
All dimensions in inches (millimeters in parentheses).
4

WARNING: This equipment is a Class B digital apparatus which complies with the Radio
Interference Regulations, CRC c.1374.
CAUTION: Published load ratings assume that no control be required to handle inrush
current more often than once in 15 seconds. The use of control switches, solenoids, relays,
etc. which chatter will lead to premature failure. It is important to run through a test
operation (with fuel shut off) following the tripping of a circuit breaker, a blown fuse, or
any instance of chattering of any external current consuming devices.
APPROVALS
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
MCCZ File MP 1537
Controls, Primary Safety - Listed
MCCZ2 File MP1537
Controls, Primary Safety - Component
MCCZ7 File MP1537
Controls, Primary Safety Certified for Canada
MCCZ8 file MP1537
Controls, Primary Safety Certified for Canada - Component
Factory Mutual System (FM) Approved
UL approval does not apply to 230VAC operations.
WARNING: Selection of programmer and amplifier type for a particular application should
be made by a competent professional, such as a Boiler/Burner technician licensed by a state
or government agency, engineering personnel of the burner, boiler or furnace manufacturer
(OEM) or in the performance of duties based on the information from the OEM.
WARNING: This equipment generates and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference to
radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart J of part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to pro-
vide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial envi-
ronment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in
which case the user, at his own expense, will be equipped to take whatever measures that
may be required to correct the problem.
In order for the MicroM to gather and retain statistical and historic data such as burner
hours, burner cycles, system hours and average flame signal, it is necessary that Terminal 1
? be powered at all times. Removing power from Terminal 1 at the end of the firing cycle
causes all data gathered during the previous 16 hours or last 9 cycles to be lost. For conver-
sions or upgrades from older TFM or M-Series II controls that use MART1 amplifiers, it is
necessary that Terminal 1 be directly powered with 120 VAC.
5

ORDERING INFORMATION
MicroM Chassis Types (For use with MEP1XX, MEP2XX, and MEP5XX, includes dust cover)
MEC120 120 VAC input with standard plug-in board.
MEC120R 120 VAC input with remote reset capability.
MEC120D 120 VAC input with alpha-numeric display interface to ED510.
MEC120RD 120 VAC input with alpha-numeric display interface to ED510 and remote reset capability.
MEC120C 120 VAC input with interface to E500 Communication Interface and Modbus capability.
MEC120RC 120 VAC input with remote reset capability, alpha-numeric display interface to ED510, interface to E500 Communica-
tion Interface and Modbus capability.
MEC230RC 230 VAC input with remote reset capability, alpha-numeric display interface to ED510, and Modbus capability.
MicroM Chassis Types (For use with MEP3XX, MEP4XX, and MEP6XX, includes dust cover)
MEC320R 120 VAC input with remote reset capability.
MEC320D 120 VAC input with alpha-numeric display interface to ED510.
MEC320RD 120 VAC input with alpha-numeric display interface to ED510 and remote reset capability.
MEC320C 120 VAC input with interface to E500 Communication Interface and Modbus capability.
MEC320RC 120 VAC input with remote reset capability, alpha-numeric display interface to ED510, interface to E500 Communica-
tion Interface and Modbus capability.
MEC320TS 120 VAC input with display interface to ED510, Modbus interface and auxiliary relay output with dry contact for con-
troller interface (MED8).
MEC480RC 230 VAC input with remote reset capability, alpha-numeric display interface to ED510, and Modbus capability.
MicroM Programmer Models (For use with MEC120 and MEC 230 Chassis)
MEP100 Relight operation, 10 sec. PTFI.
MEP101 Relight operation, allow flame signal until 60 seconds after interlock closed.
MEP102 Non-recycle on flame fail, 5 second PTFI.
MEP103 Fixed 10 second SISP*, 10 second MTFI, re-try once on igniter failure, fixed 30 second post purge.
MEP104 Non-recycle on flame fail, 10 second PTFI.
MEP105 Non-recycle on flame fail, lockout on air-flow open with flame present, 10 second PTFI.
MEP106 Same as MEP100. 12 second pre-purge, added reset from lockout via line voltage.
MEP107 Same as MEP100. Force 5 minute purge delay after main flame fail.
MEP108 Same as MEP100 with 0 second purge, 15 second PTFI, non-recycle on flame fail. Not FM approved.
MEP109 Immediate ignition and pilot, 10 second fixed PTFI, 10 second MTFI, intermittent pilot, non-recycle on flame fail.
MEP100P Relight operation, 10 sec PTFI, fixed 15 second post purge.
MEP130 Same as MEP100, 30 second PTFI. Not FM approved.
MEP230 Selectable purge timing (7, 30, 60, 90 sec.) 10 sec PTFI timing, recycle/non-recycle, post purge, prove air open at start.
MEP230H Same as MEP230 with 8 second pilot stabilization.
MEP235 Same as MEP230 with lockout on air flow open 10 seconds after the start of a cycle, selectable recycle/nonrecycle lockout
on air flow open after flame is proven and dedicated lockout after loss of flame.
MEP236 Same as MEP230 with additional 6 second igniter on time with main fuel. To be used with intermittent pilot only.
MEP237 Same as MEP230 with fixed PTFI timing and check/run switch. Used with MEDC2 amplifier to provide operation with 85
Series (Phoenix) and 95 Series (InSight) scanners.
MEP238 Same as MEP230. Ignition de-energized 3 seconds after pilot flame detected. Provides 8 second pilot stabilization period.
MEP290 Same as MEP230 except selectable post purge is 0 or 90 seconds.
MEP560 Same as MEP230H, 10 second main trial for ignition, run-check switch.
MEP561 Same as MEP560 without 8 second pilot stabilization. Selectable purge time of 7s, 10s, 15s, 30s.
MEP562 Same as MEP560, lockout on loss of air flow, non-recycle operation only.
MEP564 Same as MEP560. Selectable purge time of 7s, 30s, 60s, 240s.
MEP536 Same as MEP230, 10 second main trial for ignition, run-check switch, will not lockout on air flow open during purge.
MEP537 Same as MEP536 except provides one recycle on main flame failure.
*Spark Igniter Sensing Period
6

MicroM Programmer Models (For use with MEC320 and MEC 480 Chassis)
MEP300 Relight operation, 10 sec. fixed PTFI, 5 sec.pilot proving period, 5 second MTFI. lockout on flame fail during PTFI, pilot
proving and MTFI. Recycle on air flow open. No post purge. Reset on line voltage.
MEP304 Non-recycle on flame fail, 5 sec. purge, 10 sec.fixed PTFI, 5 sec. pilot proving, 10 sec.MTFI, interrupted pilot, early
spark termination.
MEP335 Non-recycle on flame fail, 30 second purge, 35 second hot surface ignition on terminal 4, 3 second PTFI on terminal 3,
5 second pilot proving period, intermittent pilot, 15 second post purge. Manual reset only.
MEP397 Recycle on main flame fail, 15 sec. purge, 7 second fixed PTFI, 5 sec. pilot proving 5 sec. MTFI, early spark termination
and interrupted pilot. Recycle on air flow failure. No post purge, run/check switch. Reset on line voltage.
MEP437 Recycle once on main flame failure, selectable 5 or 10 sec. fixed PTFI, selectable interrupted or intermittent pilot, 5 sec.
MTFI, selectable purge time to 240 seconds, main valve proof of closure, 15 sec. post purge. Reset on line voltage.
MEP696 Provides 30 sec. pre-purge, lockout on airflow after 10 sec., 10 sec. PTFI, 5 sec. pilot proving, early spark termination,
5 sec. MTFI, interrupted pilot, selectable recycle/non-recycle on flame fail, 60 sec. post purge, selectable baud rate for
communications, output for external controller operation.
MEP697 Provides dip-switch selectable pre-purge, selectable air flow proving at startup, selectable post purge, selectable 5/10
sec. PTFI, 5 sec. pilot proving early spark termination, 5 sec. MTFI, interrupted pilot, selectable recycle/non recycle on
flame fail, output for external controller operation.
MicroM Amplifier Models:

MEUV1 UV amplifier, 0.8 second FFRT, uses UV1A, UV2, UV8A, UV90 and 45UV3-1050 scanners.
MEUV4 UV amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses UV1A, UV2, UV8A, UV90 and 45UV3-1050 scanners.
MEUVS1 UV Self-Check amplifier, 0.8 second FFRT, uses 45UV5-1009 scanner.
MEUVS4 UV Self-Check amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses 45UV5-1009 scanner.
MERT1 Flame Rod amplifier, 0.8 second FFRT, uses 69ND1.
MERT4 Flame Rod amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses 69ND1.
MEIR1 Infrared amplifier, 0.8 second FFRT, uses 48PT2 scanner.
MEIR4 Infrared amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses 48PT2 scanner.
MECD1 Cadmium sulfide amplifier, 0.8 second FFRT, uses CS1A5 scanner.
MECD4 Cadmium sulfide amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses CS1A5 scanner.
MEDC2 Contact input amplifier for use with MEP237 to provide operation with 85 Series (Phoenix) and 95 Series
(InSight) scanners
Optional Plug-In Board Modules:

MED1 Standard local reset switch.
MED2 Same as MED1 with display output.
MED3 Same as MED1 with remote reset.
MED4 Same as MED1 with display output and remote reset.
MED5 Same as MED1 with display output and RS485 communications.
MED6 Same as MED1 with display output, remote reset and RS485 communications.
MED7 Same as MED1 with RS485 communications.
MED8 Same as MED1 with display output, RS485 Modbus interface and auxiliary relay output
with normally closed dry contact for controller interface.
MED9 Same as MED1 with display output, RS485 Modbus interface and auxiliary relay output
with normally open dry contact for controller interface.
Wiring Base (Common for all Controls):

61-3060 Closed wiring base, surface mounting.
61-5042 Open wiring base, cabinet mounting.
7

Accessories
ED510 Two line by 16 character, back lit LCD display with keypad.
ED580-2, -4, -8 Remote display cable with RJ45 connection in 2, 4 or 8 foot long lengths. To be used with the appropriate daughter
board.
EC485 RS232 to RS485 converter with power supply and RJ12 jack.
UC485 USB to RS485 converter. Supplied with USB cable.
SMDK-1004 Serviceman’s display kit used for diagnosing MicroM system. Consists of ED510 equipped with back plate, MED
daughter board and ED580-4.
129-145-1, -2, -3 ED510 remote display mounting kit with 4’, 8’ or 2’ cable respectively. Provides NEMA 4 protection.
IT1000 Monitoring device using cellular networks. Provides various reporting methods
FLAME SCANNERS
CAUTION: The UV1A, UV2, UV8A, UV90 and 45UV3 ultra-violet flame scanners and asso-
ciated amplifier modules are non self-checking UV systems and should be applied only to
burners that cycle often (e.g.: a minimum of once per 12 hours) in order for the safety check-
ing circuit to be exercised. If component checking is required during burner operation for
constantly fired burners, utilize the self-checking ultra-violet flame scanners (45UV5) with
associated amplifier module (MEUVS1, MEUVS4) or the infrared flame scanner (48PT2)
with associated AutoCheck amplifier (MEIR1, MEIR4).
For a complete system, choose one of each of the following:

- Chassis - Flame Detector
- Programmer Module - Wiring Base
- Amplifier Module
8

WARNING: Installer must be trained and qualified. Follow the burner manufacturer’s
instructions, if supplied. Otherwise, proceed as follows:
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL, SCANNERS AND FLAME DETECTORS

Wiring Base
Mount the wiring base on the burner or on a panel. The location should be free from excessive vibra-
tion and within the specified ambient temperature rating. The base may be mounted in any angular
position.
All wiring should comply with applicable electrical codes, regulations and local ordinances. Use
moisture resistant wire suitable for at least 90 degrees C. Good electrical wiring practice should be
followed to ensure an adequate ground system. Refer to Fireye Service Note SN-100 separately and
General Grounding Rules later in this document for grounding methods.
A good ground system should be provided to minimize the effects of AC quality problems. A prop-
erly designed ground system meeting all the safety requirements will ensure that any AC voltage
quality problems, such as spikes, surges and impulses have a low impedance path to ground. A low
impedance path to ground is required to ensure that large currents involved with any surge voltages
will follow the desired path in preference to alternative paths, where extensive damage may occur to
equipment.
Circuit recommendations are found on pages 38 through 43. Consult the factory for assistance with
non-standard applications.
WARNING: Controls require safety limits utilizing isolated mechanical contacts.

Electronic limit switches may cause erratic operation and should be avoided.
Care must be taken to NOT route the high energy ignition wire in close proxim-
ity to the flame sensor wiring, particularly when using MERT amplifier.
9

INSTALLING THE PROGRAMMER AND AMPLIFIER MODULES
WARNING: Remove power from the control before proceeding.
FIGURE 1. .
AMPLIFIER PROGRAMMER
Select the appropriate programmer and amplifier modules for your application. Remove the dust
cover from the chassis. Insert the amplifier module into the slot in the corner of the chassis and gen-
tly push the module into position. Insert the programmer module into the slot at the right side of the
chassis and gently push the module into position.
NOTE: Refer to programmer dipswitch settings on page 11 for the proper setting of the dipswitches
for those programmers with this feature.
WARNING: Turn off the power when installing or removing the control.
Replaceable Fuse
The chassis modules are designed with a field replaceable fuse. The fuse is located on the printed cir-
cuit board below the transformer. In the event the fuse becomes OPEN, the Operating Control, PTFI,
and Flame LED’s will light. However, KL or KF (Wiring Arrangements section on pages 33 through
38) will not be energized and the control will lock out and indicate Lockout, Check Blown Fuse. The
fuse will blow as a result of an overload condition on Terminals 3, 4, or 5. To replace the fuse,
remove power from the system and using a small screwdriver or similar tool, install a Fireye replace-
ment fuse (P/N 23-197).
FOR MEC230, ORDER FIREYE REPLACEMENT FUSE P/N 23-198 .
WARNING: Disconnect power before servicing.
10

FIGURE 2.
Replaceable
Fuse Location
PROGRAMMER DIPSWITCH SETTINGS

NOTE: The dipswitch settings become permanently stored within the programmer’s eeprom memory
after 8 hours of continuous electrical operation.
The first 8 hours of continuous operation is determined from the value of system hours being accu-
mulated by the MicroM. System hours are stored to memory (eeprom) automatically every 1,000
minutes or at the occurrence of a lockout. Therefore, any lockout that occurs during the first 8 hours
will cause the system hour value to become the time when the last lockout occurred. If power is
removed and restored, the continuous 8 hours feature will be reduced by the time when the lockout
occurred.
This allows sufficient opportunity to make the appropriate selection, test and checkout the system.
Once stored, the settings cannot be altered.
The MEP200 and MEP500 series programmers have a series of 6 dipswitches (see Figure 3) which
allow the user to program the purge timing, trial for ignition timing, enable post purge, enable proof
of air flow open at start and select recycle/non-recycle operation.
MicroM Programmer Dip Switch Configuration

(see bulletin MC-3200 for MEP696 settings)
SWITCH FUNCTION NOTES

6 5 4 3 2 1 STD MEP561 MEP564
C C 7 7 7 PURGE
C O 30 10 30 TIME
O C 60 15 60 SECONDS
O O 90 30 240
C DISABLED POST* * The MEP290
Programmer
O 15 SECONDS PURGE module has
selectable post purge
of 90 seconds.
C 5 PTFI
O 10 TIME
C DISABLE PROVE AIR
O FLOW OPEN
ENABLE
AT START
C RECYCLE
O NON-RECYCLE
Note: C refers to switch closed position, closed position is when the switch is toward the printed
circuit board. O refers to switch open position or when the switch is moved away from the printed
circuit board. Indicating arrow on top of programmer cover points toward closed position.
11

Once the switches are set, they become permanently stored after 8 hours of continuous operation or
they can be manually set through the use of the optional ED510 display. Refer to the section using
the optional ED510 display for detailed information.
Where applicable, each MicroM programmer is shipped with dip-switch 6 set to non-recycle on
flame fail, dipswitch 4 set to 5 second PTFI time, and dipswitches 1 & 2 set to the longest purge
time.
FIGURE 3.
LED DIP
INDICATORS SWITCHES
(shown in closed or OFF position)
Dipswitch Definitions
Purge Time: Begins after power is detected on Terminal #7 (limit control) and Terminal #6 (running
interlock switch) and no flame (real or simulated) is detected.
Post Purge: If enabled, Terminal #8 (blower motor or contactor) will remain energized for 15 sec-
onds after terminal #7 or Terminal #6 is detected as open.
PTFI Time: The maximum length of time that Terminal #3 and Terminal #4 will be energized after
the pre-purge period to detect pilot flame. For all programmers, the MicroM forces a 3 second delay
before advancing to the next logic module (Stabilization, MTFI or Auto) after flame is detected dur-
ing the PTFI period. This is to allow establishment of a pilot and stabilization of the fuel flow.
Prove Air Flow Open: After power is detected on Terminal #7 (limit control) and before energizing
Terminal #8 (blower motor or contactor) no power must be detected on Terminal #6 (running inter-
lock switch). If power is detected on Terminal #6, the MicroM will hold for 60 seconds after which
safety lockout will occur. On recycle operation, if this is enabled, Terminal #8 will be de-energized to
allow Terminal #6 to open.
Recycle / Non-Recycle: Applies to flame failure during the Run condition. If a flame failure occurs,
the control will de-energize Terminals #3 and #5 and if Recycle is selected a new prepurge period
will begin. Lockout will occur immediately and the alarm will energize 15 seconds after flame fail-
ure if Non-Recycle is selected. Unless otherwise stated (see Programmer Description), the MicroM
recycles on all occurrences of air flow failure. The MEP235 and MEP562 will always initiate a lock-
out on flame failure.
LED INDICATOR LIGHTS

All MicroM Programmer Modules have 5 LED lights to indicate the operating status of the control
and also to display the coded sequence under locked out conditions. The function of the lights under
a normal operating condition is:
Operating Control: This LED is energized whenever the burner control switch and all other various
limit switches are closed and power is applied to Terminal #7.
Interlock or Air Flow: This LED is illuminated whenever power is detected on Terminal #6, indi-
cating the air flow switch or other running interlock is closed. If the operating control is closed and
the running interlock switch remains open, this LED will flash at a 1 second rate indefinitely for the
MEP100 and MEP200 family. Lockout will occur if the switch remains open for 10 minutes in the
MEP500 family. This LED will blink when configured as a flame switch and flame detected.
12

PTFI: This LED is illuminated only during the pilot trial for ignition period and the stabilization
period when so equipped.
Flame: This LED is on whenever a flame signal is detected, and the control is not in a locked out
state.
Alarm: This LED flashes when an alarm condition is detected and is used as an address indicator
(see communication).
During an alarm condition, the Alarm LED is made to flash at approximately a 1 second rate. The
remaining four LEDs are illuminated as a coded sequence identifying the reason for the lockout. For
instance, for a LOCKOUT - FLAME FAIL- PTFI, the INTERLOCK, PTFI and FLAME LED’s will
all be lit steady, with the Alarm LED flashing. This remains true if power is removed and then
restored in a locked out condition.
While in the Idle or Off state, the LEDs are made to flash sequentially to show the operational status
of the control every minute. The LEDs can be tested by pressing and releasing the Reset push button,
while in the Idle or Off state.
LOCKOUT CODES
MSGN DESCRIPTION OP AIRFLOW PTFI FLAME ALARM

CTRL INTLCK
DEC HEX
6 6 Lockout Line Frequency Noise Detected     
7 7 Lockout Flame Fail - PTFI     
15 0F Lockout Fault Unknown     
16 10 Lockout Amplifier High Count Fail     
19 13 Lockout Flame Fail - MTFI     
20 14 Lockout False Flame - STANDBY     
21 15 Lockout Intrlck Open     
22 16 Lockout Intrlck Closed     
24 18 Lockout Chassis Opto     
37 25 Lockout Flame Fail - AUTO     
39 27 Lockout Fuel Valve State Change     
54 36 Lockout Check Chassis     
55 37 Lockout Check Programmer     
56 38 Lockout Check Amplifier     
58 3A Lockout Amplifier Auto Check Fail     
59 3B Lockout Check BLOWN FUSE     
76 4C Lockout Check Scanner     
N/A N/A System Error     
 = NOT LIGHTED
 = LIGHTED
 = FLASHING
All LED’s Flashing indicates defective programmer.
All MicroM chassis are shipped with a convenient peel off label that can be applied to any
surface (inside cover) for future reference.
13

DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES - TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION
Check Programmer Voltage on Terminal 5 at improper time. Inspect wiring to main fuel valve
Welded watchdog relay Replace MEC chassis
Internal diagnostic failure Replace MEP programmer
Check Chassis Voltage on Terminal 3 or 4 at improper time. Inspect wiring to pilot valve and igniter.
Welded watchdog relay Replace MEC chassis
Chassis Opto Opto-Coupler(s) short circuited Replace MEC chassis
Amplifier High Count Fail Amplifier signal level high Replace Amplifier module
Amplifier Auto Check Fail Flame signal too high Use orifice in sight pipe
Internal Amplifier diagnostic fault Replace Amplifier module
Check Scanner Defective shutter Inspect scanner wiring, replace scanner
UV tube false firing Replace UV tube or scanner
Check Blown Fuse No power detected on terminal 3 Inspect defective pilot valve or igniter
Defective fuse Replace fuse
Line Frequency Noise Detected Spikes detected on AC mains Check for SCR motors or DC drives
Inspect ground system
Fuel Value State Change Terminal 5 (main fuel) detected on during PTFI Check external wiring or replace MEC chassis
Check Amplifier Amplifier not passing diagnostic tests Replace Amplifier module
System Error Noise transient Check high energy ignition noise location. Be
sure it is not arcing to chassis or wrapped
with scanner wiring.
PROGRAMMER DESCRIPTION
For replacement of UVM, TFM and M-II type controls, refer to the cross-reference provided at the end of
this section.
MEP100 SERIES
MEP100 and MEP101
These programmers provide relight operation, in the event of a flame failure, pilot trial for ignition is rein-
itiated. The MEP101 will not lock out if flame signal is present during the Idle or Off cycle. With flame
signal present, lockout will occur 60 seconds after the start of a cycle and the air flow switch is closed.
Pilot Ignited Burners
Refer to typical wiring arrangement beginning on page 38.
Normal Operation
With power applied and the limit operating control circuit (1-7) closed, the Operating Control LED
illuminates, the burner motor circuit is energized (Terminal 8).
After the air flow proving switch (7-6) closes, the interlock (air flow) LED is illuminated and a short
time delay period (3-5 seconds) begins.
At the expiration of the safe start check period, a 10 second pilot trial for ignition (PTFI) period is
initiated, illuminating the PTFI Led. Power is applied to Terminal 3, energizing the pilot gas valve
and to Terminal 4, energizing the spark ignition.
At the detection of pilot flame, the FLAME LED is illuminated, and the programmer holds that posi-
tion for 3 seconds to allow the to pilot stabilize.
Power is then applied to Terminal 5 energizing the main fuel valve and removing power from Termi-
nal 4, turning off the spark igniter.
When the operating control opens, the control de-energizes Terminal 3 and Terminal 5 and the pro-
grammer reverts back to an Idle state.
14

Safety Shutdown
In the event pilot flame is not detected at the end of the 10 second PTFI period, the pilot gas valve
and spark ignition are de-energized. A safety lockout occurs which de-energizes the burner motor
and energizes the lockout alarm relay circuit, lighting the Alarm LED, 15 seconds after the safety
lockout occurs. Manual reset is required.
In the event of a flame failure during a firing period, the main fuel valve is de-energized (Terminal 5)
and the spark ignition is re-energized (Terminal 4), the PTFI period begins again as described above
under Normal Operation.
In the event of the interlock switch opening, the main fuel valve and pilot valve are de-energized.
The control reverts back to the Idle state and begins again a new cycle starting with the safe start
check period.
Direct Spark Ignited Burners

Refer to typical wiring arrangement illustrated on pages 40 and 41.
Normal Operation
With power applied and the limit operating control circuit (1-7) closed, the Operating Control LED
illuminates, the burner motor circuit is energized (Terminal 8).
The interlock proving switch (7-6) closes, the INTRLCK LED is illuminated and a short time delay
period (3 seconds) begins (safe start check period).
At the expiration of the safe start check period, a 10 second PTFI period is initiated. The PTFI Led is
illuminated, power is applied to Terminal 3, energizing the main fuel valve and to Terminal 4, ener-
gizing the spark ignition.
At the detection of main flame, the FLAME LED is illuminated, and the programmer holds that posi-
tion for 3-5 seconds to allow the main flame to stabilize.
Power is then removed from Terminal 4, turning off the spark igniter.
When the operating control opens, the control de-energizes Terminal 3 and Terminal 5 and the pro-
grammer reverts back to an Idle state. Terminal 8 is immediately de-energized.
Safety Shutdown
In the event the main flame is not detected at the end of a 10 second PTFI period, the main fuel valve
and spark ignition are de-energized. A safety lockout occurs which de-energizes the burner motor
and energizes the lockout alarm relay circuit, lighting the Alarm LED, 15 seconds after the safety
lockout occurs. Manual reset is required.
In the event of a flame failure during a firing period, the secondary fuel valve (if used) is de-ener-
gized and the spark ignition is re-energized, the PTFI period begins again as described above under
Normal Operation.
In the event of the interlock switch opening, the main fuel valve and pilot valve are de-energized.
The control reverts back to the Idle state and begins again a new cycle starting with the safe start
check period.
MEP102 & MEP104

The MEP102 and MEP104 programmers operate the same as the MEP100, except the PTFI time is
limited to 5 seconds and 10 seconds respectively, the relight feature is eliminated and instead, the
control will enter safety lockout on flame failure. Recycle to the start of safe start check period to
begin a new cycle will occur on air flow switch opening.
MEP103
The MEP103 programmer implements a fixed 10 second spark igniter sensing period (SISP) used to
detect spark, followed by a 10 second main trial for ignition (MTFI). Safety lockout occurs on flame
failure during the main firing period (AUTO). Recycle occurs on air flow switch opening. If spark is
not detected during the spark igniter sensing period the control makes one attempt to establish pilot
15

following a post purge of 30 seconds and a safe start check. Failure to ignition spark on the second
attempt results in safety lockout.
MEP100P
The MEP100P programmers provides a fixed 15 second post purge period upon detection of the
operating Control (1-7) or Air Flow switch (7-6) opening.
MEP100 as FLAME SWITCH (refer to Figure 11)

For systems that require flame switch operation, that is, relay KF will toggle on with flame signal
and off without flame signal, the MicroM provides this function when equipped with an MEP100
programmer. To operate as a flame switch, Terminals 1 and 6 MUST be powered with 120 VAC
while Terminal 7 MUST be left unpowered. Terminals 3, 4, and 5 will provide an isolated (KL relay
not energized) set of contacts with Terminal 3 being the common input, Terminal 4 will be normally
closed and Terminal 5 will be normally open. If Terminal 7 is powered or if Terminal 6 is non-
powered and a flame signal is present, the MicroM will lockout after 1 minute and Terminals 4
and 5 will no longer switch with flame signal. Refer to Figure 11 for configuration wiring. Air
Flow LED will blink while flame is detected.
TIMING CHART
TYPE MEP100
PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE
INTERLOCK
L1/7 AIR FLOW FIRING L1/7
ON PROVEN PERIOD OFF
T 8
SAFE
E START
R 3 CHECK
M PERIOD
I 4
N PTFI
10 SEC
A
L
S 5
Terminal #5 is energized 3 seconds after flame is detected.

Re-ignited PTFI on flame fail after Terminal 5 energized.
Recycle on loss of interlock (air flow) after flame proven.
MEP101
Same as MEP100 but will tolerate flame signal during “Off” cycle.
MEP102
PTFI time limited to 5 seconds, lockout on flame fail.
MEP104
PTFI time limited to 10 seconds, lockout on flame fail.
MEP200 SERIES
The MEP200 Series programmers come equipped with a bank of dipswitches that allow user select-
able prepurge timing, selectable PTFI timing, selectable post purge, selectable air flow proven open
at start, and selectable recycle/non-recycle operation. Refer to PROGRAMMER DIPSWITCH SET-
TINGS for detailed information.
Recycle operation refers to flame failure during the main (AUTO) firing period. In the event of a
main flame failure, power is removed from Terminal 3 and Terminal 5. If selected by the dipswitch,
the control will enter a post purge period for 15 seconds and revert back to the Idle state where the
pre-purge period begins.
16

If non-recycle operation is selected, in the event of a main flame failure, power is removed from Ter-
minal 3 and Terminal 5. The control will enter a forced post purge period of 15 seconds, after which
the Alarm LED is illuminated and the alarm relay is energized putting power on Terminal A.
The MEP230H programmer operates the same as the MEP230 with the exception of an additional 8
second pilot stabilization. After flame is detected during the trial for ignition period, the powering of
Terminal 5 is delayed for eight (8) seconds. Terminal 4 remains powered during the stabilization
period. This function is offered primarily for two-stage light oil burners, to assure a specific delay
between light off of the first and second stage, and to provide additional ignition timing to improve
flame stabilization.
The MEP290 programmer operates the same as the MEP230 with the exception that post purge is
selectable from 0 to 90 seconds.
MEP235
The MEP235 programmer operates the same as the MEP230 except flame failure during the firing
period causes lockout. Dipswitch #6 refers to Recycle/Non-Recycle on a loss of air flow (Terminal 6)
after flame is proven. The running interlock circuit (Terminal 6) must be proven closed within 10
seconds after start of a cycle.
MEP236
The MEP236 programmer provides a 3 second main flame stabilization period by keeping Terminal
#4 (igniter) energized while the main fuel valve (Terminal #5) opens. The MEP236 is to be used on
an intermittent pilot only.
TIMING CHARTS
TYPE MEP230
INTERLOCK
L1/7 AIR FLOW PURGE FIRING L1/7
ON PROVEN COMPLETE PERIOD OFF
T 8
SELECTABLE
E
SELECTABLE POST PURGE
R 3 PURGE
M SELECTABLE PTFI
I 5 OR10 SEC
7, 30, 60, 90 Seconds
N 4
A
L
S 5
Terminal #5 is energized 3 seconds after flame is detected.

Selectable Recycle/Non-Recycle operation on loss of flame after Terminal 5 energized.
Recycle on loss of interlock (air flow) after flame proven.
Selectable air flow (interlock circuit) proven at start.
Selectable purge times are 7, 30, 60 and 90 seconds.
17

TYPE MEP236
INTERLOCK
L1/7 PURGE FIRING L1/7
AIR FLOW
ON COMPLETE PERIOD OFF
PROVEN
8
T SELECTABLE
E SELECTABLE POST PURGE
R 3 PILOT PURGE
SELECTABLE PTFI MFSP*
M 5 OR10 SEC 6 SEC
I
N 4 IGNITER
A
L 5 MAIN VALVE
S
*MAIN FLAME STABILIZATION PERIOD
Terminal #5 is energized 3 seconds after the flame is detected.

Selectable Recycle/Non-Recycle operation on loss of flame after flame is proven.
Igniter remains on for 6 seconds after main valve opened.
Intermittent pilot only.
For interrupted pilot, use MEP536
TYPE MEP230H
INTERLOCK
8
T SELECTABLE
R 3 PURGE
SELECTABLE PTFI STABILIZATION PERIOD
M 5 OR10 SEC 8 SEC
I
N 4
A
L 5
S
Pilot Stabilization timing begins as soon as flame is proven.

Selectable Recycle/Non-Recycle operation on loss of flame after Terminal 5 is energized.
MEP500 SERIES
Refer to typical wiring arrangement illustrated on page 40.
The MEP500 Series Programmers provide an additional relay used to control Terminal 4 separately.
This allows the implementation of a pilot stabilization period as well as main trial for ignition period.
They also come equipped with a bank of dipswitches that allow the user selectable prepurge timing,
selectable PTFI timing, selectable post purge, selectable air flow proven open at start, and selectable
recycle/non-recycle operation. Refer to PROGRAMMER DIPSWITCH SETTINGS for detailed
information.
18

A “run-check” switch is also provided to assist in testing size, position and stabilization of pilot in
conjunction with the flame detector,
For the MEP560 and MEP562, after pilot flame is detected, the control enters an 8 second pilot stabi-
lization period with Terminal 3 and Terminal 4 energized. At the expiration of the stabilization
period, Terminal 5 is energized.
TYPE MEP560
INTERLOCK
PROVEN COMPLETE
8
T SELECTABLE
R 3 PURGE SELECTABLE PTFI STABLIZATION PERIOD
M 5 OR10 SEC 8 SEC
I 4
N MTFI
A 10 SEC
L 5
Pilot Stabilization timing begins as soon as flame is proven.

Recycle on loss of air flow (interlock circuit) after flame is proven.
TYPE MEP561
INTERLOCK
ON COMPLETE PERIOD OFF
PROVEN
8
T SELECTABLE
R 3 PURGE
SELECTABLE PTFI MTFI
M 5 OR10 SEC 10 SEC
I 7, 10, 15, 30 Seconds
N 4
A
L 5
S
Selectable purge times are 7, 10, 15 and 30 seconds.

10 second timing begins 3 seconds after flame is proven.
Recycle on loss of air flow (interlock circuit) after flame is proven.
19

TYPE MEP562
INTERLOCK
8
T SELECTABLE
R 3 PURGE
PTFI STABLIZATION
M 5 OR10 SEC PERIOD
I 8 SEC
N 4
MTFI
A 10 SEC
L 5
S
Pilot stabilization timing begins as soon as flame is proven.

Lockout on loss of air flow (interlock circuit) after flame is proven.
Lockout on flame fail.
MEP300/MEP600 SERIES
This programmer type must be used with the MEC320 or MEC480 type chassis. Refer to typical
wiring arrangement illustrated on page 41.
The MEP300/MEP600 Series Programmers provide additional relays used to control Terminals
3 and 4 separately. This allows the implementation of early spark termination, pilot proving period
and interrupted pilot operation. The MEP397, MEP696 and MEP697 programmers contain a “run-
check” switch to assist in testing size, position and stabilization of pilot in conjunction with the
flame detector.
The MEP696 and MEP697 provide a control line used to energized and de-energize a relay located
on the MED8 and MED9 daughter boards.
TIMING CHARTS
TYPE MEP300
INTERLOCK
8
T POST PURGE
E 5 SECOND
R 3 PURGE
10 SEC 5 SEC 5SEC INTERMITTENT
M PTFI PILOT MTFI PILOT
I PROVING
N 4
A
L 5
S
0 Second post purge on operating control open.

15 Second post purge on flame fail during PTFI, Proving and MTFI.
Lockout on flame fail during PTFI, Proving and MTFI.
Relight operation on main flame fail.
Recycle operation on air flow failure.
Reset from lockout from pushbutton or line voltage.
20

TYPE MEP304
INTERLOCK
8
T POST PURGE
E 5 SECOND
R 3 PURGE
10 SEC 5 SEC 10 SEC INTERRUPTED
I PROVING
N 4
A
L 5
S
0 Second post purge on operating control open. 15 Second post purge on flame fail.
Non-recycle operation on flame fail.
TYPE MEP335
INTERLOCK
8
T 15 SEC
E 30 SECOND POST PURGE
R 3 PURGE
3 SEC 5 SEC INTERMITTENT
M PTFI PILOT PILOT
I PROVING
N 4
A 35 SEC
HSI
L 5
S
15 Second post purge

Non-recycle operation on flame failure.
Reset from lockout from pushbutton.
21

TYPE MEP397
INTERLOCK
8
T POST PURGE
E 1 5 SECOND
R 3 PURGE
7 SEC 5 SEC 5 SEC INTERRUPTED
I PROVING
N 4
A
L 5
S
0 Second post purge on operating control open.

15 Second post purge of flame fail during PTFI, Proving and MTFI.
Lockout on flame fail during PTFI, Proving and MTFI.
Relight operation on main flame fail.
Reset from lockout from pushbutton or line voltage.
TYPE MEP696
INTERLOCK FIRING
L1/7 AIR FLOW PURGE PERIOD L1/7
ON PROVEN COMPLETE (AUTO) OFF
8
T SELECTABLE
E 30 SECOND POST PURGE
3 PURGE 0/60 SEC
R 5/10 SEC 5 SEC 5 SEC INTERRUPTED
M SELECTABLE PILOT MTFI PILOT
I PTFI PROVING
N 4
A
L 5
S
MODULATE CONTACTS

Lockout occurs if air flow terminal 6 is not proven 10 seconds into purge.
Modulate contacts on daughter board change state 1 second into Auto.
22

TYPE MEP697
INTERLOCK FIRING
L1/7 AIR FLOW PURGE PERIOD L1/7
ON PROVEN COMPLETE (AUTO) OFF
8
T SELECTABLE
R 3 PURGE
5/10 SEC 5 SEC 5 SEC INTERRUPTED
M SELECTABLE PILOT MTFI PILOT
I PTFI PROVING
N 4
A
L 5
S
MODULATE CONTACTS

Lockout on air flow switch opening while main flame energized.
Recycle/Non-recycle dipswitch controls lockout on air flow switch not closing 10 seconds into
purge.
Modulate contacts on daughter board change state 5 seconds into Auto.
OPTIONAL PLUG-IN BOARDS

Description
A family of optional plug-in boards are available separately for the MicroM chassis to provide
remote reset, remote alpha-numeric display and serial communications as a stand alone or in combi-
nation. Refer to ORDERING INFORMATION for MicroM Chassis types for units that have pre-
installed functions.
FIGURE 4. PLUG -IN BOARD LOCATION AND INSTALLATION

PLUG-IN BOARD
(MED SERIES) STANDOFF
RELEASE
DIRECTION
Installation
WARNING: Remove power when servicing the control.
For upgrading standard units or for replacing the installed plug-in board, grasp plug-in board at the
top and pull away from the chassis, freeing the unit from the retaining standoff. Lift plug-in board up
and away from connector located on chassis board. Guide new plug-in board into the same connector
and push onto standoff.
23

Function
Any MicroM chassis type with the appropriate plug-in board installed provides remote reset capabil-
ities in the event of a lockout condition. A remote reset switch consists of a dry contact such as a
remote momentary push-button wired to the two (2) terminals located on the plug-in board as shown
in Figure 5. The reset switch will also force the MicroM to recycle if depressed and released during
the purge or run period.
A plug-in board (MED8) is pre-installed in the MEC320TS chassis to provide local reset, remote
alpha-numeric display, serial communications and normally closed relays.
FIGURE 5. REMOTE RESET
RELAY CONTACTS
REMOTE DISPLAY
RJ45 JACK
REMOTE DISPLAY
(-) RJ45 JACK
REMOTE RESET
(+)
B SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
B SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS A (RS485)
A (RS485)
MED8 - Normally Closed
MED9 - Normally Open
(used only with MEP696/MEP697)
CAUTION: Remote reset is recommended only on a control solely for proved ignition pro-
gramming (pilot ignited burner) or a control for use only with applications in which
unburned fuel cannot accumulate and that is intended for installation in inaccessible loca-
tions such as open-flame, ceiling-suspended gas heaters. The remote reset location must be
within sight and sound of the fired equipment.
ADVANCED RESET FUNCTIONS

Multiple functions have been integrated into the reset push button located on the MicroM and pro-
vided by way of the remote reset terminals. Among these are reset/recycle, reset from lockout only,
recycle only and set unit address. The functions of the switch is determined by the length of time
the push button is depressed and released.
The MicroM allows the connection of the remote resets to be connected together, usually in a multi-
burner system where multiple MicroM’s are mounted in a common panel. The reset push button
located on the MicroM daughter board is in parallel with the remote reset terminals when provided
by the other MED daughter boards.
Normal Operation
If the push button is depressed and released for greater than 1/2 second but less than 3 seconds, the
MicroM will either reset if in lockout, or shutdown and revert back to the start of the cycle. If the
MicroM is in the Idle state, this action will cause the LED’s to sequence from the bottom to top and
serves as a LED test.
Smart Reset
If the push button is depressed and released greater than 3 seconds but less than 5 seconds, the
24

MicroM will reset from the lockout state only. This is especially useful where, through the use of
remote reset daughter boards, all reset inputs can be connected together to a common reset pushbut-
ton or intelligent device (PLC). If the push button is depressed as described above it will only cause
the unit that is in lockout to reset and not effect any other units.
Smart Recycle
If the push button is depressed and released greater than 5 seconds but less than 7 seconds, all con-
nected MicroM units will recycle back to the beginning of purge. All units that are in lockout will
remain in lockout.
Address Mode
If the unit is in the Idle or Standby mode and the push button is depressed and released for greater
than 10 seconds, the unit address of the MicroM will be displayed on the LED’s in a binary format.
The range of the address is 0 to 31 and is used for Modbus or E500 communications. Because the
default address is 0 and since address 0 would mean no LED’s would be lit; the ALARM LED is
made to flash when the address is 0. The OP CTRL LED is the least significant bit while the FLAME
relay is the most significant bit. The ALARM LED is used to indicate if the address is greater than or
less than 16. If the ALARM LED is flashing, the address is less than 16 and conversely if the
ALARM LED is solid, the unit address is greater than 16. This only applies to the address. To incre-
ment the address on the control, depress and release the RESET push button and observe the LED
pattern. If the RESET switch is untouched for 30 seconds, the current address displayed will be
stored to memory and the MicroM will automatically exit the address mode.
LED BINARY VALVE
OP CNTRL ❍ 1
INTRLCK ❍ 2
PTFI ❍ 4
FLAME ❍ 8
ALARM ❍ 16
The ALARM LED flashes for addresses less than 16.
The ALARM LED is solid for addresses greater than 15.
REMOTE DISPLAY
The MicroM provides an interface to the optional ED510 display module. The ED510 connects to
the MicroM through the plug-in board using a ED580 cable. The ED580 cable is available in 2, 4, or
8 foot lengths. Part number 129-145 -1 (4 ft.), -2 (8 ft.), -3 (2 ft.) is available for remote mounting the
ED510 Display Module and to provide NEMA 4 protection.
The ED510 Display Module is a backlit, 2 line by 16 character LCD display with keypad to provide
both current operation and historical information of the MicroM. The ED510 contains a keypad con-
sisting of three push keys, SCRL, RESET and MODE. Remote reset is available through the ED510
Keypad.
The ED510 displays current burner status, first out annunciation in the event of a lockout condition,
historical burner information, detailed lockout information of the last six (6) lockout conditions and
programmer configuration information. Through the display the ability to program the unit address
for communications, as well as resetting the stored information (cycles, hours, and lockouts) to zero
is provided.
Depending on the information being displayed, data is displayed on the ED510 screen in the follow-
ing locations:
25

OPERATING STATUS TIMING

(Standby, Purge, PTFI, (During Purge or PTFI) OR
Auto, etc.) FLAME SIGNAL STRENGTH
(During PTFI, MTFI, or Auto)
PURGE 00:05
STARTING BURNER
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ON OPERATING STATUS
(Flame Signal Strength, Cause of current Lockout, etc.) OR
ARROW displayed when
BURNER HISTORY (SCRL key required) MODE key is required to
(Burner Cycles, Burner Lockouts, etc.) OR access sub-menus
(Lockout, History, Program
SUB-MENU HEADINGS (SCRL and MODE keys required) Setup, etc.)
(Lockout History, Program Setup, etc.
At any time the MicroM is powered, the SCRL key is used to scroll through and display the total
number burner hours, burner cycles, burner lockouts and system hours on the bottom line of the
ED510 display. The top line will continue to show the current run mode of the control (e.g. PURGE,
AUTO, etc.) Following the historical information, the SCRL key will display three (3) sub-menus
providing the following information and/or functions:
— Lockout History (with burner cycle and burner hour time stamp).
— Program Setup (to display programmer type, purge timing, switch configuration, etc.)
— System Information (values of average pilot and main flame signal, and reset burner his-
tory).
The system sub-menus require the MODE key to gain access to the information associated with each
sub-menu. An arrow is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the display to indicate a system
sub-menu is available. Once within the sub-menu, pressing the SCRL key displays the next item
within the sub-menu, and pressing the MODE key will exit the sub-menu and return the display to
the top of the main menu.
AUTO 40 Number of burner operating hours. (Terminal #5 energized).

BNR HOURS 673
AUTO 40 Number of burner cycles.

BNR CYCLES 2784
Number of burner lockouts.

AUTO 40
BNR LOCKOUTS 21
Number of hours the control has been powered.

AUTO 40
SYS HOURS 1386
AUTO 40 Sub-menu to display the cause of the last 6 lockouts. The MODE key is required to
LOCKOUT HISTORY display the actual lockouts.
Sub-menu to display various operating parameters of the programmer and ampli-

AUTO 40 fier. The MODE key is required to enter the sub-menu.
PROGRAM SETUP
Sub-menu to display information pertaining to the operation of the control. The

AUTO 40 MODE key is required to enter the sub-menu
SYSTEM INFO
26

LOCKOUT HISTORY
The sub-menu “LOCKOUT HISTORY” will display the last six (6) lockouts, along with the burner
cycle and burner hour when the lockout occurred. When the MODE key is pressed, the screen will
display the most recent lockout condition and the number of that lockout (e.g. LO #127 represents
the 127th lockout of that control). The SCRL key will display the Burner Hour, followed by the
Burner Cycle when the lockout occurred. The SCRL key will advance to the next lockout, and repeat
the sequence listed above. The MODE key will exit the sub-menu.
PRESS SCREEN DISPLAYS DESCRIPTION

SCRL AUTO 45 Scrolling through the historical information.
LOCKOUT HISTORY
MODE LO #127 PTFI The latest (most recent) lockout condition. This is the 127th lockout of
FLAME FAIL the control. History indicates the lockout occurred during PTFI.
SCRL LO #127 PTFI The last lockout occurred after 136 hours of burner operation.
@ BNR HOURS 136
SCRL LO #127 PTFI The last lockout occurred at burner cycle 744.
@ BNR CYCLE 744
SCRL LO #126 PURGE The second latest lockout condition. This is the 126th lockout of the con-
AIR FLOW OPEN trol. History indicates the lockout occurred during purge.
MODE AUTO 45 Screen has returned to the normal run message.
FLAME SIGNAL
PROGRAM SETUP
The sub-menu “PROGRAM SETUP” allows the user to review the various operational settings of
the programmer module (e.g. programmer type, purge timing, etc.). The MODE key is used to enter
the “PROGRAM SETUP” sub-menu, and the SCRL key is used to advance through the sub-menu.
MODE AUTO 45 Programmer Type is an MEP230.

PROGRAMR MEP230
SCRL AUTO 45 Software Engineering code of the programmer module is code 5.

ENGR CODE NO. 5
SCRL AUTO 45 Amplifier module is an EUV1 or an ERT1.

AMP. TYPE= MEUV
SCRL AUTO 45 Flame Failure Response Time (FFRT) is 3 seconds.

FLAME FAIL TIME = 3s
SCRL AUTO 45 Purge timing (selected by the dipswitches) is 7 seconds.

PURGE TIME = 7s
SCRL AUTO 45 Prove 7-6 open to start is disabled (selected by dipswitches).

PROVE 7-6 OPEN = N
SCRL AUTO 45 Post purge time is 0 seconds (selected by dipswitches).

POST PURGE = 0s
SCRL AUTO 45 Control recycles on flame fail (selected by dipswitches).
TYPE RECYCLE
SCRL AUTO Unit Address is 00. Refer to section on communications.
27

UNIT ADDRESS 00
SCRL PRESS RESET TO Force storage of dipswitch settings before 8 hours time-out.
ACCEPT SETTINGS
MODE AUTO 45 Mode key returns to normal run message.
SYSTEM INFO
The sub-menu “SYSTEM INFO” allows the user to review information pertaining to the operation of
the control (e.g. average main flame signal strength, status of the high fire and low fire end switches,
etc.). The MODE key is used to enter the “SYSTEM INFO” sub-menu, and the SCRL key is used to
advance.
Press Screen Displays Description
SCRL AUTO 45 SCRL key advances through the historical information until
SYSTEM INFO > “System Info” is displayed. Pressing and releasing
the MODE Key enters the sub-menu.
MODE AUTO 45 The average flame signal strength of the pilot flame = 22
AVG. PILOT FLM 22
SCRL AUTO 45 The average flame signal strength of the main flame = 40.
AVG. MAIN FLM 40
SCRL PRESS RESET TO Historical data will be cleared to 0. Must be done while
CLEAR HISTORY terminal I-7 is open.
MODE AUTO 45 Mode key returns to run message.

FLAME SIGNAL
COMMUNICATIONS
The protocol to be used is Modbus RTU. This is implemented by the master (PC, PLC, etc.) issuing a
poll to the slave (MicroM) and the slave responding with the appropriate message.
A typical format of a poll request is as follows:
DST FNC ADR ADR DAT DAT CRC CRC
HI LO HI LO LO HI
DST refers to the logical address of the slave set but using reset pushbutton or ED510.
FNC is the function being requested. FNC 03 is a read request.
ADR is the message number or register number of the data being requested. In Modbus, register
addresses begin at 40001 but is interpreted as address 00.
DAT is the number of words being requested. A word is an integer consisting of 2 bytes.
The normal response from a slave is as follows:
DST FNC DBC DATA…. CRC CRC
Hi/Lo LO HI
DBC is the data byte count being returned. It must be two times the DAT number from the poll
request.
DATA is the data returned and is always a series of 2 byte integers. If 4 words were requested then
DBC would be 8 and there would be 8 data bytes or 4 data words containing the requested data.
28

The format of the data is 4800, N, 8, 1 meaning 4800 baud, no parity, and 1 stop bit.
Below is a table of currently available messages provided by the MicroM programmers, followed by
a description where necessary.
MESSAGE WORDS RESPONSE VALUE

ADDRESS REQUESTED
00 1-6 STATUS 83 (053H) = RUN;
202 (0CAH) = LOCKOUT
01 1 MSGN Current message being displayed (see Table 3)
02 1 GSTAT Defines Timer Type
03 1 TIMER Time, Flame, Address
04 1 FLAME Flame Signal
05 1-3 LOGSTAT Current logic module, PURGE, PTFI, AUTO (See
Table 1)
06 1 INPUTS Input limits state
07 1 OUTPUTS Output relays state
08 2, 4 or 8 SYSMINS System on minutes
10 2 or 4 BNRMINS Burner on minutes
12 2 CYCLES Completed Burner Cycles
14 1 LOCKOUT COUNT Stored Lockout Count
15 1-6 LOCKOUT HISTORY Last 6 Lockouts, first word is most current lock-
out
21 1-2 DEVTYP Programmer device type, 5=EP, 6=EPD,
7=MicroM
22 1 AMPTYP Amplifier Type;
MECD=080H;
MEUV=090H;
MEIR=0A0H;
MERT=0B0H;
MEUVS=0C0H
23 1 PROGTYP Programmer Type (See Table 2)
24 2 FLAME SIGNAL PTFI and Auto Flame Signal Averages
AVERAGES
26 1-9 Combined Status See Description Below
35 6 Most Recent Lockout Data
41 6 2nd Most Recent Lockout
Data Returns complete lockout description of stored
lockout history. Includes lockout message,
47 6 3rd Most Recent Lockout lockout module, @ burner hours, and @ burner
Data
cycles
53 6 4th Most Recent Lockout
Data
Data
Data
Messages 00, 05, 08, 10, 15, 21 and 26 are unique in that a limited number of successive registers
can be combined with these requests. For example, a request to message 00 can contain up to 6 data
words. The response to this would contain STATUS, MSGN, GSTAT, TIMER, FLAME and LOG-
STAT. If the requested data word count (DAT) were to be 2 then the response would contain STA-
TUS and MSGN only. Message 15, last 6 lockouts, can return data ranging from 1 to 6, with 1
referring to the most recent lockout.
29

Message 26 returns the current operating status as well as stored burner hours and burner cycles as a
snapshot of the entire MicroM system. When all 9 words are requested, the data returned consists of
STATUS, MSGN, FLAME, INPUTS, OUTPUTS, BNRMINS, and BNRCYCS.
The MSGN being transmitted is a numerical value and must be interpreted by the communicating
device, which actually is an advantage since this can be made to be whatever message text the end
user wants. In other words, it allows for programming custom messages without actually changing
the message in the programmer.
The MicroM stores its burner on time (Terminal 5 powered) and system on time (L1 powered) in
minutes. Internally, the programmer converts this to hours for display purposes, however the result is
rounded down. The information being supplied by Modbus will be the actual time in minutes and it
is up to the communicating device to do the conversion. Since the maximum value stored in the
MicroM is 9,999,999 minutes, the maximum value in hex therefore, is 98967FH and comprises of
two data words. The maximum cycle count is 999,999 decimal or 0F423FH, still two data words. As
an example, the System on Minutes data is transmitted from the MicroM to the interface as high
word / low word as shown below:
MESSAGE ADDRESS 8 MESSAGE ADDRESS 9

HIGH WORD LOW WORD
HIGH BYTE LOW BYTE HIGH BYTE LOW BYTE
0 98H 96H 7FH
Note: Data from address 9 cannot be accessed directly.

All values are represented in a HEX or base 16 format.
GSTAT determines the type of value TIMER represents. TIMER can be a running timer such as is
used in purge, a flame signal or meaningless. Only the lower nibble of GSTAT has any value. If this
value is 0 then the TIMER value has no meaning. The value in TIMER is a background minute timer
in the MicroM and should be ignored. If GSTAT is between 4 and 7, the TIMER represents the cur-
rent value flame signal. If GSTAT is a 1, 2, or 3 then TIMER represents a running timer value.
The baud rate of the MicroM is fixed at 4800 bits per second. The format of the data is 8 data bits, no
parity and 1 stop bit. Due to the RS485 format, the communication format is considered half-duplex.
That is, only one user is permitted on the communication lines at a time.
The information contained in INPUTS and OUTPUTS represents the status of the interlocks and
relays respectively. For the INPUTS, a 1 in the interlock position defines the interlock as being on or
energize where the 1 in any bit position in the OUTPUT register signifies the relay as being ener-
gized.
INPUTS
Term 5 Term 3 Term 6 Term 7

Reset Scrl Mode RF Pilot Intrlck OpCntrl Ref
Reset, Scrl and Mode represent the keypad located on the ED510 display. A ‘0’ in any of these posi-
tions indicates the switch is depressed. A ‘1’ in the opto-coupler position indicates the opto-coupler
is on or interlock closed.
OUTPUTS
Term 8 Term A Term 3 Term 5 Term 4

N/A N/A N/A Blower Alarm Pilot Main Fuel MTFI
A ‘1’ in any terminal position indicates the relay is energized. Term 4 indicates the state of K1 relay,
located in the MEP500 series programmers.
30

It is suggested that repeated polling interval not be less than 200 mSec per request. Requesting
data such as burner minutes, system minutes and burner cycles be kept at a minimum due to
the amount of processing time required to gather that data.
Table 1: Logic Dispatch
LOGIC DISPATCHER
VALUE MicroM
HEX DEC
45H 69 MPOSTIDLE
46H 70 MPREPURGE1
47H 71 MPURGE
48H 72 MTFI
49H 73 MSTABLE
4AH 74 MTFMF
4BH 75 MAUTO
4CH 76 MSHTDWN1
4DH 77 MSHTDWN2
4EH 78 MIDLE
Logstat represents the current software module the Flame-Monitor is currently executing. They are
named as close to the logic module the actual burner sequence is in. For instance, in the Flame-Mon-
itor, MPURGE represents High Fire Purge where MPOSTPURGE represents low fire start purge.
MSHUTDWN1 represents the post purge period after a complete cycle or the cool down period after
a lockout.
MIDLE or STANDBY is the period of time where the operating control is open or the control is in
lockout waiting for reset. On instances of false flame during the purge period, the control algorithm
forces the control back to STANDBY until false flame ceases or lockout occurs.
MPREPURGE1 is the period of time prior to PURGE where the control checks the status of the air
flow interlocks or in the case of the Flame-Monitor, high fire proving switch (D-8). If found open,
the control will remain in this state until the respective switch closes or lockout occurs.
MTFI represents the pilot ignition stage of a burner sequence. MTFMF represents the main trial for
ignition period where main fuel is introduced along with pilot.
MAUTO is the run period of the burner sequence.
MPOSTIDLE and MSHTDWN2 are small periods of time where certain internal tests are conducted
and general cleanup before and after a cycle is performed.
PROGTYP is represented by 1 data word. The upper byte identifies the family and the lower byte
represents the programmer type within the family. The data represented by PROGTYP can be used
to guard against the wrong programmer being installed in a system.
31

Table 2: Program Module Identification
Programmer Module Identifier

MEP100 0H, 01H
MEP101 0H, 02H
MEP102 0H, 03H
MEP103 0H, 04H
MEP100P 0H, 05H
MEP109 0H, 06H
MEP130 0H, 08H
MEP104 0H, 09H
MEP105 0H, 0AH
MEP106 0H, 0BH
MEP107 0H, 0CH
MEP108 0H, 0DH
MEP230 1H, 01H

MEP230H 1H, 02H
MEP235 1H, 04H
MEP236 1H, 05H
MEP290 1H, 06H
MEP238 1H, 09H
MEP237 1H, 0AH
MEP560 2H, 01H

MEP561 2H, 02H
MEP562 2H, 03H
MEP536 2H, 04H
MEP537 2H, 05H
MEP300 0H, 01H

MEP304 0H, 09H
MEP397 0H, 0DH
32

Table 3: Message Description
DEC HEX MicroM Message

1 1 L1-7 OPEN
2 2 FALSE FLAME
3 3 STARTING BURNER
4 4
5 5 INTRLCK OPEN
6 6 LOCKOUT LINE FREQUENCY NOISE DETECTED
7 7 LOCKOUT FLAME FAIL - PTFI
8 8 UNIT ADDRESS
9 9 MTFI
10 0AH IGNITION TIMING
11 0BH
12 0CH FLAME SIGNAL
13 0DH CYCLE COMPLETE
14 0EH OFF
16 10H LOCKOUT AMPLIFIER HIGH COUNT FAIL

19 13H LOCKOUT FLAME FAIL – MTFI
20 14H LOCKOUT FALSE FLAME – STANDBY
21 15H LOCKOUT INTRLCK OPEN
22 16H LOCKOUT INTRLCK CLOSED
23 17H INTRLCK CLOSED (PROVING AIR FLOW OPEN AT START)
24 18H LOCKOUT OPTO FAILURE
30 1EH FALSE FLAME
37 25H LOCKOUT FLAME FAIL - AUTO
39 27H FUEL VALVE STATE CHANGE
40 28H AIR FLOW CLOSED
49 31H LOCKOUT FLAME FAIL - PTFI
54 36H LOCKOUT CHECK CHASSIS
55 37H LOCKOUT CHECK PROGRAMMER
56 38H LOCKOUT CHECK AMPLIFIER
58 3AH LOCKOUT AMPLIFIER AUTO CHECK FAIL
59 3BH LOCKOUT CHECK BLOWN FUSE
76 4CH LOCKOUT CHECK SCANNER
Addressing Modes
For communication in a multi-burner or multi-control environment, each MicroM must have a
unique address. The range of address allowed within the MicroM is 0 to 31 allowing for a possible
32 units to be connected in a single multi-drop node. As shipped the default address is 0. The address
of the MicroM may be set using two methods. Using the ED510 display, it is necessary is SCRL to
the PROGRAM SETUP menu and enter that submenu with the MODE key. SCRL down until the
display indicates UNIT ADDRESS with the actual address of the MicroM being displayed on the top
33

line of the display. Pressing and releasing the RESET key will cause the address to increment. The
address after 31 is 0. The second method is to use the local reset located on the plug-in board. It is
first necessary to open the operating control (L1-7) to have the MicroM in the IDLE or STANDBY
position. Depressing the reset switch for greater than 10 seconds will cause the address of the
MicroM to be displayed in a binary format on the LEDs located on the programmer board. Because
the default is address 0, and since address 0 would mean no LEDs would be lit; the ALARM LED is
made to flash when the address is 0. The OP CTRL LED is the least significant bit while the
ALARM relay is the most significant bit. To increment the address counter, depress and release the
RESET push button and observe the LED pattern. If the RESET switch is untouched for 30 seconds
the current address displayed will be stored to memory and the MicroM will automatically exit the
address mode.
TEST JACK VOLTAGE

For all amplifiers, the MicroM provides a uniform 0-10 volt signal to represent the flame signal
strength. A signal reading greater than 4 volts is considered sufficient to provide reliable operation.
This same signal is also available in a numerical format on the ED510 display. The chart below cor-
relates the test jack voltage to the numerical value. The signal clamps at 10 volts at a numerical value
greater than 42 and the numerical value clamps at 80.
10
7
TEST JACK VOLTAGE
0
6 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 60 80
AMPLIFIER TEST JACK VOLTAGE VS. ED510 DISPLAY BOARD
34

EXTERNAL METER CONNECTIONS

The test jacks are located on the amplifier card. If external access is desired for a panel meter the
shown below will assist you in locating the position to drill through on the front cover. The hole
sizes should be large enough to accommodate the body of the meter probes. The tests accept meter
probes up to .080” or 2mm diameter.
2.963
2 31/32 ADDING HOLES IN COVER TO ACCESS TEST JACKS
1.759
1 3/4
3.134
3 1/8
RECOMMEND
5/16” TO 3/8” HOLES
TO ACCOMMODATE
METER PROBES

INSTALLATION TESTING
Use of Test Meter (All Controls)
Testing the Fireye MicroM Controls requires the use of a test AC/DC multimeter, with a minimum
1000 ohm/volt AC scale and 20,000 ohm/volt DC scale.
With the test meter on the DC scale, and the test meter leads inserted into the test jacks on the ampli-
fier (Red for positive (+) polarity, Black for minus (-) polarity), a DC voltage reading of 4.0 to 10
volts for all amplifier types should be obtained when the control is detecting flame and 0 volts when
no flame is present. Wildly fluctuating readings are an indication of an unstable flame or flame sen-
sor requiring maintenance. Inadequate flame signal may be improved by:
1. Assuring that the flame detector and wiring installations have followed the instructions begin-
ning on page 46.
2. Assuring that the flame detector is clean and within the ambient temperature limits.
3. Assuring that the flame is sufficiently large to detect.
4. Assuring that the flame quality (fuel to air ratio, combustion air velocity) is satisfactory.
5. Trying a shorter sight pipe or increasing the sight pipe diameter. (The burner manufacturer
should be consulted before mechanical changes are made).
When using a flame rectification amplifier, a micro-ammeter may be connected in series with the
wire to Terminal S2. Normal flame will produce a meter reading between 4 and 10 micro-amps.
With the test meter on the AC scale, line and load voltages may be measured at the identified test
points on the chassis.
WARNING: Before making a pilot flame test, manually shut off the fuel supply to the main
burner.
Normal Pilot Flame Test (Programmers with Run/Check Switch)

1. At pilot trial for ignition (PTFI) place the Run/Check switch in the Check position.
2. During the pilot flame test and adjustment period, if flame is not detected within 30 seconds, the
control will lock out and require manual reset to initiate another cycle.
35

3. Observe the pilot flame signal on the test meter or the ED510 display. If the flame signal is
below 4.0 volts DC or a reading of 10 on a remote display, re-adjust the pilot flame or realign
the flame detector.
WARNING: DO NOT TOUCH a flame rectification rod with power applied.
4. When using UV detection, a test is required to verify that UV radiation from the ignition spark
is not being detected. To accomplish this, manually shut off both the pilot and main fuels. Initi-
ate a normal start-up. Observe the test meter which should read no more than 1/2 volt DC. If
higher levels are observed, realign the UV scanner, and/or shield the spark from the scanner’s
view.
5. Move the Run/Check switch to the Run position, check pilot flame response time by manually
shutting off the pilot fuel and initiate a normal start-up. With no pilot flame present, the control
will de-energize the pilot assembly at the end of the trial for ignition interval (selectable by
dipswitch #4) and go into safety shutdown.
WARNING: The minimum pilot test must be accomplished by a trained and qualified
burner technician.
Minimum Pilot Test

This test assures that the flame detector will not sense a pilot flame too small to light a the main
flame reliably. It must be made on every new installation as well as following the repositioning or
replacement of the flame detector. This procedure should not be used on a direct spark burner.
1. Manually shut off the fuel to the main burner.
2. Place the Run/Check switch in the Check position. (MEP500 Series Programmers only).
3. Connect a test meter to the test jacks on the Amplifier Module or observe the reading on the
ED510 display.
4. Initiate a normal start-up.
5. Reduce the fuel to the pilot until the DC voltmeter reads 4.0 volts. This is the minimum pilot.
For flame rectification the flame signal for minimum pilot varies depending on the application.
See WARNING below.
6. Return the Run/Check switch to the Run position (MEP500 Series Programmers only).
7. Slowly turn on the main fuel and insure the main flame lights off promptly and normally.
WARNING: If light off is delayed, shut off the power to the installation. Realign the flame
detector so a larger pilot flame is required before flame is detected. Repeat this test until
the main flame lights reliably with minimum pilot.
Flame Failure Test

1. Temporarily connect spark ignition and pilot to Terminal #3.
2. Initiate a normal start-up.
3. Manually shut off all fuel and observe the loss of flame signal on the test meter.
4. If flame signal does not reduce to zero within the flame failure response time of the control
(FFRT determined by the selection of the amplifier), verify the UV flame detector is not actu-
ated by the ignition spark. If spark is detected, a metallic shield or relocation of the UV detector
is required.
5. IMPORTANT: When the test is completed, reconnect the spark ignition to Terminal #4.
36

NO HEAT
MicroM
O.C. ON SERVICE GUIDE
TEST
JACKS
ALARM BLINKING
SITUATION #1
ALL TYPES
NORMAL LOCKOUT 4-10 VDC
INSTALL DC VOLTMETER
AMPLIFIER MODULE
IN TEST JACKS
MP100 4-7 SECONDS
SHUT FUEL MP230 PREPURGE DELAY TIME

SUPPLY COCK
DID
NO FLAME
YES
WAIT LED COME
5 ON?
MIN
PROPER
NO YES
PILOT VOLTAGE
RESET CONTROL (120V) ACROSS
3, 2
CHECK FUSE IN CHECK OUTPUT
CHASSIS YES WIRING
IS
NO HEAT PROPER
NO IGNITION YES
MAKE IT BEING VOLTAGE (120V)
CALL FOR HEAT CALLED ACROSS DID PTFI
FOR? 4, 2 NO
LED GO OFF
REPLACE CHECK OUTPUT
WIRING AFTER SUITABLE
MEC120 YES
YES DELAY?
REPLACE
PROGRAMMER
PROPER
DID NO MAIN VALVE YES YES
NO OPERATE VOLTAGE (120V)
ACROSS
SEE SITUATION CONTROL LED 5, 2
#2 COME REPLACE CHECK OUTPUT IS
ON? WIRING NO
MEC120 YES SYSTEM
RUNNING?
YES IS
NO THERE A
GOOD YES
DID FIRE?
NO
AIR FLOW MAKE
SEE SITUATION LED PROPER YES
#3 BURNER
COME
ADJUSTMENT
ON? IS REPEAT RESET
NO SCANNER
YES SITUATION #1 SUCCESSFUL
POSITION
OK?
DID ALIGN
PTFI LED YES SCANNER YES
COME ON AFTER IS
SUITABLE S1 S2
DELAY? NO WIRING &
TERM. CONTACT
PRESSURE
NO OK?
REPAIR TO RESET THE CONTROL THE CONTROL
WIRING YES
PROGRAMMER OR POWER MUST BE ON. (L1-L2)
MEC120 DEFECTIVE
IS
PROPER
VOLTAGE
ACROSS
S1 & S2
AMPLIFIER
REPLACE SCANNER
OR MEC120
DEFECTIVE
37
38
SITUATION #2 SITUATION #3 SITUATION #4
NO HEAT NO HEAT NO HEAT
O.C. ON O.C. ON
NO
LED’s
ON FLAME ON
ALARM ON
IS
IS IS
YES FLAME PRESENT
120VAC NO YES IN BURNER?
NO YES 120VAC
PRESENT
1-2 OR PRESENT
CHECK BURNER
7-2? 8-2? WIRING AND FUEL
VALVES. FLAME SHOULD NO
NOT BE THERE.
REPLACE
MEC120 IS
AMP. IS NO
FUSE NO YES NO THIS A UV
NO OKISAND CKT YES OR PRO.
BLOWER SYSTEM?
BREAKER PINS
MADE? ENGAGED ON?
REPLACE
AMPLIFIER
CHECK BLOWER YES YES
REPLACE FUSE CHECK CORRECT REPLACE SYSTEM
OR SYSTEM AMPLIFIER REMOVE
WIRING PIN PROBLEM MEC120 SCANNER
RESET BREAKER IS
OR NO IS
PROGRAMMER 120 VAC
NO FLAME LED
PINS PRESENT
6-2? ON?
IS NO
SEE
YES SITUATION #1 FLAME LED
M-Series Fuse 2AG 8 amps. YES
CHECK AIR FLOW PROGRAMMER ON?
Fireye Part Number: 23-176 SWITCH AND OR PROGRAMMER OR REPLACE
or CHECK WIRING MC120 DEFECTIVE MC120 DEFECTIVE SCANNER
Little Fuse Number: 225008 YES
REPLACE

TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS AMPLIFIER

SEE
1. Verify that there is a solid earth ground wire brought to the panel that the Fireye base is mounted to. SITUATION #1
2. In a rectification system, verify that terminal S1 is solidly earth grounded, and confirm that the flame rod is aligned so it doesn’t droop
near the ignition spark.
IS
3. Confirm that there is no measurable voltage present between the ground screw and terminal 2 (neutral). NO
FLAME LED
4. Confirm that the 120 volt AC supply has its neutral leg earth grounded at the supply, (floating isolation transformers can cause prob-
ON?
lems).
5. Confirm that the ignition transformer’s secondary winding is solidly earth grounded. The grounding method is usually through the SEE
transformer case. Dirt, paint, loose mounting hardware, etc., can all be factors. YES SITUATION #1
6. There may be a problem with transients in the main power supply. If you think this may be the problem, you may want to run a ground
PROGRAMMER OR
wire directly from the pilot assembly back to the electrical panel where the Fireye control is mounted. MEC120 DEFECTIVE

Wiring Arrangements
IMPORTANT: Use moisture resistant wire rated 90°C minimum.
CAUTION: When powered, 560 VAC across S1, S2 with MEUV4, MEUV1, MEUVS4 and
MEUVS1; 260 VAC across S1, S2 with MERT4 and MERT1.
CAUTION: Control wiring procedures which deviate from those shown in the diagrams
may bypass safety functions designed in the control. Check with the Fireye Representative
before deviating from the recommended wiring diagrams.
FIGURE 6. WIRING ARRANGEMENT FOR PILOT IGNITED BURNERS USING MEP100 AND MEP200 SERIES PROGRAMMERS
AIR FLOW
OPERATING T INTERLOCK
CONTROLS P
FLAME
SCANNER
FLAME
ROD
H
7 6 S2 S1 ONLY
KL
1 (WATCHDOG)
FLAME AMPLIFIER
120VAC F1
50/60Hz
KA KB
KF-2
2 KF-1
N
A 8 3 4 5
PV MV
ALARM BLOWER MOTOR INTERMITTENT SPARK MAIN VALVE

OR PILOT VALVE IGNITION
CONTACTOR
* For intermittent ignition, connect to terminal 3
39

FIGURE 7. WIRING ARRANGEMENT FOR PILOT IGNITED BURNERS AND PROVISION FOR MAIN FLAME STABILIZATION
USING MEP236 SERIES PROGRAMMERS
AIR FLOW
CONTROLS P
FLAME
SCANNER
FLAME
ROD
7 6 S2 S1 ONLY
H KL
(WATCHDOG)
1 FLAME AMPLIFIER
F1
120VAC
50/60Hz
KA KB
K1
2 KF-1
A 8 3 4 5
PV MV

CONTACTOR
FIGURE 8. WIRING ARRANGEMENT FOR DIRECT SPARK IGNITED BURNERS, TWO STAGE OPERATION USING MEP100
AND MEP200 SERIES PROGRAMMERS
AIR FLOW
OPERATING
CONTROL T P INTERLOCK
FLAME
SCANNER
FLAME
ROD
7 6 S2
H KL S1 ONLY
(WATCHDOG)
1 FLAME AMPLIFIER
F1
120VAC
50/60Hz
KA KB
KF-2
2 KF-1
N
A 8 3 4 5
*
MV MV
ALARM BLOWER MOTER PRIMARY SPARK SECONDARY

OR MAIN FUEL VALVE IGNITION MAIN FUEL VALVE
CONTACTOR (IF USED)
40

FIGURE 9. WIRING ARRANGEMENT FOR PILOT IGNITED BURNERS AND INTERRUPTED PILOT USING MEP500 SERIES
PROGRAMMERS
AIR FLOW
CONTROL P
FLAME
SCANNER
FLAME
ROD
7 6 S2
H KL S1 ONLY
(WATCHDOG)
1 FLAME AMPLIFIER
F1
120VAC
50/60Hz
KA KB
K1
2 KF-1
N
A 8 3 4 5
PV MV
ALARM BLOWER MOTER INTERMITTENT INTERRUPTED MAIN FUEL

OR PILOT GAS VALVE GAS PILOT VALVE VALVE
CONTACTOR AND IGNITION
TRANSFORMER
FIGURE 10. WIRING ARRANGEMENT FOR DIRECT SPARK IGNITED BURNERS AND INTERRUPTED IGNITION USING MEP500
SERIES PROGRAMMERS
AIR FLOW
CONTROL P
FLAME
SCANNER
FLAME
ROD
7 6 S2 S1 ONLY
H KL
1 (WATCHDOG)
FLAME AMPLIFIER
120VAC F1
50/60Hz
KA KB
K1
2 KF-1
N
A 8 3 4 5
PV MV
ALARM BLOWER MOTOR PRIMARY SPARK SECONDARY

OR MAIN FUEL VALVE IGNITION MAIN FUEL VALVE
CONTACTOR (IF USED)
41

FIGURE 11. WIRING ARRANGEMENT FOR FLAME SWITCHES USING MEP100 PROGRAMMERS
ENABLE/DISABLE
INPUT
FLAME
SCANNER
FLAME
ROD
7 6 S2 S1 ONLY
H KL
(WATCHDOG)
1 FLAME AMPLIFIER
F1
120VAC
50/60Hz
KA KB
KF-2
2 KF-1
N
A 8 3 4 5
ISOLATED SWITCHED
OUTPUTS
V REFER TO LOAD RATING
VOLTAGE
SOURCE
* FUSE F1 CAN BE REMOVED
NOTE: Air Flow LED will blink while flame is detected and KF relay is energized.
FIGURE 12. WIRING ARRANGEMENT FOR PILOT IGNITED BURNERS USING MEP300, MEP400 AND MEP600 SERIES
PROGRAMMERS.
AIR FLOW
CONTROL P
FLAME
SCANNER
FLAME
ROD
7 6 S2 S1 ONLY
H KL
1 (WATCHDOG)
FLAME AMPLIFIER
MODULATE CONTACTS F1
120VAC LOCATED ON
50/60Hz MED8/MED9
KA KB DAUGHTER BOARD KP
KI
2 KF
N
A 8 3 4 5
CONTROLLED BY
MEP696/MEP697
ONLY
PV MV
ALARM BLOWER MOTOR PILOT VALVE SPARK MAIN FUEL VALVE

OR IGNITION
CONTACTOR
42

FIGURE 13. ALTERNATE WIRING ARRANGEMENT FOR MEP CONTROLS
A. FOR MANUAL
S1
A START-STOP STATION MAY BE ADDED TO REQUIRE

OPERATOR START-UP EACH TIME THE BURNER FIRES. S2
3 PILOT
VALVE
5 MAIN
FUEL VALVE
4 IGNITION
HOT
1
START
ON-OFF
STOP
7 LIMIT SW
LR-2
BLOWER ALARM
LR-1
OR
CONTACTOR 8
2
NEUTRAL
AIR FLOW A
SWITCH
6 LATCH
RELAY COIL
FIRST STAGE SECOND STAGE
B. MULTIPLE BURNER SYSTEMS S1 S1 MAIN GAS VALVE
S2 S2 G
3 PILOT 3 PILOT
GAS VALVE GAS VALVE
MANUAL RESET
5 5 MAIN GAS VALVE
NEUTRAL HOT
4 IGNITION 4 IGNITION
1 1
START
STOP ALARM
LIMIT 7 7
SWITCH RA S.P.D.T.
LR-1
BLOWER 8 LATCH 8 ALARM SILENCE
OR RELAY SWITCH
CONTACTOR
2 2
A R A R
AIR FLOW 6 6
SWITCH
MULTIPLE BURNER SYSTEMS UTILIZING SEMI-AUTOMATIC OPERATION INCORPORATE THE FIREYE MODULAR MI-
CROM CONTROLS IN A CASCADING SEQUENCE WHEN PILOT #1 IS PROVEN. TRIAL FOR IGNITION FOR PILOT #2
BEGINS. WHEN ALL PILOTS ARE PROVEN THE SAFETY SHUTOFF VALVE MAY BE MANUALLY OPENED. FLAME FAILURE
OF ANY BURNER WILL TRIP THE MAIN FUEL VALVE AND SOUND ALARM.
THE TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD MUST NOT EXCEED THE RATING OF THE FIRST CONTROL.
IMPORTANT: Use moisture resistant wire rated 90°C minimum.
43

FIGURE 14. BACKWARD COMPATIBLE WIRING USING MEP100 AND MEP200 SERIES PROGRAMMERS (PILOT IGNITED
BURNERS).
AIR FLOW
CONTROL P
FLAME
SCANNER
FLAME
ROD
7 6 S2
H KL S1 ONLY
(WATCHDOG)
1 FLAME AMPLIFIER
F1
120VAC
50/60Hz
KA KB
KF-2
2 KF-1
N
A 8 3 4 5
**
PV MV

CONTACTOR

** Combined current from Terminal 8 must not exceed 9.8 Amps
FIGURE 15. BACKWARD COMPATIBLE WIRING USING MEP500 SERIES PROGRAMMERS (PILOT IGNITED BURNERS)
AIR FLOW
OPERATING T RUNNING
P INTERLOCKS INTERLOCK
CONTROL
FLAME
SCANNER
FLAME
ROD
7 6 S2 S1 ONLY
H KL
(WATCHDOG)
1 FLAME AMPLIFIER
F1
120VAC
50/60Hz
KA KB
K1
2 KF-1
N
A 8 3 4 5
**
PV MV
ALARM BLOWER MOTOR INTERMITTENT GAS PILOT VALVE MAIN FUEL

OR PILOT GAS VALVE AND IGNITION VALVE
CONTACTOR TRANSFORMER

** Combined current from Terminal 8 must not exceed 9.8 Amps
44

SUGGESTED GROUNDING RULES

The MicroM system, being microprocessor based, requires a ground system that provides a zero-
voltage reference. The voltage measured from L2 to all other terminals except L1 should be 0 volts.
1. The most effective ground is to run the ground wire in the same raceway as the hot and neutral
from the main distribution service panel (not intermediate sub-panels) to the burner control
panel and insure that this ground wire is well bonded to the control panel.
2. The wiring base of the MicroM must have earth ground providing a connection between the
sub-base and the control panel or the burner.
3. The earth ground wire must be capable of conducting the current to blow the 20A fuse in event
of an internal short circuit. A number 14 AWG copper conductor is adequate, wide straps or
brackets are preferred rather than lead wires.
4. The ground path needs to be low impedance (less than 1 ohm) to the equipment frame which in
turn needs a low impedance to earth ground. For a ground path to be low impedance at RF fre-
quencies, the connection must be made with minimum length conductors having maximum sur-
face areas.
5. All connections should be free of nonconductive coatings and protected against rust.
6. Utilizing conduit as a means of providing a ground must be avoided.
7. Installing ground rods at the burner control panel defeats the purpose of a single point ground as
described above and could also present a safety hazard.
INSTALLATION
Do not run high voltage ignition transformer wires in the same conduit with flame detection wiring.
Do not run scanner wires in a conduit with line voltage circuits.
Ensure the frame of the ignition transformer is securely connected to control panel frame or prefera-
bly the burner frame.
The MicroM chassis (MEC120) contains a transient suppressing device connected internally across
hot and neutral and then to the internal bracket. For this to be effective the chassis must be screwed
securely into the wiring subbase.
REMOTE DISPLAY
When the ED510 is to be remotely mounted on the front of the control panel, the ED580 cable must
contain a ferrite core, currently supplied by Fireye with the cable. The cable end with the ferrite core
must be mounted at the control end. High frequency currents flow more to the surface of the conduc-
tor. The 60 Hz ground system, properly designed, has sufficient low-impedance at 60 Hz to maintain
all metal surfaces at the same ground reference. But, this same system is unable to provide this at
higher frequencies, because of the increased impedance caused by the ‘skin effect’. The purpose of
the ferrite core is to provide a low-impedance at these higher frequencies and absorb this unwanted
energy.
Care must be taken not to route the ED580 cable in close proximity to any starter motor contactors
located in the control panel or across any high voltage ignition wires. Refer to Fireye bulletin E-8002
for proper installation.
45

COMMUNICATIONS
When interfacing Fireye controls to a communication system, be it an E500, PLC or other micropro-
cessor based device, ferrite cores should also be utilized. Proper twisted shielded pair cable must be
utilized. In a multi-drop system, the shields should be tied together within a cabinet and not to any
ground point. The shield at the source end of the cable of the multi-drop connection can then be ter-
minated to ground. Source end is defined as the originating end of the communication system
Care must be taken not to route communication cables in close proximity to any starter motor contac-
tors located in the control panel or across any high voltage ignition wires. Refer to Fireye bulletin E-
8002 for proper installation.
SCANNERS
The armored cable supplied with the Ultra-Violet and Infrared scanners should be connected to
equipment by means of a good mechanical connection such as a conduit fitting. It may be necessary
to utilize heat insulator (P/N 35-69) to isolate the sensing end of the scanner from boiler ground.
Care must be taken not to route the scanner cable across the high voltage ignition cable. The high
energy ignition cable should be checked periodically for cracking, connections and aging.
In applications using flame rod units and the MERT amplifier, it may be beneficial to route a separate
return wire from the S1 terminal to the flame rod assembly. This will minimize the effects of tran-
sient currents flowing into the MicroM.
In all cases, scanner wires should be routed in separate conduit and not joined with any high voltage
AC or ignition cables.
MAINTENANCE
Periodically, the spark electrode should be inspected for proper gapping and cracked ceramics. At
ignition time, the high energy from the ignition transformer will attempt to conduct to the point of
least resistance and with an improper spark gap, where the conduction takes place will no longer be
controlled.
The VA rating of the control transformer must be sized to handle the inrush currents of the pilot sole-
noid and ignition transformer at PTFI and then the inrush currents of the main fuel valve assembly at
MTFI time.
Inspect neatness of wiring in junction boxes and cabinets. It is best to have connections short and
direct and also not having wires bunched up and tied off. Also, connections should be periodically
inspected for tightness and corrosion.
INSTALLATION - UV SCANNERS
Where possible, obtain the burner manufacturer’s instructions for mounting the scanner. This infor-
mation is available for most standard burners. The scanner mounting should comply with the follow-
ing general instructions:
1. Position the UV1A, UV2 scanner within 30 inches of the flame to be monitored; the 45UV5
within 72 inches, closer if possible.
2. Select a scanner location that will remain within the ambient temperature limits of the UV Scan-
ner. If cooling is required, use an insulating coupling (Fireye P/N 35-69 for UV1A, UV2 Scan-
ners, P/N 35-127-1 for 45UV5) to reduce conducted heat.
3. The UVlA, UV2, 45UV5 Scanners are designed to seal off the sight pipe up to 1 PSI pressure.
Higher furnace pressures should be sealed off. To seal off positive furnace pressure up to 100
PSI for UV1A, UV2 Scanners, install a quartz window coupling (#60-1257) For 45UV5 Scan-
ners, use #60-1199 coupling. Add cooling air to reduce the scanner sight pipe temperature.
4. Install the scanner on a standard NPT pipe (UV1A: 1/2", UV2: 3/8", 45UV5: 1") whose position
is rigidly fixed. If the scanner mounting pipe sights through the refractory, do not extend it more
46

than halfway through. Swivel flanges are available if desired (#60-302 for UV1A, UV2 Scan-
ners, #60-1664-3 for 45UV5). The sight pipe must permit an unobstructed view of the pilot and/
or main flame, and both pilot and main flames must completely cover the scanner field of view.
SCANNER MUST HAVE UNOBSTRUCTED FLAME MUST COMPLETELY COVER

VIEW OF FLAME SIGHT OPENING
NOT THIS NOT THIS BUT THIS NOT THIS NOT THIS BUT THIS
5. Smoke or unburned combustion gases absorb ultraviolet energy. On installations with negative
pressure combustion chambers, a small hole drilled in the UV1A, UV2 sight pipe will assist in
keeping the pipe clean and free from smoke. For positive pressure furnaces, provide clean air to
pressurize the sight pipe, if necessary.
6. Two UV1A or UV2 Scanners may be installed on the burner if it is necessary to view two areas
to obtain reliable detection of the flame. They should be wired in parallel. Only one repetitive
self- checking 45UV5 Scanner may be installed on a burner.
To increase scanner sensitivity with UV1A, UV2 Scanners, a quartz lens permits location of the
scanner at twice the normal distance. Use 1/2" x 1 1/2" pipe nipple between UV1A Scanner and the
coupling. Use 3/8" pipe nipple and a 1/2" x 3/8" bushing on UV2 installations.
7. Request the assistance of any Fireye field office for recommendations of a proper scanner instal-
lation on a non-standard application.
TYPICAL SCANNER INSTALLATIONS
SCANNER
FORCED DO NOT EXTEND

CLEAN AIR MORE THAN
(FROM DISCHARGE HALF-WAY INTO
OF FAN) REFRACTORY
DO NOT EXTEND MORE THAN

HALF-WAY INTO REFRACTORY
The maximum UV signal INSULATING

from a flame is found in TUBING
the first one-third of the SEALING
UNION FORCED
visible flame taken from
AIR
the point where the flame
EXTEND SIGHTING TUBE
begins. The scanner sight 6”(152.4) OR 8”(203.2)
pipe should be aimed at
this area.
METHODS OF COOLING SCANNER
47

OPERATION — 45UV5 SELF-CHECKING UV SCANNER

Self-checking ultraviolet scanners should be used in applications where burner firing operation is
continuous or where the burner is on for long periods of time without recycling. In addition, ultra-
violet self-checking systems are mandatory in some locations.
The operation of this type of system consists of maintaining the flame scanning capability at all times
while also proving that the ultraviolet tube is firing properly. This is done periodically by mechani-
cally closing off the sight of the UV tube and checking to make sure that the flame signal goes away.
A shutter assembly in the 45UV5 scanner performs this function. The diagram below explains the
process further.
If the shutter assembly in the scanner fails, the tube is faulty, or there is insufficient power to the
scanner, the MicroM will LOCKOUT and display the following message LOCKOUT CHECK
SCANNER. The ultraviolet tube is replaceable (P/N 4-314-1).
A lockout will result if a minimum signal is detected for three consecutive shutter closed periods.
SHUTTER OPEN
3.7 SEC.
SHUTTER CLOSED 0.4 SEC. TIME
WIRING - UV SCANNERS
To connect the scanner to the control, the UV1A Scanner is supplied with 36” or 72” of flexible
cable.
The 45UV5 is supplied with four 72 inch lead wires. Install them in a suitable length of flexible
armor cable and connect it to the control. A conduit connector is supplied with the scanner. Connect
black wires (shutter) to terminals L1, L2; red wires (UV tube) to terminals S1, S2.
If it is necessary to extend the scanner wiring, the following instructions apply:
Scanner wires should be installed in a separate conduit. The wires from several scanners may be
installed in a common conduit.
1. Selection of Wire
a. Wiring: For extended scanner wiring up to 500 feet, and for shorter lengths to reduce signal
loss, use a shielded wire (Belden 8254-RG62 coaxial cable, or equal) for each scanner wire
of UV1A, UV2 and each red wire of the 45UV5. The ends of the shielding must be taped
and not grounded.
b. Asbestos insulated wire should be avoided.
c. Multiconductor cable is not recommended without prior factory approval.
2. High voltage ignition wiring should not be installed in the same conduit with flame detector
wires.
48

INSTALLATION—INFRARED SCANNER TYPE 48PT2

Where possible, obtain the burner manufacturer’s instructions for mounting the scanner, otherwise
proceed as follows:
A single scanner is used to detect both pilot and main flames. The sight pipe on which the scanner
mounts must be aimed so that the scanner sights a point at the intersection of main and pilot flames.
Proper scanner positioning must assure the following:
1. Reliable pilot flame signal.
2. Reliable main flame signal.
3. A pilot flame too short or in the wrong position to ignite the main flame reliably, must not be
detected.
4. Scanner must have an unobstructed view of flame being monitored.
5. Flame being monitored must completely cover the scanner field of view.
6. To avoid nuisance shutdowns, it is important to avoid sighting hot refractory and to keep scan-
ner temperature low (below 125° F) (50°C).
When the proper position has been established, drill a hole through the furnace wall and install a 4"
to 8" length of threaded 1/2" black iron pipe on which to mount the 48PT2 scanner.
7. When satisfactory sighting position has been confirmed by operating tests, the sight tube should
be firmly welded in place.
SCANNER MUST NOT SCANNER TARGET

ABOVE REFRACTORY
SIGHT REFRACTORY
SCANNER
LINE-OF-SIGHT
COMBUSTION
CHAMBER
CENTER LINE
MAIN OF MAIN FLAME
BURNER
PILOT
BURNER
SCANNER
SIGHTING TUBE
SCANNER
Wiring
Attach the cable supplied with the scanner to a junction box. Splice the cable wires to a pair of wires
not smaller than #l8. Install the complete run in a separate conduit to the control. Continuous con-
duit bonding between scanner and the control is mandatory! Scanner may be located up to 100
feet from control. Do not pass scanner wiring through any junction box containing other wires. Do
not run other wires through scanner conduit. Asbestos insulated wire should be avoided.
Keeping the Scanner Cool
The Infrared Scanner (Temperature Limit 125° F) should never get too hot to grasp comfortably in
the hand. Keep the scanner cool by one or more of the following methods.
1. Use 6" to 8" length of pipe between scanner and hot furnace front plate.
2. Use insulating tube (P/N 35-69) on the end of the iron pipe.
3. Force air into sighting tube. Use Fireye Sealing Union (P/N 60-801).
4. Make sure sighting tube does not extend more than halfway into refractory wall.
49

INSTALLATION - 69NDl FLAME ROD

The 69NDl flame rod proves a gas pilot flame and/or main gas flame. It is a spark plug type unit con-
sisting of 1/2" NPT mount, a KANTHAL flame rod, a glazed porcelain insulating rod holder and a
spark plug connector for making electrical connections. The 69ND1 is available in 12", 18" or 24"
lengths.
The flame rod may be located to monitor only the gas pilot flame or both the gas pilot and main gas
flames. It is mounted on a 1/2" NPT coupling.
The following instructions should be observed:
1. Keep flame rod as short as possible.
2. Keep flame rod at least 1/2" from any refractory.
3. Flame rod should enter the pilot flame from the side so as to safely prove an adequate pilot
flame under all draft conditions.
4. If the flame is nonluminous (air and gas mixed before burning), the electrode tip should extend
at least 1/2" into the flame, but not more than halfway through.
WRONG POSITION
OF ROD
INADEQUATE FLAME
CORRECT
POSITION
OF ROD
PILOT BURNER
CORRECT POSITION
OF PILOT FLAME
5. If the flame is partly luminous, the electrode tip should extend only to the edge of the flame. It is
not necessary to maintain absolutely uninterrupted contact with the flame.
6. It is preferable to angle the rod downward to minimize the effect of sagging and to prevent it
from coming in contact with any object.
7. An adequate grounding surface for the flame must be provided. The grounding surface in actual
contact with the flame must be at least four times greater than the area of the portion of the flame
rod in contact with the flame. It is essential to adjust the flame rod and ground area ratio to pro-
vide a maximum signal reading.
NOTE: Interference from the ignition spark can alter the true signal reading by adding to, or sub-
tracting from it. This trend sometimes may be reversed by interchanging the primary wires (line volt-
age) to the ignition transformer. This interference can also be reduced by the addition of grounded
shielding between the flame rod and ignition spark.
8. Proven types of flame grounding adapters, as shown below, may be used to provide adequate
grounding surface. High temperature stainless steel should be used to minimize the effect of
metal oxidation. This assembly may be welded directly over the pilot or main burner nozzle.
BOMB FIN GROUNDING ASSEMBLY THREADED ROD ASSEMBLY
50

MAINTENANCE
Type 48PT2 Infrared and Type UV1A, UV2 and 45UV5 Ultraviolet Scanners
The viewing area of the scanner must be kept clean. Even a small amount of contamination will
reduce the flame signal reaching the detector by a measurable amount. Wipe the viewing area rou-
tinely using a soft cloth dampened with concentrated detergent.
— Type 48PT2 Scanners include a replaceable #4-263-1 Firetron cell.
— Type 45UV5 Scanners include a replaceable #4-314-1 UV tube.
Type 69ND1 Flame Rod

The flame rod and its insulator should be kept clean by washing routinely with soap and water. Rods
should be routinely replaced as they oxidize.
Flame Signal Strength

Routine observation of the flame signal strength will forewarn any deterioration in the capability of
the flame detector or its application.
Contacts
There are no accessible contacts in the MicroM. Where contacts are used, their design assures long
trouble-free life when the load circuits are maintained within the published load ratings.
Humidity
In areas of high humidity, the control chassis should be removed and placed in a dry atmosphere
when the system is expected to be out of service for an extended period.
Periodic Safety Check

It is recommended that a procedure be established to test the complete flame safeguard system at
least once a month. This test should verify the proper operation of all limit switches and safety inter-
locks as well as flame failure protection and fuel safety shutoff valve tightness.
Rotation
It is recommended that control and scanner units purchased as spares be installed periodically to
ensure proper operation.
51

FIGURE 16. Mounting 45UV5 Scanner
#60-1664 #60-1664
1” SWIVEL MOUNT AIR ENTRY APERTURE 1” SWIVEL MOUNT
#35-127 (PURGE AND #53-121
HEAT INSULATING NIPPLE COOLING)
2.75”
(70)
STANDARD MOUNTING RETAINER

#34-181
FOR TYPES OF SCANNERS
#60-1664 AIR/ENTRY
1” SWIVEL MOUNT (PURGE ABD COOLING) PURGE AIR ENTRY
#35-127 #35-127
HEAT INSULATING NIPPLE HEAT INSULATING NIPPLE
2.75”
(70)
MOUNTING FOR HIGH TEMP. APPLICATIONS
AIR ENTRY
(PURGE AND
1” SIGHT PIPE COOLING)
(BY OTHERS)
ALTERNATE STANDARD MOUNTING

(NOT ADJUSTABLE)
#60-1664 AIR/ENTRY
1” SWIVEL MOUNT (PURGE AND COOLING) #60-1199-1, 2 3/8” PLUG
#35-127 #35-127 #35-127 (BY OTHERS)
HEAT INSULATING NIPPLE HEAT INSULATING NIPPLE HEAT INSULATING NIPPLE
2.75”
(70)
MOUNTING FOR SPECIAL SEALING COUPLING WITH QUARTZ

APPLICATIONS — HIGH TEMP. WINDOW. REQUIRED WHEN SCANNER
LENS IS EXPOSED TO EXCESSIVE
FURNACE OR WINDBOX PRESSURE
FIGURE 17. UV8A Scanner

2 1/4” 1/2 X 14 ST. 2.53”
(57.2mm) PIPE (64.3mm)
1 1/2”
(38.1MM)
UV8A UV1A3 3 FT. TC-ER CABLE
1 IN. DIA. 1.06 IN DIA
(25.4mm) (27.0mm) UV1A6 6 FT. TC-ER CABLE
.700 DIA. FITTING (17.8mm)
SHIELDING OF 6 FT. (1830mm)
FOR WATER-TIGHT CONDUIT
LEADS IS REQUIRED
WARNING: The leads from the UV8A Scanner to the control must be shielded to prevent electrical
noise from generating a false flame signal to the control.
52

FIGURE 18. Mounting UV1A/UV1B Scanners
BURNER FRONT PLATE

1/2” UV SCANNER
1/2” SWIVEL MOUNT 1/2” SWIVEL MOUNT
TYPE UV-1A
#60-302 #60-302 HEAT INSULATOR
#35-69
1/2” NIPPLE 1/2” NIPPLE
2” 2”
(51) (51)
STANDARD MOUNTING MOUNTING WITH HEAT INSULATING NIPPLE
1/2” SWIVEL MOUNT AIR/ENTRY

#60-302 (PURGE ABD COOLING)
1/2” NIPPLE 1/2” NIPPLE 1/2” SIGHT PIPE
2”
(51)
TEE-PIECE
STANDARD MOUNTING WITH PURGING/COOLING AIR
1/2” SWIVEL MOUNT UNION COUPLING

AIR/ENTRY #60-1257 WITH QUARTZ WINDOW
#60-302 (PURGE AND COOLING) #60-1290 WITH QUARTZ LENS
1/2” NIPPLE 1/2” NIPPLE 1/2” NIPPLE
2”
(51)
TEE-PIECE
MOUNTING FOR EXCESSIVE FURNACE OR WINDBOX

PRESSURE WITH PURGING/COOLING AIR
53

M-SERIES TO M-SERIES II TO MICROM CROSS REFERENCE LISTING
M-SERIES M-SERIES II REPLACEMENT MODULES MicroM REPLACEMENT MODULES

Part Chassis Amplifier Programme Programmer Chassis Amplifier Programmer Programmer
Number r Dipswitch #8 Dipswitch #6
UVM1D MC120 MAUV1T MP100 N/A MEC120 MEUV1 MEP100 N/A
UVM1F MC120 MAUV1 MP100 N/A MEC120 MEUV4 MEP100 N/A
TFM1D MC120 MART1T MP100 See Note #1 MEC120 MERT1 MEP100 N/A
TFM1F MC120 MART1 MP100 See Note #1 MEC120 MERT4 MEP100 N/A
UVM2 MC120 MAUV1 MP230 OFF MEC120 MEUV4 MEP230 C
TFM2 MC120 MART1 MP230 OFF MEC120 MERT4 MEP230 C
UVM3 MC120 MAUV1 MP230 ON MEC120 MEUV4 MEP230 O
TFM3 MC120 MART1 MP230 ON MEC120 MERT4 MEP230 O
UVM3H MC120 MAUV1 MP230H ON MEC120 MEUV4 MEP230H O
TFM3H MC120 MART1 MP230H ON MEC120 MERT4 MEP230H O
UVM5 MC120 MAUV1 MP560 ON MEC120 MEUV4 MEP560 O
UVM6 MC120 MAUV1 MP560 See Note #2 MEC120 MEUV4 MEP560 C
- N/A — Not Applicable - N/A — Not Applicable
- Programmer Dipswitches apply to MP230H, and MP560 only. - Programmer Dipswitches apply to MEP200, and MEP500
- Dipswitch #8 sets Recycle / Non-Recycle Operation. Series Programmers
- MP560 Programmer Module has “Check-Run” Switch. - Dipswitch #6 sets Recycle / Non-Recycle Operation.
- Note #1: For Standing Pilot, clip out red jumper on MP100. (O = Non-Recycle, C = Recycle)
- Note #2: Dipswitch #8 ON when red jumper of UVM6 is clipped. - MEP500 Series Programmer Module has “Check-Run”
Switch
.
PURGE PTFI M-Series II PROGRAMMER DIPSWITCH SETTINGS MicroM PROGRAMMER DIPSWITCH

SETTINGS
TIME TIME #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #1 #2 #4
7 5 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF C C C
7 5 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF C C C
30 5 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF O C C
7 10 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON C C 0
90 5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF O O C
30 10 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON O C O
60 10 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON C O 0
90 10 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON O O 0
- Dipswitches #1 through #5 set Purge Timing - Dipswitches #1 through #2 set
- Dipswitches #6 and #7 set TFI Timing Purge Timing
- Dipswitch #4 sets TFI Timing
M-SERIES TIMING CARDS PURGE TIME PTFI TIME

MT55 5 5
MT74 7 4
MT304 30 4
MT710 7 10
MT904 90 4
MT3010 30 10
MT6010 60 10
MT9010 90 10
54

55

NOTICE
When Fireye products are combined with equipment manufactured by others and/or integrated into
systems designed or manufactured by others, the Fireye warranty, as stated in its General Terms and
Conditions of Sale, pertains only to the Fireye products and not to any other equipment or to the com-
bined system or its overall performance.
WARRANTIES
FIREYE guarantees for one year from the date of installation or 18 months from date of manufacture
of its products to replace, or, at its option, to repair any product or part thereof (except lamps and pho-
tocells) which is found defective in material or workmanship or which otherwise fails to conform to
the description of the product on the face of its sales order. THE FOREGOING IS IN LIEU OF
ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND FIREYE MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANT-
ABILITY OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. Except as specifically
stated in these general terms and conditions of sale, remedies with respect to any product or part num-
ber manufactured or sold by Fireye shall be limited exclusively to the right to replacement or repair as
above provided. In no event shall Fireye be liable for consequential or special damages of any nature
that may arise in connection with such product or part.
 FIREYE MC-5000
3 Manchester Road MARCH 28, 2013
Derry, New Hampshire 03038 USA Supersedes June 27, 2011
www.fireye.com
BULLETIN 129-130
7D
PARKER BOILER CO. SOLENOID TYPE FUEL GAS VALVES
UL Listed Solenoid Gas Valves may be furnished on Parker Boilers as Main or Pilot Gas Line Safety Shutoff Fuel Valves.
Solenoid Gas Valves used for Safety Shutoff service are of the normally closed (N.C.) type; that is, they are closed to fuel flow
until the coil is energized. Solenoid Valves of the Normally Open (N.O.) type may be furnished as Fuel Vent Valves when
required by Insurance Company Standards. These N.O. Valves are open to flow until the coil is energized.
CAUTION: Normally Open Vent Valves must be piped outdoors to a safe point of discharge in compliance with Local Codes
and Manufacture's Installation Instructions. Never use a Normally Closed Valve in place of a Normally Open
Valve on a fuel vent line. Never use a Normally Open Valve in place of a Normally Closed Shutoff Valve on a
Main or Pilot Gas Line.
WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW FUEL TO ACCUMULATE IN COMBUSTION CHAMBER. IF FUEL IS ALLOWED TO ENTER
THE CHAMBER FOR LONGER THAN A FEW SECONDS WITHOUT IGNITING, AN EXPLOSIVE MIXTURE
COULD RESULT.
CHECKOUT & SERVICING:
CAUTION:
1. Only qualified service technicians should attempt to service or repair gas valves, flame safeguard controls or burner
systems.
2. Use utmost care during troubleshooting. Line voltage is present right at electrical terminations of most valves and in all
controller circuits. Always open Main Line Disconnect Switch and depressurize valve before replacing or repairing valve.
3. Close all manual fuel shutoff valves if any trouble occurs.
4. Parker Boiler furnishes solenoid gas valves with the piping in a horizontal position and the solenoid vertical and upright.
Do not alter this positioning.
5. Do not attempt to service or replace the valve without reading the valve manufactures exact service bulletin and safety
warnings provided with specific valve.
6. Periodic inspection and leak testing of valve required. Organize a maintenance schedule based on environment and
frequency of use, but no less frequently than monthly. Observe operation through several complete cycles to be sure the
valve is functioning properly and shuts off with all safety and limit controls.
TROUBLESHOOTING:
During normal operation when the solenoid coil is energized, a Normally Closed Solenoid Valve will open and a Normally
Open Solenoid Vent Valve, if furnished, will close. Most solenoid will make an audible noise when they are energized. If
valve coil fails to energize, check for blown fuses, circuit breakers, loose connections and for a complete circuit through the
boiler safety, limit and operating controls to the valve electrical terminations. With power at valve terminations check for open-
circuited coil. Replacement coils are available for most solenoids however, failure of the coil may indicate other problems.
Unless it is certain valve is otherwise in perfect operating condition, it is better to replace entire valve. Solenoids are designed
for continuous duty service. When energized for long periods of time the solenoid housing becomes hot and can be touched
by hand only for an instant. This is a safe operating temperature. The smoke and odor of burning coil insulation will indicate
any excessive temperature.
If valve fails to open or close properly, first check that gas flow is in direction shown on valve and that inlet pressure to valve is
within rating shown on valve [Parker Boiler maximum ½ PSI (14" W.C.) on natural gas and 1 PSI (27.7" W.C.) on L.P. gas]. If
valve still fails to open or close properly or is noisy or sluggish in operation, replace valve.
WARNING:
INTERNAL REPAIR OF VALVES REQUIRES PERFORMING SEAT LEAKAGE, EXTERNAL LEAKAGE, AND
OPERATIONAL TESTS ON THE VALVE WITH A NON-HAZARDOUS, NONCOMBUSTIBLE FLUID AFTER DISASSEMBLY
AND RE-ASSEMBLY. IMPROPER ASSEMBLY OR DAMAGE TO INTERNAL COMPONENTS COULD CAUSE THE
VALVE TO STICK IN UNSAFE POSITION. PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE COULD RESULT. ALWAYS
REPLACE INOPERATIVE OR DAMAGED VALVES WITH A NEW VALVE OR HAVE THE VALVE REPAIRED BY
ORIGINAL VALVE MANUFACTURER.
When replacing valve, make certain the new valve is correct one for service with correct pressure and electrical ratings.
Always pipe valve in direction of flow shown on valve. Apply pipe compound sparingly to male pipe threads only. If applied to
valve threads the compound may enter the valve and cause operational difficulty. Avoid pipe strain by properly supporting
and aligning piping. When tightening the pipe, do not use valve or solenoid as a lever. Locate wrenches applied to valve
body or piping as close as possible to connection point. A drip leg is required to be installed upstream of all boiler gas
controls by the installer. In addition, where fuel conditions or Code require it, a strainer or filter suitable for the service should
be installed upstream. Always leak test a new valve and operate through several complete cycles to be certain valve
functions properly.
B129-130.doc
133-MTR
9A
PARKER BOILER CO.
MOTORIZED FUEL GAS VALVES
UL Listed Motorized Gas Valves may be furnished on
Parker Boilers as Main Line Safety Shutoff Fuel Valves.
These valves are of the normally closed type and provide a
minimum 5 PSI closing force as required by many
insurance companies. They use a separate fluid power
actuator assembly to drive the valve body open and may
be for either Off-On or High-low operation. For High-low
operation a valve body with a characterized guide is
required. A Proof of Closure Switch (P.O.C.) may also be
furnished to meet valve-closed indication requirements.
WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW FUEL TO ACCUMULATE

IN COMBUSTION CHAMBER. IF FUEL IS ALLOWED
TO ENTER THE CHAMBER FOR LONGER THAN A FEW
SECONDS WITHOUT IGNITING, AN EXPLOSIVE
MIXTURE COULD RESULT.
CHECKOUT & SERVICING:

FIG. 1 - TYPICAL AH2B FIG. 2 - TYPICAL V4055
CAUTION:
1. Only qualified service technicians should attempt to service or repair gas valves, flame safeguard controls or burner systems.
2. Use utmost care during troubleshooting. Line voltage is present right at electrical terminations of valve actuators and in all
controller circuits. Always open Main Line Disconnect Switch and depressurize valve before replacing or repairing valve.
3. Close all manual fuel shutoff valves if any trouble occurs.
4. Parker Boiler furnishes gas valves with the piping in a horizontal position and the actuator vertical and upright. Do not alter this
positioning.
5. Do not attempt to service or replace the valve without reading the valve manufacturers exact service bulletin and safety warnings
provided with specific valve.
6. Periodic inspection and leak testing of valve is required. Organize a maintenance schedule based on environment and frequency of
use, but no less frequently than monthly. Observe operation through several complete cycles to be sure the valve is functioning
properly and shuts off with all safety and limit controls.
WARNING: ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD. TO AVOID SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR PROPERTY DAMAGE DUE
TO ELECTRICAL SHOCK, TURN OFF POWER SUPPLY PRIOR TO SERVICING ACTUATOR.
WARNING: SHOCK, FIRE, OR EXPLOSION HAZARD. SERVICING POWERED ACTUATORS COULD CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL
INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE. TURN OFF ELECTRICAL POWER AND PURGE INTERCONNECTED PIPING OF
COMBUSTIBLE GASES BEFORE SERVICING ACTUATOR.
TROUBLESHOOTING:
During normal operation when the actuator is energized hydraulic fluid is pumped, causing the actuator stem to extend, opening the
valve. While in the open position the actuator pump may engage periodically to maintain pressure. De-energizing actuator retracts
stem, allowing valve to close. Valve "Open" or "Closed" position indicators are located on sides of actuator. If actuator fails to energize,
check for blown fuses, circuit breakers, loose connections and a complete circuit through the boiler safety, limit and operating controls
to the actuator electrical terminations. When a Proof of Closure Switch (Valve Closed Indication Switch) is furnished, this switch must
be closed before a circuit can be completed through the Electronic Flame Safeguard. If, with power at correct electrical terminals,
actuator stem still fails to extend replace actuator. Except for auxiliary switches, actuators are Not Repairable. To replace actuator,
disconnect all electrical power and gas, disconnect wiring from actuator and loosen set screws at base. Always use manufacturers
exact replacement actuator by checking complete part number. Always operate through several complete cycles to be certain actuator
and valve function properly.
If the valve body fails to open or close properly, first check that gas flow is in direction shown on valve and that inlet pressure to valve is
within rating shown on valve [Parker Boiler maximum 1/2 PSI (14" W.C.) on natural gas and 1 PSI (27.7" W.C.) on L.P. gas]. If valve
still fails to open or close properly or is noisy or sluggish in operation, replace valve.
WARNING: INTERNAL REPAIR OF VALVES REQUIRES PERFORMING SEAT LEAKAGE, EXTERNAL LEAKAGE, AND
OPERATIONAL TESTS ON THE VALVE WITH A NON-HAZARDOUS, NON-COMBUSTIBLE FLUID AFTER DISASSEMBLY AND
REASSEMBLY. IMPROPER ASSEMBLY OR DAMAGE TO INTERNAL COMPONENTS COULD CAUSE VALVE TO STICK IN
UNSAFE POSITION. PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE COULD RESULT. ALWAYS REPLACE INOPERATIVE OR
DAMAGED VALVES WITH A NEW VALVE OR HAVE VALVE REPAIRED BY ORIGINAL VALVE MANUFACTURER.
When replacing valve, make certain new valve is correct one for service with correct pressure. Always pipe valve in direction of flow
shown on valve. Apply pipe compound sparingly to male pipe threads only. If applied to valve threads the compound may enter the
valve and cause operational difficulty. Avoid pipe strain by properly supporting and aligning piping. When tightening the pipe, do not
use valve as a lever. Locate wrenches applied to valve body or piping as close as possible to connection point. A drip leg is required to
be installed upstream of all boiler gas controls by the installer. In addition, where fuel conditions or Code require it, a strainer or filter
suitable for the service should be installed upstream. Always leak test a new valve and operate through several complete cycles to be
certain valve functions properly.
133-MTR
9A
WARNING: FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING COULD RESULT IN DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY
AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE:
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE. DO NOT TOUCH ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS WHILE ACTUATOR IS

SUPPLIED WITH POWER, EXCEPT WITH INSULATED TOOLS, UNDER DRY CONDITIONS, AND ONLY
AS INSTRUCTED HEREIN.
COMBUSTIBLE/TOXIC GAS. IF THE LOW-FIRE POSITION IS SET TOO LOW, THE FLAME MAY BLOW
OUT, CAUSING A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS BUILD-UP OF GAS. VERIFY THAT FLAME IS STABLE
IN LOW-FIRE POSITION, AND THAT A FLAME SAFEGUARD DEVICE IS INSTALLED.
SETTING OF HIGH-LOW MOTORIZED GAS VALVE:
WARNING: IMPROPER SETTING OF LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT MAY CAUSE UNSAFE LIGHT-OFF OR
COMBUSTION, PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE COULD RESULT.
Minimum low fire setting on Parker Atmospheric gas fired boilers is: 1" W.C. on Natural Gas, 11" W.C. on L.P. Gas.
Minimum low fire setting on power burners must be individually set by competent burner service technicians.
When installing a replacement High-low Actuator, always make sure low fire setting is initially in maximum position.
LOW FIRE ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONS:
A. Shutoff gas and install accurate gas gauge at manifold

(gauge) test plug.
B. Disconnect all electric power and remove electrical
compartment cover.
C. Disconnect high fire wire and carefully secure end, (terminal
#3 of Honeywell V4062; terminal #8 of General Controls
AH4). If boiler is equipped with "low-automatic" switch this
step can be omitted by setting switch in "Low" position.
D. Turn on boiler to low fire position and check gas pressure.
Turn OFF power and adjust as follows:
1. HONEYWELL V4062:
a. Manually rotate cam-dial assembly downward so set-
screw is accessible from front of actuator.
b. Loosen set-screw on the low fire cam using the special
wrench taped to the electrical cover plate.
c. Move cam toward Max. or Min. setting, as required, no FIG. 3 - TYPICAL V4062 ARRANGEMENT
more than one mark at a time. Tighten set-screw.
d. Fire boiler and recheck low fire gas pressure. Turn off
power and repeat step "C" and "D" until setting is
correct.
e. With setting correct, cycle boiler 5 or 6 times to check
repeatability of setting. Turn off power and reconnect
high fire wire to terminal #3. Retape special wrench to
electrical cover and replace cover.
2. GENERAL CONTROLS AH4B WITH POTENTIOMETER:

a. With power off, carefully insert an insulated screwdriver
through the hole provided in the barrier, and rotate the
potentiometer R18 (clockwise to increase and
counterclockwise to decrease the low fire setting) a
small increment at a time.
b. Fire boiler and recheck low fire gas pressure. Turn off
power and repeat above step until setting is correct.
c. With setting correct, cycle boiler 5 or 6 times to check
repeatability of setting. Turn off power, reconnect high
fire wire to terminal #8 and replace electrical cover.
FIG. 4 - TYPICAL AH4B ARRANGEMENT
d. For older model General Controls AH4, without
potentiometer, consult factory.
133-MTR.DOC
Technical Instructions
Document No. 155-754
SKP75…U..
July 1, 2005
SKP Series
SKP75…U.. Air/Gas Ratio Controlling
Gas Valve Actuator with Safety Shutoff
Function
Only when assembled to Series VG… Gas valves

Description SKP75… pressure regulating electro-hydraulic actuators are used in combination with
VG… series gas valve bodies to provide shut-off and air/gas ratio control for industrial
and commercial burner applications.
The SKP75… controls the burner manifold gas pressure as a function of the
combustion air pressure without the need for an additional constant gas pressure
regulator.
Since three functions: safety shut-off, constant pressure regulation, and air/gas ratio
control can be performed by a single valve, fewer gas train components and fittings are
required. This significantly reduces both the size and weight of the gas train. In
addition, smaller diameter gas valves can be used.
The compact SKP75… actuator opens slowly and closes immediately when power is
interrupted. The modular design allows the SKP75… to be used in combination with all
VG… series gas valves bodies from 1/2-inch to 6-inch in size. The actuator is easily
mounted on the square flange of any VG… valve with four pre-mounted screws. A
visible position indicator on the front of the actuator displays the entire stroke of the
valve. A light indicates when the actuator is powered.
Features • UL listed, FM approved, CGA and AGA certified, IRI approvable, ISO 9001
certified; European, Australian and Japanese approved versions available.
• Safety shut-off function, pressure regulating function and air/gas ratio control in one
compact unit.
• Proof of Closure with Over Travel (POC) versions are available.
• Optional NEMA 4 protection.
• Simplifies commissioning and reduces start-up time.
• Maintains air/gas ratio when the airflow is disrupted.
• Automatic compensation for combustion chamber back pressure fluctuations.
• No mechanical wear or play that causes drifting.
Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.

Technical Instructions SKP75…U.. Air/Gas Ratio Controlling Actuators
July 1, 2005
Features, Continued • Compensation for air temperature fluctuations.

• Visual position indication.
• "Power on" indication light
• Quick connect wiring terminals
• Optional adjustable auxiliary switch available.
• Excellent tracking characteristic.
o
• Modular design with 360 actuator rotation for easy field wiring and installation.
• Low, 13.5 VA power consumption.
Application SKP75… series actuators can be combined with 1/2-inch to 6-inch VG… series gas
valve bodies. VG… series gas valves must be ordered separately (See
VG…U...Technical Instructions, P/N 155-512P25).
If the combustion air pressure exceeds the permissible value of 12” or 20” w.c. (See
Specifications), the pressure must be reduced by means of a pressure reducing
T-fitting (See Figure 4, AGA78).
Product Numbers Table 1.

1 Operating Voltage Proof of Auxiliary Type of Switch
Product Number
Closure 2
2
Switch
Switch
SKP75.011U1 x – SPDT
SKP75.012U1 110 to 120 Vac x x SPDT SPDT
SKP75.013U1 – –
SKP75.012U2 x x SPDT SPDT
220 to 240 Vac
SKP75.013U2 – –
1. European, CE certified models are available (see data sheet 7643).
2. Proof of closure and auxiliary switches cannot be field installed.
Accessories
Table 2.
Product Number Description
AGA66 Sealing gasket to provide NEMA 3, 3R, and 4 protection (for VGG…/VGD…valves)
AGA78 Air pressure reducing T-fitting
Specifications As safety shut-off valve UL/429, FM/7400, ANSI Z21.21/CGA6.5 C/I

Agency marks apply only for SKPxx.xxxU actuators
Agency approvals assembled with VGxxx.xxxU series gas valve bodies.
Power supply Operating voltage 110 to 120 Vac +10%-15%

220 to 240 Vac +10%-15%
Operating frequency 50 to 60 Hz +6%
Power consumption 13.5 VA
Duty cycle Continuous
Page 2 Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.

SKP75…U.. Air/Gas Ratio Controlling Actuators Technical Instructions
July 1, 2005
Specifications, Ambient operating temperature 5°F to 140°F (-15°C to 60°C)

Continued Mounting position Any position except upside down
o o
Maximum temperature of air and flue 140 F (60 C)
Operating environment gas at the control connections
Maximum inlet gas pressure Same as VG… valve
Physical characteristics Weight 5.1 lb (2.3 kg)
Enclosure NEMA 1, 2, 5 and 12 for indoor use
NEMA 3, 3R, and 4 with optional AGA66 gasket
Dimensions See Figure 7
Specification for valve bodies See gas valve Technical Instructions
P/N 155-512P25
Connections Conduit connection Two 1/2-inch NPSM threaded knock-outs
Electrical connection Spring loaded terminals for 14 AWG wires
Gas/air pressure connections 1/4" NPT (see installation notes)
Gas pressure test connection Hose barb with close-off screw
Combustion chamber pressure test Hose barb with close-off screw
connection
Operating Output force 100 lb (450 N)
characteristics Maximum stroke 1 inch (26 mm)
Opening time for maximum stroke Varies with valve size, 14 seconds for max.
stroke.
Closing time <0.8 seconds
Control signal Reference input signal Combustion air pressure
Control characteristic Integral action
Operation/installation Setting range of gas to air pressure ratio 0.4:1 to 9:1
Permissible pressures
during operation for accurate control Min. air presssure: 0.2" w.c.
Max. air pressure: with Pg/Pa <2; 20" w.c.
Max. air pressure: with Pg/Pa >2; 12" w.c.
with higher air pressures use AGA78
Min. downstream gas pressure: 0.4" w.c.
Max. downstream gas pressure: 40" w.c.
Minimum time required for high to low
fire load changes 5 seconds
Maximum sensing line pressure 20 psi
Maximum sensing line vacuum 3 psi
Minimum diameter of sensing lines 1/4" inside diameter
Minimum distance between gas
sensing line and gas
valve outlet 5 times the pipe diameter
Auxiliary features Proof of closure switch Non-adjustable
Capacity of auxiliary switch 6A/250 Vac resistive; 3A/120 Vac pilot duty
Setting range of auxiliary switch 40% to 100% of stroke
Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Page 3

July 1, 2005
Operation The electro-hydraulic actuator consists of a cylinder filled with oil, a piston containing an
electric oscillating pump and a relief system. When power is supplied to the actuator the
(See Figure 1)
relief system closes, and the pump moves oil from the reservoir into the pressure
chamber. This action causes the piston to move downward in the cylinder, opening the
Safety Shut-off Function gas valve. When power to the actuator is interrupted, the relief system opens and the gas
valve closes in less than 0.8 seconds.
A position indicator, visible through the transparent portion of the terminal cover, shows
the entire stroke range of the actuator. A light, which is visible through the lower left
transparent portion of the terminal cover, indicates when the actuator receives power. An
optional, non-adjustable SPDT proof of closure over travel switch signals the closed
position after the gas valve has closed. An optional SPDT auxiliary switch is adjustable
between 40% and 100% of the stroke. The adjustment screw and scale are located on the
right side in the terminal box, and are visible through the transparent portion of the
terminal cover.
Figure 1. SKP75… Operation.

Regulating Function During the burner pre-purge period, when the gas valve is closed, only the air pressure
acts on the regulator. This causes the air diaphragm to move to the left and close the
regulating hydraulic bypass valve. When the actuator is powered, the gas valve begins
to open. The downstream gas pressure immediately begins to increase until the
downstream gas pressure is in balance with the air pressure (in accordance with the
pressure ratio adjusted on the regulator). The bypass valve is now partially open so that
the oil flow supplied by the pump is identical to the return flow.
If, for example, heat demand increases, the air damper would open further increasing
the air pressure. The air diaphragm would move to the left, causing the bypass valve to
close and the gas valve to open further. The opening of the gas valve increases the
downstream gas pressure moving the gas diaphragm to the right until balance is
restored and the flow supplied by the pump is once again identical to the return flow
through the regulator bypass. Unlike conventional direct acting regulators the SKP75…
servo operated regulating system displays virtually zero droop (offset) across the
turndown range.

July 1, 2005
Regulating The gas to air pressure ratio is adjustable from 0.4:1 to 9:1. The setting is visible through a
Function, window in the regulator. Once set, the gas to air pressure ratio remains constant over the
Continued entire output range. The gas to air flow ratio will remain constant (if the cross sections of the
air and gas orifices in the burner head are fixed). The SKP75… is not recommended for use
with burners incorporating a sliding/continuously adjustable head arrangement.
Many burner designs, because of reduced mixing energy at the low fire level, require
increased excess air at low fire in order to maintain optimum combustion parameters. To
accommodate this requirement the SKP75… incorporates a bias adjustment, which allows
the characteristic of the regulator to be displaced either towards excess air or reduced air.
NOTE: To avoid oscillation, do not oversize the VG… valve body. (See Technical
Instructions 155-512P25.)
Installation WARNING:
• Personal injury or loss of life may occur if procedures are not followed as
specified.
• All installations must be performed by qualified personnel only.
• Do not pull the actuator shaft.
• If minimum gas pressure detection is required, the pressure switch must be
mounted upstream of the regulating gas valve to ensure sufficient gas
pressure before starting the burner. If maximum gas pressure detection is
required, the pressure switch must be mounted downstream of the valve.
• Air proving safety devices normally required to guarantee minimum airflow
must also be provided when using the SKP75...
• The gas pressure sensing line connection must be flush with the inner wall
of the gas pipe in order to sense turbulence free pressure. The gas sensing
line connection should be located at least five pipe diameters downstream
of the valve, elbow, coupling, or other flow disturbing fitting. Do not use the
taps on the valve body for the gas sensing line connection since
these locations typically have strong turbulence. The pressure sensing
line should be as short as possible to allow the regulator to react to sudden
changes.
• The sensing line for the combustion chamber pressure (if needed) must be
installed so that condensing flue gases cannot enter into the regulator but
run back into the combustion chamber. If necessary, a water separator
must be installed.
• All pressure sensing lines must be at least 1/4-inch inside diameter. For air
to gas pressure ratios over three, the air and combustion pressure sensing
lines must be at least 3/8” inside diameter.
• The AGA66 gasket must be installed between the actuator and the gas
valve body to provide NEMA 3, 3R, and 4 protection rating for VGG… and
VGD… valves.
• The SKP75… does not work in installations with negative air pressure
unless a higher negative chamber pressure is connected to the regulator.

July 1, 2005
Installation, • The SKP75… actuator is directly coupled to the VG… series valve body by four pre-
Continued mounted. 4 mm Allen key screws.
o
• The square mounting flange can be rotated in steps of 90 to provide four different
mounting positions. The SKP75… actuator can be mounted in any position with the
diaphragms vertical, except upside down.
• The actuator can be mounted or replaced while the valve body is under pressure.
• The SKP75… actuator has two knock-outs for the installation of 1/2”-14 NPSM conduit
connections.
• When conduit routing is connected, flexible conduit must be used.
• Liquid tight conduit must be used in combination with AGA66 to provide NEMA 3, 3R,
and 4 protection.
• The terminal marked GND, located above the wiring terminals, must be connected to the
electrical ground.
NOTE: Wiring must meet all relevant electrical codes.
1 Adjustment and indication of the gas-to-air ratio

2 Adjustment and indication of the bias
3 Connection for the combustion chamber pressure sensing line
4 Connection for the gas pressure sensing line
5 Connection for the air pressure sensing line
6 Position indication (on the front).
Figure 2. Connections and Adjustments.
Start-up The pressure ratio and bias adjustment screws are located on top of the regulator under a
sealable cover plate. The actual settings can be seen through windows on each side of the
Regulator (See regulator.
Figures 2 and 3)
NOTE: The burner capacity is controlled by the position of the air damper. The
combustion quality (air/gas ratio) is controlled by the settings on the regulator (the
+ and – indications relate to the change in gas flow). Adjustment in clockwise
direction decreases the gas flow.

July 1, 2005
Start-up, 1. Set the gas-to-air ratio to the desired value using adjusting screw 1 (coarse setting).
Continued
2. Start the burner and run it at approximately 90% of full capacity.
3. Measure CO2 or O2 content in the flue gases and correct the ratio by adjusting screw 1
until optimum values are obtained (fine setting).
4. Return to low fire and measure the CO2 or O2 content in the flue gases. If necessary,
correct the setting by adjusting screw 2 until optimum values are obtained.
5. Limit the damper position for low fire operation. If considerable bias adjustment was
necessary to achieve optimum combustion, repeat the procedure from Step 3.
6. Run the burner to the required high fire position and limit the air damper position.
7. Check the flue gas values at several intermediate output levels. If corrections are
necessary, note the following:
• Adjust the pressure ratio screw 1 at high fire operation only.
• Adjust the bias screw 2 at low fire operation only.
If the air pressure exceeds the maximum value of 12” or 20” w.c. (See Specifications), the
pressure must be reduced with a pressure reducing T-fitting (AGA78).
Figure 3. Adjustments.
WARNING:
When firing at maximum burner capacity, ensure that the SKP75… /VG… is
not in the fully open position. If this is the case, either the gas valve is sized too
small or the gas supply pressure is too low.
Wiring and Switch • The actuator is equipped with spring-loaded wiring terminals for 14 AWG wires.
Adjustment • Insert one wire into the opening of the terminal while pressing the lever downward
with a screwdriver or hard object. Make sure that all strands insert into the opening.
• The actuator has two line and two neutral terminals.
• Adjust the auxiliary switch (if provided) according to the wiring diagram on the label
below the terminals (see figure 6). The adjustment screw and scale are located on the
right side of the terminal box, and are visible through the transparent portion of the
terminal cover.
NOTES: 1. The auxiliary switch is adjustable between 40% and 100% of the stroke. The
factory setting is at 40%.
2. The auxiliary switch must not be used for proof of closure detection or other
safety interlock functions.
3. The Proof of Closure Switch is non-adjustable.

July 1, 2005
Service There are no serviceable parts on the SKP75… series actuators. If inoperative, replace
the actuator. Tag wires before servicing.
Pressure Reducing
T-Fitting AGA78
Figure 4. AGA78 Operation. Figure 5. AGA78 Adjustments.
Function The air is blown out continuously into the atmosphere through the restrictor D2. The air
undergoes a drop in pressure across the restrictor D1. The relationships are shown in the
diagram (Figure 5).
Example: Given p1 = 70 mbar, D1 = 1.5 mm, D2 = 1.7 mm
Find: Pressure signal P2 for SKP70…
P2 = 26 mbar
Reducing T-fitting AGA78 is supplied ready for mounting, complete with D1 = 1.5 mm and
D2 = 1.7 mm. An additional restrictor D2 with a diameter of 2 mm is included with the
actuator.
Terminal
Designations
GAS0049R1
SKP75.012U… SKP75.011U… SKP75.013U..
Figure 6. Terminal Designations.

July 1, 2005
Dimensions
(Dimensions in inches;
millimeters in
parentheses.)
1.41
(36)
4.96 1.10
(126) (28)
2.28 PRESSURE TEST
(58) PORTS (QTY 2)
1/4"-18 NPT
0.35" (8.5) O.D.
1.97 FEMALE
(50) (QTY 2)
1.30
(33)
1.02
(26)
1/4" - 18
FEMALE
10.87 9.45
(240) 9.52
(276) (242)
7.95
1/2"-14 6.61 (202)
NPSM (168)
7.40 3.15
(188) (80)
3.82
(97)
GAS0056R1
2.16
(55)
3.39 SQUARE 3.20
(86) (81)
Figure 7. SKP75…U.. Dimensions.
Information in this publication is based on current specifications. The company reserves the right to make changes in specifications and models as
design improvements are introduced. Other product or company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
© 2005 Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Your feedback is important to us. If you have Document No. 155-754
1000 Deerfield Parkway comments about this document, please send Country of Origin: US
Buffalo Grove, IL 60089-4513 them to SBT_technical.editor@siemens.com Page 9
U.S.A.
Technical Instructions
Document No. 155-512P25
VG…U
Rev. 3, March, 2002
VG Series
VGD…, VGF…, VGG…, VGH… Gas Valves for
Use with Electro-hydraulic Actuators SKP…
GAS0039R1
VGG… VGF… VGH… VGD20… VGD40…
Description The spring loaded, normally closed VG… series of modular single and double-body gas
valves combined with SKP… Series Electro-hydraulic Actuators to provide safety shut-
off, gas pressure regulation and air/gas ratio control for commercial and industrial gas
burners.
Table 1. Legend.
Model Numbers Body Style Connection
VGD… Double Threaded or flanged
VGF… Single Flanged
VGG… Single Threaded
VGH… Single Flanged
Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.

Technical Instructions VG Series Gas Valves for Use with Electro-hydraulic
Document Number 155-512P25 Actuators SKP…
Rev. 3, March, 2002
Features • UL listed, FM approved, CSA certified, IRI approvable, ISO 9001 certified. European,
Australian and Japanese approved versions available.
All Models
• Inlet and outlet 1/4-inch NPT plugged pressure taps standard on all models. Additional
plugged taps provided on some models (See Table 2 for details).
• 3/4-inch NPT plugged port for pilot or vent line connection available on VGG…, VGF… and
VGH… valves. One-inch NPT plugged port for pilot or vent line connection available on
VGD20… Connection plates for vent line connection available on VGD40… valves (See
Table 2).
VGG… and • Dual stem guides ensure precise disc alignment and tight shut-off.
VGF… Models
• Contoured valve disc provides smooth release of gas and stable regulating control.
• Easy to service stainless steel mesh filter protects the valve seat and disc as well as
downstream components.
VGD20… • Compact VGD20… double-valve bodies consist of two safety shut-off valves in series. The
Models first (inlet) valve has a flat valve disc applicable for safety shut-off function only. The second
(outlet) valve has a contoured valve disc for use with pressure regulating actuators
(SKP20…, SKP50…, SKP70…).
• Easy to service stainless steel mesh filter in the inlet valve protects the valve seats and discs
as well as downstream components.
• One-inch NPT vent connection between the valves.
• For installation, each VGD20… double valve requires two AGA..U threaded mounting
flanges. The flanges are supplied together with the necessary installation hardware, bolts,
nuts and seals. Each mounting flange has a 1/4-inch NPT plugged pressure tap. The flanges
can be threaded independently onto a pipe, separate from the VGD20… gas valve body.
This feature permits union free installation, allowing the gas valve assembly to be easily
removed from a gas train without the use of pipe wrenches.
• The overall dimensions of both the 1-1/2 inch and 2-inch AGA…U flanges are identical.
Either flange type can be fitted to both the 1-1/2-inch and 2-inch VGD20… valve bodies. This
permits a 1-1/2-inch flange to be mounted on a 2-inch valve body or vice versa.
NOTE: VGD20… valves and AGA..U threaded flanges are supplied as separate items
(See Table 2 for ordering information).
VGD40… • Compact VGD40… double-valve bodies consist of two safety shut-off valves in series. Each
Models individual valve has double seats to achieve high flow.
• Patented seat construction with a closing spring for each seat assures independent shut-off.
• Stainless steel mesh filter at the inlet protects the valve seats and discs as well as
downstream components.
• Vent line connection plates are available.
NOTE: VGD40… valves and AGA..U vent connection plates are supplied as separate
items (See Table 2 for ordering information).

VG Series Gas Valves for Use with Electro-hydraulic Technical Instructions
Actuators SKP… Document Number 155-512P25
Rev. 3, March, 2002
Features, • VGH… valves are high capacity, straight-through flow, levered flap-type valves. A
Continued progressive opening characteristic provides a smooth release of gas and stable pressure
regulating control.
VGH… Models
• A stainless steel mesh filter is available. (See Table 2 for ordering information).
Application All VG… valves can be combined with any SKP… Series actuator by using the four bolts
contained in the terminal box of the actuator. The actuator can be mounted while the
valve is installed and under pressure. Sealing material is not required when mounting
actuators.
SKP… regulating actuators are applicable for both low and high supply gas pressure
applications, eliminating excessive regulator inventories. Maximum pressure capacities vary
with valve size (See Table 2).
All VG… valves perform these functions in combination with each of the following actuators:
SKP10…U..; Safety shut-off
SKP20…U..; Safety shut-off and constant pressure regulation. Regulation output range
0 to 100" w.c., or zero governor.
SKP50…U..; Safety shut-off, pressure regulation and differential pressure air/gas ratio
control.
SKP70…U..; Safety shut-off, pressure regulation and variable air/gas ratio control.
Since more than one function can be performed by a single valve, fewer components and
fittings are required to assemble a gas train, significantly reducing both the size and weight
of the gas train. The total pressure drop across the gas train arrangement is reduced,
allowing the use of smaller diameter gas trains in most applications. For details on valve
sizing see the Flow Charts (Figures 5 and 6).
CAUTION:
Do not oversize valves equipped with a regulating SKP… actuator. Oversizing

may limit turndown and could cause oscillations.
Ordering Gas valves and actuators are ordered separately. For additional SKP… actuator information,
see the following Technical Instructions:
Information
SKP10…U..; 155-513P25
SKP20…U..; 155-514P25
SKP50…U..; 155-515P25
SKP70…U..; 155-516P25
Accessories Manual adjusting throttle attachment AGA61 permits VG… series valves to be used as
hand operated adjusting throttles. Once adjusted the AGA61 has a provision to be sealed
from further adjustment (See Table 2).
Adapter plate AGA60 permits VG… series valves to be used for modulating flow control
when fitted with SQX… series modulating actuators (See Table 2).
NOTE: The VG… /SQX… valve/actuator combination does not provide safety shut-off
function.

Rev. 3, March, 2002
Table 2. Product Numbers.
Capacity Number of
CFH Test Points,
Maximum Close- Natural 1/4" NPT
Product Operating off Gas at
Inlet Outlet Valve Body
Pressure Pressure ∆P=1"
Number Size psi psi
3/4" NPT Port Material
W.C.
VGG10.154U 1/2" NPT 20 75 334 2 2 — Aluminum
VGG10.204U 3/4" NPT 20 75 627 2 2 — Aluminum
VGG10.254U 1" NPT 20 75 933 2 2 — Aluminum
VGG10.404U 1-1/2" NPT 20 75 2,250 2 2 — Aluminum
VGG10.504U 2" NPT 15 75 3,511 2 2 — Aluminum
VGG10.654U 2-1/2" NPT 10 25 5,085 1 1 2-inlet Cast Iron
VGG10.804U 3" NPT 10 25 6,158 1 1 2-inlet Cast Iron
VGF10.654U 2-1/2" Flanged 10 25 5,085 1 1 2-inlet Cast Iron

VGF10.804U 3" Flanged 10 25 6,158 1 1 2-inlet Cast Iron
VGH10.804U 3" Flanged 10 30 8,449 1 1 2-inlet Cast Iron

*VGD20.403U 1-1/2" 20 30 1,890 Two 1/4-inch — Aluminum

and one 1-inch
*VGD20.503U 2" 15 30 2,300 port between — Aluminum
valves
*AGA41U Single 1-1/2" connecting flange with 1/4-inch port for VGD 20.403U Two (2) needed per valve.
Order separately
*AGA51U Single 2" connecting flange with 1/4-inch port for VGD 20.503U
VGD40.065U 2-1/2" NPT 10 75 3,880 1 1 Two 1/4-inch Aluminum

NPT ports
VGD40.080U 3" NPT 10 75 5,370 1 1 between the Aluminum
VGD40.100U 4" Flanged 10 30 9,220 1 1 valves Aluminum
VGD40.150U 6" Flanged 10 30 15,900 1 1 Aluminum
AGA40.6580U Vent connection plate with 1-1/4" NPT vent connection and 1/4" NPT test port Order separately.
AGA40.0100U Vent connection plate with 2" NPT vent connection and 1/4" NPT test port For use with
VGD40… only.
AGA40.0150U Vent connection plate with 2-1/2" NPT vent connection and 1/4" NPT test port
AGA60 Adapter for use with SQX… actuators

AGA61 Manual operation kit, allows VG… valves to be used as manually adjustable sealable orifice or
throttle
AGA80 Filter with clamping ring for VGH10.804U, 3-inch valve.
* VGD20… double valves require 2 AGA…U threaded flanges for installation.

Rev. 3, March, 2002
Specifications Agency approvals/standards UL/429, FM/7400,

CSA/AINSI Z21.21/CGA 6.5
Approvals Commercial/Industrial
IRI approvable
Operating Maximum operation pressure See Table 2
Environment Maximum back pressure (differential) 2.5 psi (150 mbar)
Close-off pressure See Table 2
Permissible gases Natural gas, manufactured gas, LPG, air
Permissible gas temperature 15°F to 140°F (-10°C to 60°C)
Permissible operating temperature 15°F to 140°F (-10°C to 60°C)
Mounting Any position except upside down
Physical Body materials See Table 2
Characteristics Weight See Tables 3 through 6 and 8
Connections Pipe connections NPT or ANSI Class 150 flange (See Table 2)
Pressure and vent taps See Table 2
Operation All VG… gas valves are normally closed, two-way valves. The VGG…, VGF…, and VGD…
valves have a standard, built-in, stainless steel mesh filter in the inlet to protect the downstream
components against contamination.
Optional stainless steel mesh filters (order separately, see Table 2) can be installed in the inlet
flange section of the VGH… valves.
VGG… and VGF… series gas valves have a contoured valve disc for stable regulating control
and smooth release of gas (see Figure 1).
VGD20… double valves consist of two valves in series. The first (inlet) valve has a flat valve
disc suitable for the safety shut-off function only. The second (outlet) valve has a contoured
valve disc and is normally used in conjunction with actuators having additional control functions
(SKP20…, SKP50…, and SKP70…) (see Figure 3).
VGD40… double valves consist of two valves in series. Each valve has a double seat to
achieve high flow (see Figure 4).
VGH… valves are levered flap-type valves. Due to the absence of bends, the flow capacity is
high. The progressive opening mode provides a smooth release of gas with stable control (See
Figure 2).
All valves have plugged 1/4-inch NPT ports for pressure test connection. On the 2-1/2-inch and
3-inch VGG…, VGF..., and VGH… series, additional 3/4-inch NPT ports are provided for pilot or
vent line connection. The VGD20… valves have a one-inch NPT port for pilot or vent line
connection. The VGD40… valves can be equipped with a full size vent connection plate.
See Table 1 for details on ports and vent connection plates.

Rev. 3, March, 2002
Operation, Continued
Figure 1. VGG… Models. Figure 2. VGH… Models.
Figure 3. VGD20… Models.

GAS0034R1
Figure 4. VGD40… Models.

Rev. 3, March, 2002
Gas Flow Charts
VGG
VGG VGF " W.C. mbar
1,000
2,000
700
3 " /2 "
2"
4"
2"
1/
1
500
2"
1"
2-
1-
3/
1/
VGH 400 1,000
300 700
200 500
3"
4"
5"
400
300
100
200
70
50
PRESSURE DROP ∆ p
40 100
30 70
20 50
40
30
10
7 20
5
4 10
3 7
2 5
4
3
1
2
0.7
0.5
0.4 1
0.3 0.7
0.2 0.5
0.4 Sp. Gr.
cf/h 1 Natural Gas 0.64

100 2 3 4 5 7 1000 2 3 4 5 7 10000 2 3 4 5 7 100000 2 3
cf/h 2 Propane Gas 1.52
7 100 2 3 4 5 7 1000 2 3 4 5 7 100000 2 3 4 5 7 100000 2
GAS0026R2
cf/h 3 Butane Gas 2.00

7 100 2 3 4 5 7 1000 2 3 4 5 7 10000 2 3 4 5 7 100000 2
cf/h 4 Air 1.00
100 2 3 4 5 7 1000 2 3 4 5 7 10000 2 3 4 5 7 100000 2 3
m3/h 4 Air 1.00
3 4 5 7 10 2 3 4 5 7 100 2 3 4 5 7 1000 2 3 4 5 7
Figure 5. Sizing Single Valves.
NOTE: Pressure drop is for one valve.

CAUTION:
Do not oversize valves equipped with regulating actuators SKP20…, SKP50… or

SKP70… Oversizing may limit turndown and could cause oscillations.

Rev. 3, March, 2002
Gas Flow Charts, Continued
" W.C. mbar

1,000
2,000
700
2" 2"
500
2"
1/
1/
400 1,000
3"
4"
6"
1-
2-
300 700
200 500
400
300
100
200
70
50
PRESSURE DROP ∆ p
40 100
30 70
20 50
40
30
10
7 20
5
4 10
3 7
2 5
4
3
1
2
0.7
0.5
0.4 1
0.3 0.7
0.2 0.5
0.4 Sp. Gr.
cf/h 1 Natural Gas 0.64

100 2 3 4 5 7 1000 2 3 4 5 7 10000 2 3 4 5 7 100000 2 3
cf/h 2 Propane Gas 1.52
7 100 2 3 4 5 7 1000 2 3 4 5 7 100000 2 3 4 5 7 100000 2
GAS0040R1
cf/h 3 Butane Gas 2.00

7 100 2 3 4 5 7 1000 2 3 4 5 7 10000 2 3 4 5 7 100000 2
cf/h 4 Air 1.00
100 2 3 4 5 7 1000 2 3 4 5 7 10000 2 3 4 5 7 100000 2 3
m3/h 4 Air 1.00
3 4 5 7 10 2 3 4 5 7 100 2 3 4 5 7 1000 2 3 4 5 7
Figure 6. Sizing Double Valves.
NOTE: Pressure drop is total drop across both valves.

CAUTION:
Do not oversize valves equipped with regulating actuators SKP20…, SKP50… or

SKP70… Oversizing may limit turndown and could cause oscillations.

Rev. 3, March, 2002
Dimensions
Table 3. VGG… Models.

Valve Nominal A B E F K L Weight
Model Size Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Pounds
D Inches (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
VGG… 1/2 1-1/4 3-1/8 1-1/8 1-7/32 2-3/16 4-3/8 1.65
(32) (79) (28) (31) (55) (110) (0.75)
3/4 1-1/4 3-1/8 1-1/8 1-7/32 2-3/16 4-3/8 1.65
(32) (79) (28) (31) (55) (110) (0.75)
1 1-1/4 3-18 1-1/8 1-7/32 2-3/16 4-3/8 1.5
(32) (79) (28) (31) (55) (110) (0.7)
1-1/2 1-5/8 4 1-5/16 1-5/16 3 5-15/16 3.3
(41) (102) (34) (34) (75) (150) (1.5)
2 2 4-1/4 1-5/16 1-5/16) 3-3/8 6-3/4 4.0
(50) (107) (34) (34) (85) (170) (1.8)
2-1/2 3-5/8 6-7/16 — 2-7/16 5-11/16 11-7/16 32.5
(92) (163) (62) (145) (290) (14.8)
3 3-15/16 6-7/16 — 2-7/16 6-1/16 12-3/16 34
(100) (163) (62) (155) (310) (15.5)
Table 4. VGF… Models.

Valve Nominal A K L M Number O P Q R Weight
Model Size D Inches Inches Inches Inches of Bolts Inches Inches Pounds
Inches (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
o o
VGF… 2-1/2 3-5/8 6-1/2 11-7/16 3/4 4 5-1/2 45 90 7 46
(92) (165) (290) (19) (140) (178) (20.9)
o o
3 3-15/16 6-7/8 12-3/16 3/4 4 6.0 45 90 7-1/2 46.6
(100) (175) (310) (19) (152) (191) (21.2)

Rev. 3, March, 2002
Dimensions, Continued
Table 5. VGH… Models.

Valve Nominal A K L M Number O P Q R Weight
Model Size D Inches Inches Inches Inches of Bolts Inches Inches Pounds
Inches (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
o o
VGH… 3 6-1/4 5-15/16 12-3/16 3/4 4 6 45 90 7-1/2 41.4
(159) (150) (310) (19) (914) (190) (18.8)
o o
4 6-1/2 6-1/2 13-3/4 3/4 8 701/2 22.5 45 9 57
(166) (165) (350) (19) (190) (229) (25.9)
o o
5 6-7/8 7-1/2 15-3/4 3/4 8 8-1/2 22.5 45 10 77
(174) (190) (400) (19) (216) (254) (35.0)
Table 6. VGD20… Models.

Valve Model Nominal Size D L Weight
Inches Inches (mm) Pounds (kg)
VGD20… 1-1/2 12-3/16 7
(310) (3.2)
2 12-5/8 6
(320) (3.15)

Rev. 3, March, 2002
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
a) Standard connection plate

GAS0035R1
GAS0036R1
Table 7. VGD40… Models.

Valve Model A B C D E F G H I J K* L M S T
VGD40.065U 12.09 7.00 3.25 4.63 2.09 1.46 4.02 6.14 1.57 2-1/2" SW __ __ 1.77 2.44
(307) (203) (83) (118) (53) (37) (102) (156) (40) NPT 100 (45) (62)
VGD40.080U 12.87 8.94 3.64 5.18 1.85 0.79 4.21 6.30 1.85 3" SW __ __ 2.34 2.83
(327) (227) (93) (132) (47) (20) (107) (160) (47) NPT 120 (60) (72)
VGD40.100U 13.78 10.50 4.33 5.70 1.93 1.95 5.16 7.56 0.63 __ __ d=7.50 d=0.75 2.34 4.55
(350) (267) (110) (145) (49) (50) (131) (192) (16) (191) (19) (60) (116)
VGD40.150U 18.90 13.29 5.71 7.40 2.09 2.30 6.61 10.31 0.63 __ __ d=9.49 d=0.91 3.54 5.61
(480) (338) (145) (188) (53) (59) (168) (262) (16) (241) (23) (90) (143)
* Spanner width in millimeters

Rev. 3, March, 2002
Option a) Connection plate with 1/4" NPT plugged pressure test port
b) Vent connection plate with vent line connection and 1/4" NPT plugged pressure test port
Note:
GAS0037R1 Plates a) and b) are interchangeable
Table 8. VGD40… Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters).

Valve Model N O P Q R Weight
Pounds (kg)
VGD40.065U 7.13 4.06 5.34 3.02 1.46 16
(181) (103) (136) (77) (37) (7)
VGD40.080U 7.28 4.13 5.49 3.17 0.79 19
(185) (105) (140) (81) (20) (3)
VGD40.100U 8.54 4.76 6.26 3.94 1.95 29
(217) (121) (159) (100) (50) (13)
VGD40.150U 11.30 6.14 7.80 5.47 2.30 53
(287) (156) (198) (139) (59) (24)
Table 9. Vent Connection Plate Dimensions.

Thread Vent
Connection
VGD40.065U
VGD40.080U
VGD40.100U
VGD40.150U
Size
GAS0038R1
AGA40.6580U X X 1-1/4" NPT
AGA40.0100U X 2" NPT

AGA40.0150U X 2-1/2" NPT
Information in this publication is based on current specifications. The company reserves the right to make changes in specifications and models as
design improvements are introduced. Other product or company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
© 2002 Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Your feedback is important to us. If you have Document No. 155-512P25
1000 Deerfield Parkway comments about this document, please send Printed in the U.S.A.
Buffalo Grove, IL 60089-4513 them to technical.editor@sbt.siemens.com Page 12
U.S.A.
Series 90
Modutrol IV™ Motors
PRODUCT DATA
FEATURES
• Replaces M934A,D, M941, M944A,C,D, M945A,D,F,
M954, M965, and M975 motors.
• Integral junction box provides NEMA 3 weather
protection.
• Integral spring return returns motor to normal position
when power is interrupted.
• Motor and circuitry operate from 24 Vac. Models
available with factory installed transformer, or a field
added internal transformer.
• Quick-connect terminals are standard—screw terminal
adapter is available.
• Adapter bracket for matching shaft height of older
motors is available.
• Motors have field adjustable stroke (90° to 160°).
• Die-cast aluminum housing.
• Integral auxiliary switches are available factory
mounted, or can be field added.
APPLICATION • Nominal timing standard of 30 seconds (90° stroke),
and 60 seconds (160° stroke). Other timings available.
The Series 90 Modutrol IV™ Motors are spring return and • Spring return motors can operate valve linkages form
non-spring return modulating proportional control motors. Use power end or auxiliary end shafts for normally closed
these motors with controllers that provide a Series 90 output or normally open valve applications.
to operate dampers or valves. • All models have dual shafts (slotted and tapped on
both ends).
• All models have auxiliary switch cams.
• Fixed torque throughout the entire voltage range.
• Motors are designed for either normally open or
normally closed valves and dampers.
• Field addable interface modules can be mounted in the
junction box to upgrade the motor to Series 70
(electronic) control.
Contents
Application ........................................................................ 1
Features ........................................................................... 1
Specifications ................................................................... 2
Ordering Information ........................................................ 2
Wiring ............................................................................... 7
Settings and Adjustments ................................................. 10
Operation .......................................................................... 11
Checkout .......................................................................... 13
Replacement .................................................................... 13
63-2631-07
SERIES 90 MODUTROL IV™ MOTORS
SPECIFICATIONS NOTE: Auxiliary switches can only be added to motors

that include auxiliary switch cams. (These cams
cannot be field-added.)
TRADELINE Models: Selected and packaged to provide
ease of stocking, ease of handling and maximum replace- Modutrol IV Order Number Guide: See Table 1.
ment value. Specifications are the same as those of stan-
dard models unless specified otherwise.
Table 1. Modutrol IV Series 2 and 3 Model Number Guide.

M Motor
91 Proportioning Series 90 Control
94 Flame Safeguard Firing Rate Motor
6 60 lb-in. Spring Return 35 lb-in. Non-Spring Return
7 75 lb-in. Non-Spring Return
1 Dual-ended shaft Non-Spring Return
2 Normally Closed (NC) Spring Return
4 Non-Spring Return
5 Normally Closed (NC) Spring Return
A 0 Auxiliary Switches Adjustable Stroke Normally Closed
B 1 Auxiliary Switch
C 2 Auxiliary Switches
D 0 Auxiliary Switches
E 1 Auxiliary Switch
M 91 8 4 A XXXX See Catalog for Complete O.S. Number
NOTE: Torque designation corresponds to torque rating at standard timing (nominally 60 sec for 160° and 30 sec for 90° except
for 300 lb-in. motors which have timings of 2 or 4 min).
Dimensions: Refer to Fig. 2. Minimum: -40° F (-40° C).
Electrical Ratings: Refer to Table 2. NOTE: 25% duty cycle indicates that the motor operates
for 6 out of every 24 hours.
Control Inputs: Proportional, Series 90.
Dead Weight Load On Shaft:
NOTE: Motor Series 90 control can be either Electronic, Power or Auxiliary End: 200 lb (90.8 kg) maximum.
or Mechanical (135 ohm). Maximum Combined Load: 300 lb (136 kg). (Dual shaft
motors only.)
Auxiliary Switch Ratings: Refer to Table 3.
Crankshaft: 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) square. (All models built after
Ambient Temperature Ratings: 2006 have dual end shaft.)
Maximum: 150° F (66° C) at 25% duty cycle.
When purchasing replacement and modernization products from your TRADELINE® wholesaler or distributor, refer to the
TRADELINE® Catalog or price sheets for complete ordering number. If you have additional questions, need further information,
or would like to comment on our products or services, please write or phone:
1. Your local Honeywell Environmental and Combustion Controls Sales Office (check white pages of your phone directory).
2. Honeywell Customer Care
1985 Douglas Drive North
Minneapolis, Minnesota 55422-4386
3. http://customer.honeywell.com or http://customer.honeywell.ca
International Sales and Service Offices in all principal cities of the world. Manufacturing in Belgium, Canada, China, Czech
Republic, Germany, Hungary, Italy, Mexico, Netherlands, United Kingdom, and United States.
63-2631—07 2
ASYMMETRICAL MOTORS SYMMETRICAL MOTORS

VERTICAL VERTICAL VERTICAL VERTICAL
REFERENCE REFERENCE REFERENCE REFERENCE
FULLY CLOSED FULLY CLOSED FULLY CLOSED
10 10 10
45
90 FULLY
CLOSED
160 160
90
FULLY OPEN
FULLY
OPEN
FULLY OPEN FULLY OPEN

90 DEGREE STROKE 160 DEGREE STROKE 90 DEGREE STROKE 160 DEGREE STROKE
SPRING RETURN MOTORS AND NON-SPRING RETURN MOTORS NON-SPRING RETURN MOTORS
M31079
Fig. 1. Stroke.
TOP VIEW TOP VIEW OF BRACKET
4-7/8 4-1/4
(124) (107)
4-5/8
(116) 5-13/16
(148)
5-1/2
(140) 2-5/16
(58)
11/16
(17)
13/16 POWER END

1/4 (20)
(7) 1/4 (7)
13/16
2 (20) 4-7/8 (124)
4-1/16 (103) 1-1/2 (37) 5-9/16 (141)
3
5-1/2 (140)
1-1/2 (37)
JUNCTION
BOX
3/4
(19)
MOTOR
6-7/16
(164)
SPRING RETURN MODEL SHOWN
AUXILIARY POWER 5-3/8
END END (137) 1 FOR 60 LB-IN. SPRING RETURN MODELS 8-3/4 (222).
FOR NON-SPRING RETURN MODELS 7-5/16 (185).
2-9/16
(66) 2 FOR 60 LB-IN. SPRING RETURN MODELS (SHOWN).
3 FOR NON-SPRING RETURN MODELS.
9/16 (15)
1
ADAPTER 3/4
(19) M18998D
BRACKET
Fig. 2. Modutrol IV Motor mounting dimensions in inches (mm).
Stroke: Models available with field adjustable stroke from 90° to 160° (See Settings and Adjustments figure 11).
3 63-2631—07
Table 2. Power Consumption Ratings. Table 3. Auxiliary Switch Ratings (in Amps).
Power Consumption
Single Contact Ratinga 120 V 240 V
Family VA Rating
Full Load 7.2 3.6
M9161V 10
Locked Rotor 43.2 21.6
M9164 10
a
40 VA pilot duty, 120/240 Vac on opposite contact.
M9172W 20
M9174 12 Timing And Torque: Refer to Table 5.
M9175B 20 Approvals:
M9181D 10 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Listed: File No. E4436, Guide
No. XAPX to US and Canadian standards.
M9182A 15
U.S. Patents: pending
M9182D 20
Table 4. Primary 50017460-001 Color Code
M9184 15
M9185 20
Lead Color Primary Voltage
M9186G 20
Brown 24 VAC
M9191F 15
White 120 VAC
Blue 230 VAC
Black Common
All Transformers have brown secondary (24 VAC) wires.
Table 5. Series 90 Modutrol Motor Timing and Torque Ratings.
Rated Torque in lb-in. (N•m)b

Nominal Timinga in sec Normal Running Torque Breakaway Torquec
90° 160° Spring Return Non-Spring Return Spring Return Non-Spring Return
30 60 — 35 (4) — 70 (8)
15d/30 30d/60 60 (6.8) 75 (8.5) 120 (13.6) 150 (17)
30 60 — 150 (17) — 300 (34)
60 120 — 300 (34) — 600 (68)
a Timings apply to all TRADELINE models. Some OEM models are available with non-standard timing/torque.
b The
torque rating for dual-ended shaft motors is the sum of the shaft torques (power-end torque plus auxiliary-end torque).
c Breakaway torque is maximum torque available to overcome occasional large loads such as a seized damper or valve.
d Low timing is for M9184D1005 only.
NOTE: Some 150 lb-in. and 300 lb-in. torque adjustable stroke motors have timings that are twice that of the nominal timing.
IMPORTANT
Never use a Modutrol Motor continuously at the 4074EAU W973 Resister Kit provides for control of two or three
Breakaway Torque rating. Series 90 Motors from a W973 Single-zone Logic Panel or
W7100 Discharge Air Controller.
Accessories: 4074EDC 4-20 mA Resistor Kit drives one Series 90 Motor
220736 Internal Auxiliary Switch Kit can be field-installed. from a 4-20 mA controller.
One- (220736A) and Two- (220736B) switch kits available. 4074EED Unison Control 4-20 mA Resistor Kit provides for
220738A Adapter Bracket raises motor shaft height by 19 mm control of up to four Series 90 Motors from one 4-20 mA
to match that of previous Modutrol Motor models. controller.
220741A Screw Terminal Adapter converts the standard 4074ERU Weatherproofing Kit provides NEMA 3 rating for
quick-connect terminals to screw terminals. Modutrol IV Motors mounted in position other than upright.
221455A Infinitely Adjustable Crank Arm approximately 0.75 50017460-001 Internal Transformer; 24/120/230 Vac 50/60 Hz
inch shorter than the 4074ELY Crank Arm, can rotate primary, 24 Vac secondary, quick connect terminals.
through downward position and clear base of motor without 50017460-003 Internal Transformer; 120 Vac 50/60 Hz pri-
requiring use of adapter bracket. mary, 24 Vac secondary, quick connect terminals.
221508A Resistor Board plugs onto Series 90 Motor quick- 7617ADW Crank Arm approximately 0.75 inch shorter than
connect wire terminals. Provides same functionality as 7616BR Crank Arm. Can rotate through downward position
4074BYK, 4074EAU, 4074EDC, or 4074EED Resistor Kits. and clear base of motor without requiring use of adapter
4074BYK Series 90 Resistor Kit provides for unison control of bracket.
up to six Series 90 Motors. Q100 Linkage connects Modutrol Motor to V51 Butterfly Valve.
Requires the 220738A adapter bracket (packed with
TRADELINE Modutrol IV Motors).
63-2631—07 4
Q181 Auxiliary Potentiometer for sequence or unison control of

1 to 4 additional modulating (Series 90) motors.
INSTALLATION
Q209E,F Potentiometer limits motor minimum position.
Q5001 Bracket and Linkage Assembly connects Modutrol
Motor to a water or steam globe valve.
When Installing this Product...
Q605 Damper Linkage connects motor to damper. Includes 1. Read these instructions carefully. Failure to follow them
motor crank arm. could damage the product or cause a hazardous condi-
Q607 External Auxiliary Switch controls auxiliary equipment as tion.
a function of motor position. 2. Check the ratings given in the instructions and on the
Q7130A Interface Module with selectable voltage ranges product to make sure the product is suitable for your
(4-7 Vdc, 6-9 Vdc, and 10.5-13.5 Vdc) adapts motor to application.
M71XX function. 3. Installer must be a trained, experienced service techni-
Q7230A Interface Module with selectable control (2-10 Vdc or cian.
4-20 mA) and adjustable zero and span adapts motor to 4. After installation is complete, check out product opera-
M72XX function. tion as provided in these instructions.
Q7330A Interface Module for W936 Economizer applications
adapts motor to M73XX function.
ES650-117 Explosion-Proof Housing encloses motor for use in
explosive atmospheres. Also required, a 7617DM coupling
CAUTION
Electrical Shock or Equipment Damage Hazard.
assembly from Honeywell to use with the cover. Not for use Can shock individuals or short equipment circuitry.
with Q5001 (or any other valve linkages). Disconnect all power supplies before installation.
To order ES-650-117, contact EGS Enclosures at Motors with auxiliary switches can have more than one
(281) 449-6271, ask for the sales department and for disconnect.
distribution in your area.
CAUTION
Equipment Damage Hazard.
Table 6. Modutrol Motor Cross-Reference.
Can damage the motor beyond repair.
Original Motor Replacements Never turn the motor shaft by hand or with a wrench.
M944A,C,D, M954 M9184, M9194 Forcibly turning the motor shaft damages the gear train
and stroke limit contacts.
M934D M9164, M9174
M945A,D,F, M955 M9182, M9185 IMPORTANT
M941 M9484, M9494 Always conduct a thorough checkout when
installation is complete.
Location
Allow enough clearance for installing accessories and motor
servicing when selecting a location (See Fig. 2). If located
outdoors, use liquid-tight conduit connectors with the junction
box to provide NEMA 3 weather protection. If mounted
outdoors in a position other than upright, install a 4074ERU
Weatherproofing Kit and liquid-tight connectors to provide
NEMA 3 protection.
CAUTION
Motor Damage Hazard.
Deteriorating vapors and acid fumes can damage
metal parts.
Install motor in areas free of acid fumes and other
deteriorating vapors.
In excessive salt environments, mounting base and screws

should be zinc or cadmium plated, not stainless steel or brass.
Use the 220738A Adapter Bracket for mounting on these
surfaces.
5 63-2631—07
Mounting To mount the motor with the bracket (See Fig. 3):
1. Mount the bracket to the equipment with existing or stan-
dard bolts.
2. Using the provided bolts, mount the motor to the bracket
CAUTION threaded holes.
Can damage the motor beyond repair. For valve linkage applications (other than the Q5001):
Always install motors with the crankshaft horizontal. 1. Mount the bracket to the linkage.
Improper motor mounting can result in inadequate 2. Position the motor on the bracket to align the motor shaft
motor gear train lubrication. with the linkage.
3. Attach the motor to the bracket with the four bolts pro-
Use the following guidelines for proper motor mounting: vided (See Fig. 4).
• Always install motors with the crankshaft horizontal.
• Mounting flanges extending from motor housing base are
drilled for 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) machine screws or bolts. Damper Linkages
• Non-Spring Return Motors are shipped from the factory in The motor does not include a crank arm. Order the crank arm,
the closed position (at the limit of counterclockwise rotation, included in the Q605 Linkage, separately (refer to Accessories
as viewed from the power end of the motor). in the Specifications section). For detailed instructions on the
• Spring Return Motors are shipped from the factory in their assembly of specific linkages, refer to the instruction sheet
normal position: packed with the linkage.
— Normally closed models: shipped at limit of counter-
clockwise rotation, as viewed from the power end of the
motor.
CAUTION
Adapter Bracket Stalling a motor can damage the drive shaft.
Ensure installation of motors and linkages allows the
The 220738A Adapter Bracket, positioned between the motor motor to drive through full stroke without obstruction.
and the equipment, raises motor shaft height by 0.75 in.
(19 mm) to match that of the former Modutrol Motor.
Valve Linkages
The following applications require this bracket:
• Q607 External Auxiliary Switch. The Q100 Linkage requires the 220738A Adapter Bracket for all
• Damper linkage applications require added clearance to valve applications. Applications with the Q5001 Valve Linkage
allow: do not require the 220738A Adapter Bracket (Refer to Fig. 3).
— crank arm rotation through the downward
position. Junction Box
— sufficient damper linkage to reach the motor shaft.
• All valve linkages except the Q5001. When used with liquid-tight conduit connectors, the junction
box provides NEMA 3 weather protection for the motor. The
junction box, standard with replacement motors, encloses the
terminals and provides knockouts for wiring conduits. Housing
an internal transformer or internal auxiliary switches requires
use of the junction box.
63-2631—07 6
STANDARD
BOLTS (4)
BOLTS
1 PROVIDED (4)
WIRING
BOX
MOTOR
ND
RE
WE
PO
ADAPTER
BRACKET
EQUIPMENT
ND ND
BASE WE
RE
WE
RE
PO PO
1 #12 OR 1/4" ZINC PLATED

MACHINE SCREWS OR BOLTS M18999
NON-SPRING RETURN SPRING RETURN

NOTE: When no bracket is used in replacement applications, damper linkages require adjustment for the new shaft posi-
tion.
Fig. 3. Mounting the Motor with an Adapter Bracket.
WIRING
JUNCTION
BOX
CAUTION
Electrical Shock or Equipment Damage Hazard.
POWER
END OF MOTOR
Can shock individuals or short equipment
MOTOR
circuitry.
Q5001
Disconnect power supply before installation.
VALVE
LINKAGE IMPORTANT
All wiring must agree with applicable codes, ordi-
nances and regulations.
1. Ensure that the voltage and frequency stamped on the

motor correspond to the power supply characteristics.
1/4-20 UNC 2. When connecting several motors in parallel, ensure that
1 in. LONG
MOUNTING
the power supply VA rating is large enough to provide
BOLTS power to all motors used without overloading.
VALVE
3. Fig. 11 shows that the motor terminals are
quick-connects located on top of the printed circuit
board.
4. To access the wiring compartment:
a. Remove the four screws from the junction box top.
M18994
b. Lift off the cover.
5. Refer to Fig. 5 for typical wiring, and Fig. 7 for internal
auxiliary switch connections.
Fig. 4. Mounting the Motor on a Q5001 Valve Linkage.
NOTE: Reverse motor rotation by switching wires at
either the motor or the panel. Reverse rotation on
the Series 90 models by reversing the wires at ter-
minals W and B.
7 63-2631—07
SERIES 90
CONTROLLER MOTOR
2 BLUE LEAD YELLOW LEAD 2 3
R R
T1 1
W W
T2
B B
1
L1 TRANSFORMER RED LEAD 2

1 (HOT)
1 USE NEC CLASS 1 WIRING UNLESS POWER SUPPLY
L2 MEETS CLASS 2 REQUIREMENTS. TAPE UNUSED LEADS.
ENSURE THE CURRENT DRAW OF THE EXTERNAL CIRCUIT
IS LESS THAN SWITCH CONTACT RATING.
1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND
OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. 2 ON TWO-SWITCH MOTORS, SECOND SWITCH HAS BLACK
LEADS WITH BLUE, YELLOW, AND RED TRACERS.
2 TRANSFORMER MAY BE INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL M770A
3 SOME AUXILIARY SWITCH ASSEMBLIES INCLUDE ONLY
RED AND YELLOW LEADS. SOME OTHERS DO NOT INCLUDE
THE YELLOW LEAD. M17099
Fig. 5. Typical Series 90 Wiring.
Fig. 7. Auxiliary Switch Schematic.
135 OHM
POTENTIOMETER MOTOR
W W SERIES 90 SLAVE MOTOR CONNECTION FROM 4-20MA

T1 24 VOLT 4-20– 4-20+ 24 VOLT
R R
T2
B B
SET DIP T1 T2 R(-) B W1 W1 W(+)

SWITCH
L1 TRANSFORMER
TO TWO
1 (HOT) MOTORS 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
T1 T2 R B W
L2
INTERFACE
MODULE
1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND 221508A2
OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
M27085A
2 TRANSFORMER MAY BE INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL M13708
Fig. 6. Wiring for Potentiometer Control Fig. 8. Series 90 Slave Motor Connection.
For controlling up to six Series 90s in parallel with a 135 ohm

SERIES 60
pot or slide wire type series 90 controller, add the appropriate CONTROLLER
resistor indicated in the table below to ONE of the Series 90
motors, from terminal B to terminal W. As an alternative, one R
M6284
221508A2 module can be used to provide any of the resistor
values given below: B W R
Table 7. Resistor Values of Motors in Parallel 1 3
Number of Motors in T 4
Parallel Resistor Value G
1 None R (HOT) Y
2 140 Ohms
C M9184
3 72 Ohms
4 47 Ohms R (HOT) W
T1
5 36 Ohms C
R
T2
B
6 29 Ohms
M27035
Fig. 9. Series 60 Controller.
63-2631—07 8
The motors in the application need to be all symmetrical or all

asymmetrical. The M62 motor needs to be a "-S" slaving
model, as listed in Table 8. In order to get the correct response
the Series 62 needs the appropriate shunt resistor from Table
8. The motors' potentiometer settings are given in the
configuration table (Table 9) below. When slaving more than
one Series 90 motor use the appropriate resistor table as
indicated by the configuration table and install two resistors to
ONE of the motors (Tables 10 and 11). If the motor is the M62
master connect one resistor from terminals T to G and one
from T to Y. If the motor is one of the M90 slaves connect one
resistor from terminals R to B and one from R to W.
NOTE: More than 6 slaves is not recommended.
Table 8. Series 60 and Series 90 in Slaving Application
Feedback Sensitivity Internal Linear Series 90 Slaving

OS Number Resistance Adjustment Shunted Feedback Shunt Resistor
M6284D1000-S, M6284D1026-S, M6284D4004-S, 600 Ohms No Yes No 187 Ohm
M6285A1005-S, M6285A1054-S, M6285A4009-S
M6274F1009-F, M6284F1070-F, M6284F1078-F, 10 K Ohms No No Yes Not Available
M6285F1001-F, M6294F1009-F, M6294F1017-F,
M6284D1032-F
M6284A1071-S, M6284A1089-S, M6284C1028-S 196/346 Ohms Yes Yes No 274 Ohm
M6284A1030-S, M6284A1055-S, M6284A1097-S, 119/224 Ohms Yes Yes No Not Necessary
M6284B1004-S, M6284C1010-S, M6284C1044-S,
M6284F1013-S, M6284F1039-S, M6285A1039-S,
M6285A1047-S, M6285C1001-S, M6294B1036-S,
M6294D1008-S
M6284F1062-S 1800 Ohms No Yes No Not Available
“-S” Slaving Series 90 Mod IV Motor
“-F” 0-10K Feedback
Table 9. Configuration Table
Symmetrical or Master Slave Master Master Slave Slave Resistor

Asymmetrical Stroke Stroke Stroke Pot Sensitivity Pot Stroke Pot Sensitivity Pot Table
Symmetrical 160 160 CW CW CW CW 1
Symmetrical 90 90 CCW CCW CCW CCW 2
Symmetrical 160 90 CCW CW CCW CCW 1
Symmetrical 90 160 Configuration not recommended
Asymmetrical 160 160 CW CW CW CW 1
Asymmetrical 90 90 CCW CW CW CW 1
Asymmetrical 160 90 Configuration not recommended
Asymmetrical 90 160 Configuration not recommended
Table 10. Resistor Table 1 Table 11. Resistor Table 2

Number of Motors in Parallel Resistor Value Number of Motors in Parallel Resistor Value
1 NONE 1 NONE
2 3500 Ohms 2 5000 Ohms
3 2000 Ohms 3 2400 Ohms
4 1300 Ohms 4 1700 Ohms
5 1000 Ohms 5 1400 Ohms
6 800 Ohms 6 1200 Ohms
9 63-2631—07
SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS

CAUTION
Careless Installation Hazard.
Before Setting Stroke Use of excessive force while adjusting cams
damages the motor.
1. Remove the top cover from the motor. To avoid damaging motor end switches, set cams by
2. Disconnect the controller from the motor. moving only the top of the screwdriver.
3. Connect a remote potentiometer to the motor as shown
in Fig. 6 (R-W-B).
The stroke adjustment on the series 2 and series 3 motors is

CAUTION
Careless Installation Hazard.
made using the stroke and sensitivity potentiometers located Forcibly turning the motor shaft damages the gear
under the cove inside the motor. The stroke adjustment on a train and stroke limit contacts.
series 1 motor was made by adjusting the CAMS. Never turn motor shaft manually (either by hand or with
a wrench).
For Series 2 and Series 3 Motors:
To set the stroke to 160 degrees (maximum position) turn both
stroke and sensitivity potentiometers fully clockwise , CAUTION
using a 1/8 inch straight-blade screwdriver.
Can damage the motor beyond repair.
To set the stroke to 90 degrees (minimum position) turn both Set cams by moving the top of the screwdriver only.
stroke and sensitivity potentiometers fully counter-clockwise Pressing screwdriver against cam slot sides or use of
, using a 1/8 inch straight-blade screwdriver. excessive force can damage motor end switches.
To set the stroke between 90 and 160 degrees:

1. Turn the stroke and sensitivity potentiometers fully
clockwise, using a 1/8 inch straight-blade screwdriver.
2. Turn the remote potentiometer (previously installed on
R-W-B terminals) to maximum position. W INNER AUXILIARY
SWITCH
3. Turn the sensitivity potentiometer to the selected stroke
(between 90 and 160 degrees) OR until the motor stops.
4. IF the motor stops before the selected stroke is reached, INNER AUXILIARY
B SWITCH CAM (BLUE)
turn the stroke potentiometer until the selected stroke is
reached OR
POWER
5. IF the selected stroke is reached using the sensitivity END
potentiometer, turn the stroke potentiometer counter-
clockwise until the motor begins to move. Then R
turn the stroke potentiometer clockwise slightly to OUTER AUXILIARY
T2 SWITCH CAM (RED)
have the position correspond to the sensitivity
potentiometer.
6. Make sure the minimum position is correct. T1
OUTER AUXILIARY
SWITCH
ADJUSTABLE STROKE POTENTIOMETER

NOTE: NOT ALL FEATURES AVAILABLE ON ALL MODELS. M31108A
STROKE
POTENTIOMETER SENSITIVITY
POTENTIOMETER Fig. 11. Terminals and Adjustments.
TIMING POTENTIOMETER
Auxiliary Switches
(M9182D1023 ONLY) Adjustable cams actuate the auxiliary switches. These cams
AUXILIARY
can be set to actuate the switches at any angle within the
SWITCH CAMS stroke of the motor. Select switch differential of 1° or 10°.
POWER END
OF MOTOR M27388A
Motors with factory-added auxiliary switches are shipped in the
closed position (fully counterclockwise, as viewed from the
Fig. 10. Potentiometer Location and Stroke Adjustment power end). Auxiliary cam default actuates the switches 30°
Setup for Non-Spring Return Series 90 Motors. from full open with a 1° differential. With the motor in the closed
(fully counterclockwise) position, the auxiliary switch breaks
Adjustable timing for M9182D1023 contacts R-B. Refer to Fig. 7 (or the auxiliary switch Instruction
Sheet) for auxiliary switch wiring.
The timing potentiometer (the second from the right, (Refer to
Fig. 10) sets the timing to 1minute, if turned fully CCW ,2 NOTE: Auxiliary switches can only be added to motors
minutes if turned to its middle point and 4 minutes if turned fully that include auxiliary switch cams. (These cams
CW . cannot be field-added.)
63-2631—07 10
NOTE: Series 3 Motors are shipped with auxiliary switch

cams that permit acceptance of 220736A,B Inter-
OPERATION
nal Auxiliary Switch Kits. Refer to Form no. 63-
2228 for 220736A,B Installation Instructions. Use Series 90 Modutrol IV Motors for standard Series 90
operation (See Table 12):
1. Two potentiometers, one in the controller and one in the
Auxiliary Switch Adjustment motor, along with the motor resistor network, form a
1. Remove the top cover from the motor to gain access to bridge circuit. As long as the value of the controlled
the motor terminals and auxiliary cams. medium remains at the setpoint, the circuit remains bal-
2. Disconnect the controller from the motor. anced and the motor does not run.
3. Connect a potentiometer to the motor as shown in Fig. 6. 2. When the controlled medium value changes, the control-
4. Using the potentiometer, drive the motor to the position ler potentiometer wiper moves, unbalancing the bridge
where the auxiliary equipment is to be switched. circuit.
5. For a 1° switch differential, check continuity of the auxil- 3. The imbalance is amplified and the microcontroller then
iary switch contacts R-B and rotate the cam as follows: drives the motor in the direction necessary to correct the
a. If the contacts are open, rotate the cam clockwise controlled medium change.
until the R-B contacts close. 4. As the motor shaft rotates, it turns the feedback potenti-
b. If the contacts are closed, rotate the cam counter- ometer, rebalancing the bridge circuit, stopping the
clockwise until the R-B contacts open. motor.
6. For a 10° switch differential:
a. Spring return models: rotate the cam approximately Table 12. Modutrol IV Motor Operation.
180° so that the slow-rise portion of the cam actu- Motor Type Signal Resulting Action
ates the switch. Then check continuity of the auxiliary
switch contacts R-B. Non-Spring Return Open W and short drives open
b. Non-spring return models: check continuity of the or Spring Return R to B
auxiliary switch contacts R-B. Open B and short drives closed
7. Rotate the cam as follows: R to W
a. If the contacts are open, rotate the cam counter-
clockwise until the R-B contacts close. Jumper R-W-B drives to midstroke
b. If the contacts are closed, rotate the cam clockwise None drives closed
until the R-B contacts open. Non-Spring Return Power Loss stops (none)
8. Check for proper auxiliary equipment differential and
switching by driving the motor though the full stroke in Spring Return Power Loss spring returns
both directions. (closed)
9. Disconnect the potentiometer, reconnect the controller,
and replace the motor top cover.
NOTE: Changing the differential from 1° to 10° reverses

the switching action. For example, with a 10° dif-
ferential, switch contacts R-B make and R-W
break on a counterclockwise (closed) rotation.
With a 1° differential, switch contacts R-W make
and R-B break on a counterclockwise (closed) T1
rotation. T2
R
B
W
M17626
Fig. 12. Attaching a Shunt Resistor to TRADELINE Motors.
Table 13. Cam Arrangements.

Inner Outer
Motor Cam Cam
M9174B1027 Blue Blue
M9174C1025 Blue Blue
M9174C1033 Blue Blue
M917C1041 Blue Blue
All Other M91XX Blue Red
11 63-2631—07
2 2
1/8 INCH
1/8 INCH RIGHT/INNER STRAIGHT-BLADE RIGHT/INNER
STRAIGHT-BLADE AUXILIARY SCREWDRIVER AUXILIARY
SCREWDRIVER SWITCH SWITCH
SLOW RISE
PORTION SLOW RISE
(APPROX. INNER PORTION INNER
10 DIFF.) AUXILIARY (APPROX. AUXILIARY
CAM FAST RISE PORTION 10 DIFF.) FAST RISEPORTION
(APPROX. 1 DIFF.) CAM (APPROX. 1 DIFF.)
(RED) (RED)
LEFT/OUTER LEFT/OUTER
AUXILIARY AUXILIARY
SWITCH SWITCH
SLOW RISE SLOW RISE

PORTION PORTION
(APPROX. (APPROX.
10 DIFF.) OUTER 10 DIFF.)
OUTER AUXILIARY
FAST RISE AUXILIARY CAM
PORTION CAM (BLUE)
(APPROX. 1 DIFF.) (RED)
FAST RISE
PORTION
(APPROX.
1 DIFF.)
MOTOR MOTOR
MOTOR MOTOR OPEN CLOSE
OPEN CLOSE POWER
POWER END
END
INNER AUXILIARY 1
CAM
2 1/8 INCH 2
RIGHT/INNER STRAIGHT-BLADE
AUXILIARY SCREWDRIVER
1/8 INCH RIGHT/INNER
STRAIGHT-BLADE SWITCH
AUXILIARY
SCREWDRIVER SWITCH
RIGHT/INNER
SLOW RISE AUXILIARY
PORTION SWITCH
(APPROX.
10 DIFF.)
SLOW RISE INNER
PORTION AUXILIARY
(APPROX. INNER FAST RISE CAM
10 DIFF.) AUXILIARY PORTION (BLUE)
CAM (APPROX.
(BLUE) 1 DIFF.)
LEFT/OUTER
AUXILIARY OUTER AUXILIARY FAST RISE
SWITCH POWER CAM PORTION
1 LEFT/OUTER
LEFT/OUTER END OF AUXILIARY (APPROX.
AUXILIARY MOTOR SWITCH 1 DIFF.)
SWITCH
SLOW RISE SLOW RISE

PORTION PORTION
FAST RISE (APPROX. 1 CAM ARRANGEMENT VARIES WITH MODEL. OUTER (APPROX.
OUTER FAST RISE 10 DIFF.)
PORTION AUXILIARY 10 DIFF.) AUXILIARY
(APPROX. CAM PORTION
2 MOVE SCREWDRIVER AT TOP ONLY TO (APPROX. CAM
1 DIFF.) (BLUE) (RED)
ADJUST CAM. 1 DIFF.)
MOTOR MOTOR NOTE: CAMS ARE OFFSET VERTICALLY TO MOTOR

CLOSE MOTOR
OPEN POWER PROVIDE BETTER VIEW OF INNER CAM. OPEN POWER CLOSE
END END M17672
Fig. 13. Auxiliary Switch Adjustment.
63-2631—07 12
CHECKOUT REPLACEMENT
After the installation and linkage adjustment, check the entire
motor and control hookup. Proper checkout ensures that: Damper Application
• The motor operates the load (damper or valve) properly. 1. Turn off power and remove wiring from the old motor.
• The motor responds properly to the controller as the input 2. Remove the crank arm from shaft of old motor and
varies (See Table 12). remove the old motor.
• The auxiliary switch, if used, operates at the desired point of 3. Determine necessity of the mounting bracket. If the link-
motor rotation. age can reach the new motor shaft position and the
1. Inspect motor, linkage, and valve or damper to ensure all crank arm has clearance for the necessary rotation, the
mechanical connections are correct and secure. bracket is not required. Use the 220738A Adapter
Bracket or the 221455A Crank Arm if the crank arm must
NOTE: In damper installations, the pushrod should not
rotate through the bottom plane of the motor.
extend more than a few inches past the ball
a. If no bracket is required, mount the new motor
joints.
directly to the equipment and refer to the Installation,
2. Ensure that there is adequate clearance for the linkage Settings and Adjustments, and the Operation and
throughout the entire motor stroke without binding or Checkout sections of these instructions.
striking other objects. b. If the bracket is required, refer to the Adapter Bracket
3. Ensure the motor transformer is properly sized. section and Fig. 3 in addition to the Installation, Set-
tings and Adjustments, and the Operation and
NOTE: If a common transformer is used to power multi- Checkout sections of these instructions.
ple motors, ensure the power input is in phase 4. Use No. 12 or 1/4 inch machine screws or bolts to mount
with all motors. the new motor.
5. Mount damper crank arm and linkage to the new motor
4. Drive the motor fully open and fully closed shaft.
(See Table 12). 6. Use the Checkout procedures to test the crank arm and
linkage adjustment.
NOTE: Refer to controller or system instructions for
additional checkout procedures.
Valve Application
5. For spring return motors, ensure that the valve or
damper returns to normal position upon power interrup- When replacing a motor in a valve application, the linkage
tion. determines the necessity of the 220738A Adapter Bracket.
6. Return the controller to the desired setting before leaving With Q100, Q601 or Q618 Linkages, it is necessary to use the
the job. 220738A to raise the motor shaft to the appropriate height.
Valve applications with a Q5001 Linkage do not require the
220738A Adapter Bracket. To operate Honeywell V5011
two-way or V5013 three-way valves through full stroke, use a
160° stroke motor or make sure the stroke is adjusted to 160
degrees.
13 63-2631—07
63-2631—07 14
15 63-2631—07
Automation and Control Solutions

Honeywell International Inc.
® U.S. Registered Trademark
Golden Valley, MN 55422 © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
63-2631—07 M.S. Rev. 11-12
customer.honeywell.com Printed in United States
L91A,B,D Proportioning
Pressuretrol® Controllers
PRODUCT DATA
FEATURES
• Models available for pressure systems up to 300 psi
(2068 kPa).
• May be used with steam, air, noncombustible gases, or
other fluids noncorrosive to brass or phos-bronze (300
psi model) bellows.
• When used with steam boilers, a steam trap (siphon
loop) is recommended.
• Wiper on controller potentiometer moves in response
to pressure changes.
• L91D has two potentiometers for unison control of two
motors.
• L91B,D models have adjustable proportioning
(throttling) range to allow selection of desired
pressure control range.
• Adjustments made with screws on case top.
• Large, easily-read scaleplates in both U.S. customary
(oz/sq. in., psi, or in. Hg) and metric (kPa, MPa, or mm
Hg) units.
• Steel case with clear plastic cover to observe pressure
settings and potentiometer action.
APPLICATION • Fitting with 1/4 -18 NPT threads allows rapid
installation.
L91 Proportioning Pressuretrol® Controllers are Series 90 • Surface mount with screws through knockout holes in
Modulating Pressure Controllers that provide direct control of case back.
modulating motors or valves used on automatic burners or
steam heating systems.
Contents
Application 1
Features 1
Specifications 2
Installation 5
Wiring 6
Checkout 8
Service Information 9
Put UPC Code Here

60-2152—08
L91A,B,D PROPORTIONING PRESSURETROL® CONTROLLERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Table 1. Models available.
Maximum Surge
Operating Rangesa Proportioning (Throttling) Range at Midscale Pressure
U. S. U. S.
Customary Potentiometer Customary
Model Units Metric Units Part No.b Adjustable Units Metric Units psi kPa
L91A 0 to 15 psi 0 to 103 kPa 23176CB No 0.5 psi 3.4 kPa 25 172
5 to 150 psi 0.03 to 1.03 MPa 23176CB No 5 psi 0.03 MPa 225 1551
10 to 300 psib 0.07 to 2.07 MPa 23176CB No 12 psi 0.08 MPa 350 2413
L91B 0 to 15 psi 0 to 103 kPa 23176CF Yes 1.5 to 12 psi 10 to 83 kPa 25 172
5 to 150 psic 0.03 to 1.03 MPa 23176CB Yes 5 to 23 psi 35 to 160 kPa 225 1551
10 to 300 psic 0.07 to 2.07 MPa 23176CB Yes 12 to 48 psi 85 to 330 kPa 350 2413
10 to 300 psi 0.07 to 2.07 MPa 23176CF Yes 30 to 110 psi 0.21 to 0.76 MPa 350 2413
L91D 0 to 15 psi 0 to 103 kPa 23176CF Yes 1.5 to 12 psi 10 to 83 kPa 25 172
5 to 150 psic 0.03 to 1.03 MPa 23176CF Yes 13 to 52 psi 0.09 to 0.36 MPa 225 1551
10 to 300 psic 0.07 to 2.07 MPa 23176CF Yes 30 to 110 psi 0.21 to 0.76 MPa 350 2413
Models (Table 1): Adjustment Means: Screws on controller case top; knurled
L91A: Single potentiometer; nonadjustable proportioning knob for main scale setting on 10 to 300 psi (0.07 to 2.07
range. MPa) models.
L91B: Single potentiometer; adjustable proportioning range.
L91D: Two potentiometers allow unison control of motors; Setpoint: At low pressure end of proportioning (throttling)
adjustable proportioning range. range.
Electrical Rating: 24 Vac. Main Scaleplate: Marked in both U.S. customary (oz/sq. in,
psi, or in. Hg) and metric (kPa, MPa, or mm Hg) units.
Potentiometer Action: Wiper moves toward W on pressure
rise, toward B on pressure fall. Potentiometer is field Proportioning Range Scaleplate (L91B,D only): Gradu-
replaceable. ated from A to F with a MIN (minimum) value below A.
(See Table 2 for the value of each division.)
Potentiometer Resistance: 140 ohms (nominal) for L91A, B,
and D models. Mounting Means: Fitting on bellows has 1/4 - 18 NPT
threads (external on 0 to 16 oz/sq. in., 0 to 4 psi, and 0 to
Pressure Sensing Element: Brass bellows, 10-300 psi 15 psi models; internal on all other models) for mounting on
models phos-bronze bellows. a pipe or steam trap (siphon loop).
Minimum Ambient Temperature: 32° F (0° C) NOTE: Some models are available with 1/4 - 19 BSP-TR
internal threads; see Table 1.
Maximum Ambient Temperature: 150° F (66° C)
Also can be surface mounted by screws through two knockout
holes in case back.
When purchasing replacement and modernization products from your TRADELINE® wholesaler or distributor, refer to the
TRADELINE® Catalog or price sheets for complete ordering number.
If you have additional questions, need further information, or would like to comment on our products or services, please write or
phone:
1. Your local Honeywell Automation and Control Products Sales Office (check white pages of your phone directory).
2. Honeywell Customer Care
Minneapolis, Minnesota 55422-4386
In Canada—Honeywell Limited/Honeywell Limitée, 35 Dynamic Drive, Toronto, Ontario M1V 4Z9.
International Sales and Service Offices in all principal cities of the world. Manufacturing in Australia, Canada, Finland, France,
Germany, Japan, Mexico, Netherlands, Spain, Taiwan, United Kingdom, U.S.A.
60-2152—08 2
Electrical Connections: Internal screw terminals. Hole inside 23176CF Potentiometer: For all L91D models and most L91B
of case for 1/2 in. conduit. models (see Table 1); 140 ohms (nominal); length of active
winding is 1/4 in. (6.4 mm).
Dimensions: See Fig. 1; see Fig. 2 for mounting steam trap
(siphon loop). Accessories:
50024585-001 Steam Trap (siphon loop): 1/4 in. brass pipe
Weight: 1 lb, 15 oz (0.88 kg). with 1/4 -18 NPT external threads on both ends.
14026 Steam Trap (siphon loop): 1/4 in. steel pipe with 1/4 -18
Finish: Gray. NPT external threads on both ends.
33312B Knurled Adjustment Knob: With setscrew; fits on main
Replacement Parts: scale pressure adjusting screw.
129178 Thermoplastic Cover. 4074BWJ Limit Stop Assembly: To limit setpoint ranges;
23176CB Potentiometer: For all L91A models and a few L91B includes 129564 Range Stop 107194 Range Stop Screw,
models (see Table 1); 140 ohms (nominal); length of active and 23466 Wrench.
winding is 7/64 in. (2.8 mm).
Table 2. Approximate value of each division (A to B, B to C, etc.) on proportioning

(throttling) range scaleplate (L91B,D,F only)
Operating Range Value of Each Division
U.S. Customary
U.S. Customary Units Metric Units Units Metric Units
0 to 10 oz/sq in. 0 to 7 kPa 6.2 oz/ sq in. 2.7 kPa
0 to 15 psi 0 to 103 kPa 1.8 psi 12.4 kPa
5 to 150 psi (L91B) 0.03 to 1.03 MPa 7.8 psi 0.054 MPa
5 to 150 psi (L91D) 0.03 to 1.03 MPa 6.7 psi 0.046 MPa
10 to 300 psi (L91B with 7/64 in. potentiometer) 0.07 to 2.07 MPa 16.4 psi 0.113 MPa
10 to 300 psi (L91B,D with 1/4 in. potentiometer) 0.07 to 2.07 MPa 13.8 psi 0.095 MPa
3 60-2152—08
4-1/2 (114.3) (COVER)

L91A,B,D
4-11/32 (110.3) (CASE)
2-3/4 (69.9)
3-57/64 (98.8)
3-13/32 (86.5) 1-3/16 (30.2)
1-5/32 (29.4) 3 1-1/16 (27.0) 4

2
2
3-23/32
1-3/32 (27.8) (94.5)
3-7/8 2-5/64
(98.4) (52.8)
ALL OTHER
MODELS 7/8 DIM C (SEE
1-13/16 TABULATION
(46.0) (22.2) (2)
TABLE)
13/16
10 TO 300 PSI (20.1)
0 TO 15 PSI
0 TO 16 OZ/IN 2
1/4-18 NPT
2-1/8 (53.5) 1-1/16

(27.0)
DIM A (SEE TABULATION TABLE) DIM B (SEE

TABULATION
1 EXTERNAL THREADS ON 0 TO 15 PSI MODELS; INTERNAL THREADS ON ALL OTHER MODELS. TABLE)
SOME MODELS ARE ALSO AVAILABLE WITH 1/4-19 BSP-TR INTERNAL THREADS; SEE TABLE 1.
2 PROPORTIONING RANGE ADJUSTING SCREW ON L91B,D MODELS ONLY.
3 33312B KNURLED ADJUSTMENT SCREW KNOB, 7/8 IN. [22.2 MM] DIAMETER,. KNOB IS INCLUDED WITH 10 TO 300 PSI [0.07 TO .07 MPa] MODELS;
OPTIONAL ACCESSORY FOR OTHER MODELS.
4 FOR 10 TO 300 PSI [0.07 TO 2.07 MPa] MODELS. DIM C INCLUDES THE KNURLED ADJUSTMENT KNOB.
TABULATION OF DIMENSIONS A, B, AND C

OPERATING RANGE DIM A DIM B DIM C
CUSTOMARY UNITS METRIC UNITS IN. MM IN. MM IN. MM
0 TO 15 PSI 0 TO 103 kPa 2-7/16 61.9 1-7/32 31.0 6-7/8 174.6
5 TO 150 PSI 0.03 TO 1.03 MPa 1-5/8 41.3 13/16 20.6 5-3/4 146.1
10 TO 300 PSI 0.07 to 2.07 MPa 1-1/4 31.8 5/8 15.9 6-1/16 154.0
4 4
M29781
Fig. 1. Mounting dimensions of the L91 Proportional Pressuretrol® Controllers, in in. (mm).
60-2152—08 4
INSTALLATION
When Installing This Product...
1. Read these instructions carefully. Failure to follow them L91
PRESSURETROL
could damage the product or cause a hazardous CONTROLLER
condition.
2. Check the ratings given in the instructions and on the
product to make sure the product is suitable for your PRESSURE
application. GAUGE
3. Installer must be a trained, experienced service
technician. PRESSURETOL
4. After installation is complete, check out product opera-

tion as provided in these instructions.
TEE
2
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard.
Can cause severe injury, death or property damage.
1. Disconnect power supply before beginning STEAM TRAP 1
(SIPHON LOOP)
installation to prevent electrical shock and 4-1/2 (114) TO
equipment damage. 5-1/2 (140)
2. When using the controller with a compressor, install
a dampening device (such as a needle valve,
header, or surge tank) to dampen pulsations that can
damage the controller or reduce its life.
BOILER
IMPORTANT
1. Locate the controller where the ambient temperature
will not exceed 150° F (66° C).
1 50024585-001 STEAM TRAP IS A 1/4 IN. BRASS PIPE WITH
2. When the controller is used on a boiler, be sure to 1/4 - 18 NPT EXTERNAL TRHEADS ON BOTH ENDS.
connect a steam trap (siphon loop) between the
controller and the boiler. 2 FITTING ON BELLOWS HAS 1/4-18 NPT EXTERNAL THREADS
ON 0 TO 16 OZ/SQ. IN. AND 0 TO 15 PSI MODELS; INTERNAL
3. Before installing controller, be sure the siphon loop THREADS ON ALL OTHER MODELS. SOME MODELS ARE
has enough water in it to fill lower trap. ALSO AVAILABLE WITH 1/4-19 BSP-TR INTERNAL THREADS;
SEE TABLE 1.
4. Use pipe compound sparingly to avoid clogging the M23884
hole in the pipe or bellows fitting.

5. Do not tighten the controller by hand by holding onto Fig. 2. Approximate dimensions in in. (mm) for mounting
the case and turning it. L91 Pressuretrol® Controller beside Pressure Gauge on
Steam Trap (Siphon Loop).
Location and Mounting
When used with steam boilers, always mount the controller Mounting Beside a Pressure Gauge
above the water line in the boiler. A steam trap (siphon loop) To mount the controller beside a pressure gauge (Fig. 2),
must always be connected between the controller and the remove the gauge. In its place, install a steam trap (siphon
boiler (Fig. 2) to prevent boiler scale and corrosive vapors from loop) with a tee on top. Using elbows and pipe nipples, mount
attacking the bellows. Before installing controller, be sure the the controller and pressure gauge on the ends of the tee.
siphon loop has enough water in it to fill lower trap.
The controller can be mounted (1) beside the pressure gauge,

Mounting on a Boiler
(2) in a fitting on the boiler provided by the manufacturer, or (3) If it is not convenient to mount the controller beside the
at a remote location in case of excessive vibration. pressure gauge, install a steam trap (siphon loop) in the fitting
provided by the boiler manufacturer. If there is no fitting, mount
Make all pipe connections in accordance with approved the steam trap at a location recommended by the boiler
standards. Use only a small amount of pipe compound to seal manufacturer. Screw the controller directly to the steam trap, if
the connection joints. Excess pipe compound may clog the possible.
small hole in the fitting and prevent the controller from
operating properly. Mounting at a Remote Location
To avoid leaks and damage to the case, use a parallel jaw If there is excessive vibration at the boiler that may adversely
wrench on the controller fitting. Do not tighten the controller by affect the operation of the controller, mount the controller at a
hand by holding onto the case and turning it. remote location. All piping from the boiler must be suitable and
solidly mounted. The piping must be properly pitched to drain
all condensation back to the boiler. If this causes the controller
to be located at an inconvenient height (on large boilers), it
may be mounted at a lower level if the connecting piping is
filled with clean water. A steam trap (siphon loop) must be
mounted between the remote piping and the controller.
5 60-2152—08
6. Refer to Fig. 4 for typical hookup. W and B connections

may be interchanged at the motor for reverse action
ACTION ON
PRESSURE FALL (cooling). Follow the burner or boiler manufacturer’s
W B
wiring diagram if provided. Also refer to the wiring
diagrams in the motor instructions.
R
7. Replace the front cover when wiring is completed.
1
W L91 PROPORTIONING SERIES 90
CONTROLLER MODULATING MOTOR
B M9484
R W1 CLOSED M9494
(LOW FIRE)
1 W R1
B OPEN
B1
(HIGH FIRE)
L91A,B 2
T1 T2
ACTION ON
PRESSURE FALL
W B TRANSFORMER
1 WIPER MOVES TOWARD W END OF 3
R POTENTIOMETER ON PRESSURE RISE,
AND TOWARD B END ON
PRESSURE FALL. (HOT) L1 L2
W
2 TERMINALS ARE LABELED.
REAR POTENTIOMETER
B
3 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND
OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. M8520A
R
1
ACTION ON W Fig. 4. Hookup of L91 Proportioning Pressuretrol®
PRESSURE FALL
Controller to Series 90 Modulating Motor.
W B
B
Setting
In all models, the proportioning range (also called throttling
range) extends above the main scale setpoint (Fig. 5). The
FRONT POTENTIOMETER proportioning range is fixed on L91A models, but is adjustable
L91D on L91B,D models. (For values, refer to Table 1 in the
1 TERMINALS ARE LABELED. M8522A Specifications section.)
Fig. 3. L91 terminal blocks and internal schematics. Main Scale Set Point (All models)
Adjust the main scale setpoint for the desired operating
pressure by turning the main scale adjusting screw (Fig. 7) or
WIRING knurled adjustment knob on 10 to 300 psi (0.07 to 2.07 MPa)
models, on the top of the case, until the main scale setting
indicator is at the minimum pressure desired. The
1. Disconnect power supply before beginning installation to
proportioning range extends above this value. The scaleplate
prevent electric shock and equipment damage. All wiring
is marked in both customary (oz/sq in., psi, or in. Hg) and
must comply with applicable electrical codes,
metric (kPa, MPa, or mm Hg) units.
ordinances, and regulations. Use NEC Class 1 (line
voltage) wiring.
2. For normal installation, use moisture-resistant No. 14 Use of L91 Proportioning Controller with
wire suitable for at least 167°F (75°C) if you are using Limit Controllers
the controller with a flame safeguard primary control, or
The L91 main scale setpoint plus the value of the differential
at least 194°F (90°C) if you are using it with a program-
(proportioning range) must be less than or equal to the limit
ming control.
controller’s (L404) main scale setpoint.
3. For high temperature installations, use moisture-
resistant No. 14 wire, selected for a temperature rating For example, to control system pressure between 70 and 80
above the maximum operating temperature. psi: select an L91B, 5-150 psi operating range, adjustable
4. Disconnect the power supply before beginning wiring to differential (proportioning, throttling range) of 5 to 23 psi and an
prevent electrical shock and equipment damage. L404A, 10-150 psi, adjustable differential of 8 to 16 psi. Set the
5. All models have a terminal block inside the cover (Fig. 3) L404A main scale setpoint at 80 psi and its adjustable
and two 7/8 in. (22.2 mm) holes in one side for 1/2 in. differential at 10 psi. The L404A settings will then provide boiler
conduit, cable, or wires. Remove the front cover by loos- pressure limit control between 70 and 80 psi. An L91B
ening the screw at the bottom of the scaleplate. differential (proportioning range) pressure of 5 psi is desired.
Therefore, an L91B main scale setpoint of between 70 and 75
psi is required (L91 main scale setpoint plus its differential
must be less than or equal to the limit controller main scale set
60-2152—08 6
point). The L91B settings provide system modulation between

70 and 75 psi or between 75 and 80 psi, depending on the
MAIN SCALE PROPORTIONING RANGE
exact setting of the L91B main scale setpoint. ADJUSTING ADJUSTING SCREW (L91B,D ONLY)
SCREW
CONTROLLER
Due to device tolerances, the scaleplate settings are 1 POTENTIOMETER
approximate and, therefore, the settings should be fine-tuned
with the system operating. WIPER ARM(S)
Proportioning Range (L91B,D Only) PROPORTIONING

Adjust the proportioning range (throttling range) by turning the RANGE
proportioning range adjusting screw (Fig. 6) on the top of the SCALEPLATE
(L19B,D ONLY)
case until the proportioning range setting indicator is at the
desired value. The proportioning range scale is graduated from
PROPORTIONING
A to F with a MIN (minimum) value below A. The value of each RANGE SETTING
division depends on the operating range of the controller. Refer INDICATOR
(L91B,D ONLY)
to Table 2 in the Specifications section.
TERMINAL BLOCK
MAIN SCALE
Typical Operation SETTING
INDICATOR BELLOWS
Pressure variations cause the bellows to expand or contract. HOUSING
Linkage between the bellows and the potentiometer wiper

causes the wiper to move across the potentiometer windings.
This varies the resistance between R and B, and between R MAIN
SCALEPLATE
and W, causing an unbalance in the circuit connected to the
controller. See Fig 7. 1 KNURLED ADJUSTMENT KNOB ON 10 TO 300 PSI
[0.07 TO 2.07 MPa] MODELS. M8525
W
Fig. 6. Setting L91 Proportioning Pressuretrol® Controller.
LOW-FIRE
(CLOSED)
A proportioning controller is used most often to regulate the
firing rate of a burner by controlling a modulating motor (Fig. 4)
PRESSURE or a modulating valve. The controller potentiometer, the
RISE
PROPORTIONING feedback potentiometer in the motor (or in the valve actuator),
RANGE and a balancing relay in the motor (or actuator) form an electric
1 R POTENTIOMTER bridge circuit. As long as the pressure of the controlled medium
(WIPER)
remains at the setpoint of the controller, the circuit is balanced;
2
that is, equal the relay contacts are open. When the circuit is
MAIN SCALE balanced, the motor (or actuator) does not run.
SETPOINT
HIGH-FIRE If the pressure of the medium rises, the wiper in the controller
(OPEN)
moves toward W. This unbalances the circuit, so a larger
B
current flows through one side of the balancing relay. The
1 FIXED ON L91A; ADJUSTABLE ON L91B,D.
close contacts in the relay make, causing the motor (or valve
2 L91D HAS TWO POTENTIOMETERS OPERATING IN UNISION. M8519A actuator) to drive toward its closed position. As the motor (or
actuator) runs, the wiper on the feedback potentiometer moves
in a direction to balance the circuit. When the circuit is again in
Fig. 5. L91A,B,D operating points. balance, the balancing relay contacts open and the motor (or
actuator) stops. The valves and dampers connected to the
motor or actuator will be partially closed, decreasing the firing
rate and reducing the pressure.
Similarly, if the pressure of the controlled medium falls, the

wiper on the controller potentiometer moves toward B, and the
open contacts in the balancing relay make. The motor (or
actuator) drives toward its open position until circuit balance is
achieved. The valves and dampers will be opened wider and
the firing rate will increase, thus increasing the pressure.
A small change in the pressure of the controlled medium will
cause a change in the firing rate to compensate for it, thus
keeping the pressure constant. This process is called
modulation.
7 60-2152—08
CHECKOUT
MAIN SCALE PROPOTIONING
ADJUSTING SCREW RANGE ADJUSTING
After the controller is installed, wired, and set, it should be SCREW
1
tested with the system in operation. First, allow the system to (L91B,D ONLY)
stabilize. Then, observe the operation of the controller while
raising and lowering its setpoint. Pressure should increase
when the setpoint is raised and decrease when the setpoint is
lowered. Use accurate pressure testing equipment when
checking out the controller. Do not rely on inexpensive gauges. MAIN SCALE MAIN DIFF.
The controllers are carefully calibrated at the factory. SETTING 16

14
7
6
F
INDICATOR 12 E
5
10 D 2
Make sure the modulating motor or modulating valve actuator 8
4
3
C
6
reaches the low- and high-fire positions at the proper points. If 4 2
1
B
A
R
2
the motor or actuator runs in the proper direction when the 0 0
MIN
W
setpoint is adjusted, assume that the controller is operating OZS
IN
2
kPa
DIFF. IS
ADDITIVE
B
properly. If it runs in the wrong direction, reverse the B and W
wires. Observe the action of the motor or actuator until it
stabilizes. If the motor or valve is moving constantly, widen the
proportioning range (not adjustable on an L91A) incrementally
until the system is stable.
If a Controller Seems to Operate

Improperly OHMMETER
If the controller is suspected of operating improperly, it may be
further checked by:
INPUT OUTPUT
1. Leaving the controller installed where it is, but discon-

SETPOINT
necting all power to the controller motor or valve. 135
INCREASE
0
2. Loosening the cover screw below the main scaleplate
and removing the cover.
3. Disconnecting the wires from the controller.
4. Connecting an ohmmeter between controller terminals B W R B
and W to measure the resistance for the potentiometer in
the controller. The ohmmeter should read about 135 ZERO
ADJ
ohms for an L91A,B, or D.
5. Connecting the ohmmeter between controller terminals
W and R (Fig. 8) and raising the setpoint of the controller INCREASES TO
3
above the actual pressure being measured. The ohmme- 135 OHMS
ter should read the full value of the potentiometer mea- 1 KNURLED ADJUSTMENT KNOB ON 10 TO 300 PSI [0.07 TO 2.07 MPA]
sured in step 4 (135 ohms for an L91A,B, or D). MODELS.
6. Slowly lowering the setpoint of the controller while 2 TERMINALS ARE LABELED
observing the ohmmeter reading. The resistance should
drop to zero at some setpoint below the actual pressure. 3 135 OHMS ON L91A,B OR D. M8546A
7. Making an approximation of the proportioning range by

observing the change in setpoint required for a resis- Fig. 7. Checking L91 Proportioning Pressuretrol®
tance change from zero to full value. Controller.
8. When the controller is operating properly, reconnecting
the wires, replacing the cover, tightening the cover
screw, and resetting the controller to the desired value.
9. Reconnecting power to the controlled motor or valve. CAUTION
Failure to follow checkout instructions can damage
components or systems.
Do not put the system into service until you have
satisfactorily completed all applicable tests described in
this Checkout section, all tests in the Checkout section
of the applicable instructions, all tests for the flame
safeguard control, and any tests required by the burner
and boiler manufacturers.
60-2152—08 8
SERVICE INFORMATION Replacing the Controller

Potentiometer (Fig. 8–10)
CAUTION IMPORTANT:
1. Replace the controller potentiometer only when nec-
Electrical Shock Hazard
1. Only qualified service technicians should attempt to essary to obtain proper operation.
service or repair flame safeguard controls and 2. When replacing the potentiometer, be very careful not
burner systems. to bend or damage the wiper arm, and not to change
2. Disconnect power supply before cleaning the the wiper tension. Any damage or change in tension
potentiometer windings or wiper, or before replacing will decrease the life of the new potentiometer.
the controller potentiometer.
1. Disconnect all power to the controller.
2. Loosen the cover screw below the main scaleplate and
Calibration remove the cover.
All controllers are carefully tested and calibrated at the factory 3. Mark the wires to the external device (motor or valve
under controlled conditions. If the actual operating pressure actuator) and disconnect them from the terminal block.
does not match the setpoint, move the main scaleplate slightly 4. Remove the screw holding the terminal block bracket to
up or down until the setpoint agrees with the actual pressure. the top of the case (Fig. 8). Put this screw in a safe place
because it will be needed later.
5. While careful not to damage the potentiometer wiper or
Maintenance any of the internal wiring, lift out the terminal block and
Keep the cover of the controller in place at all times to protect bracket.
the internal components from dirt, dust, and physical damage. 6. Before removing any potentiometer wires, carefully note
Perform routine maintenance occasionally by inspecting and and record (sketch) the position (off-center) of the active
blowing or brushing away any accumulated dirt and dust. To winding on the potentiometer and the location and con-
assure proper functioning of the controller at all times, perform nections of all wiring terminals. The new potentiometer
an operational check of the entire system during routine must be inserted and connected the same.
maintenance checks. Be sure to handle controllers carefully at
the time of installation, during actual use, and during Example: In Fig. 9, the active winding is on the left half of
maintenance. the potentiometer; the wire from the left end of the wind-
ing is connected to the (W) terminal on the terminal
block, and the wire from the right end of the winding is
Cleaning the Potentiometer Windings connected to the (B) terminal on the terminal block.
or Wiper 7. Loosen the (W) and (B) screws on the terminal block,
Occasionally, the windings or wiper on the potentiometer (two and remove the two wires to the active winding of the
on the L91D) may need cleaning. Disconnect the power supply potentiometer. Leave the wire to the wiper arm intact.
before removing the cover from the controller and before 8. Carefully unscrew the bolt that holds the potentiometer
cleaning the potentiometer. to the bracket. Make sure the potentiometer wires do not
entangle with the wiper and bend it.
IMPORTANT 9. Carefully slide the old potentiometer off the bolt.
1. Use an electrical contact cleaner that does not con- 10. Carefully slide the bolt through the new potentiometer.
tain solvents. Make sure that:
2. Use extreme care to avoid bending the wiper arm, a. The off-center position of the winding on the new
changing the wiper tension and damaging the potenti- potentiometer is the same as the old potentiometer.
ometer windings. (Consult sketch in step 6.)
3. Do not use an abrasion or burnishing tool to clean the b. The wiper will contact bare wires. (Rotate the potenti-
potentiometer windings or wiper. ometer on the bolts so the surface of the winding
4. Do not use hard paper, such as a business card, or where the brown enamel was removed is toward
abrasive materials (sandpaper, emery boards, file, you.)
etc.) to clean the windings or wiper. 11. Screw the bolt into the potentiometer bracket. Make sure
the wiper is contacting bare wires (step 10.b); then
Solvent-type electrical contact cleaners can deteriorate plastic tighten the bolt.
components and wire insulation and leave an oily residue that 12. Connect the two potentiometer wires to the (W) and (B)
accumulates particulate matter (dust, etc.). The residue can terminals on the terminal block and tighten the screws.
break down to form various carbonaceous substances that Make sure these wires are connected to the same termi-
cause early potentiometer failure. nals as in the old potentiometer. (Consult sketch in step
6.)
Use of abrasive materials results in wearing of the 13. Carefully fit the hole in the bottom of the terminal block
potentiometer windings and accumulation of particulate matter bracket over the screw protruding upward from the bot-
that changes the resistance between the windings and the tom of the case (Fig. 10). Insert the screw (removed in
wiper. step 4) through the hole in the top of the case (Fig. 8)
and into the top of the bracket, and tighten it.
14. Reconnect the wires from the external device (motor or
actuator) to the terminal block.
15. Replace the cover and tighten the cover screw.
16. Reconnect power to the controller.
9 60-2152—08
REMOVE BRACKET SCREW

FROM TOP OF CASE
TERMINAL MAIN DIFF.

16 7
TERMINAL
BLOCK F
14 6 BLOCK
BRACKET 12 E
10
5
D
BRACKET
MAIN DIFF.
4
16 7 8 C
F 3
14 6 6 B
12 E 4 2
5 A
10
4
D 2 1 TERMINAL
MIN
8
3
C 0 0 R BLOCK
6 B kPa
4 2
TERMINAL OZS
2
DIFF. IS W
A IN ADDITIVE
2 1
0 0
MIN BLOCK B
OZS kPa
DIFF. IS
2
IN ADDITIVE
FIT HOLE IN BOTTOM

OF BRACKET OVER SCREW
PROTRUDING UPWARD
M8521A
FROM BOTTOM OF CASE
M8548A
Fig. 8. Removing terminal block bracket.

Fig. 10. Replacing terminal block bracket.
ACTIVE WINDING
BARE WIRES
POTENTIOMETER (ENAMEL REMOVED)
BRACKET 1
POTENTIOMETER
BOLT
WIPER ARM
MAIN DIFF.
16 7
14 F
6
12 E
5
10 D
4
8 C
3
6 B
4 2
A
2 1 TERMINAL
MIN
0 0 R BLOCK
kPa
OZS
2
DIFF. IS W
IN ADDITIVE 2
B
POTENTIOMETER WIRES
1 THE POTENTIOMETER IN AN L91A IS MOUNTED AT A 45 DEGREE

ANGLE INSTEAD OF HORIZONTALLY. AN L91D HAS TWO
POTENTIOMETERS.
2 TERMINALS ARE LABELED.

M8547A
Fig. 9. Replacing potentiometer in L91.
60-2152—08 10
11 60-2152—08
Automation and Control Solutions

Honeywell International Inc.
Golden Valley, MN 55422
Honeywell Limited-Honeywell Limitée

35 Dynamic Drive
® U.S. Registered Trademark
Toronto, Ontario M1V 4Z9 © 2009 Honeywell International Inc.
60-2152-—08 K.K. Rev. 12-09
customer.honeywell.com Printed in U.S.A.
133-L404-604
9A
PARKER BOILER CO.
HONEYWELL L404 AND L604 PRESSURE CONTROLS
The Honeywell L404 and L604 Pressuretrol Controllers are line voltage pressure controllers used for Operating Control and
High or Low Limit protection, either manual or auto reset, for pressure systems up to 300 PSI. They are used to sense
steam or oil pressure on Parker Boilers. L404 and L604 Pressure Controls feature dust-proof, trouble-free mercury (except
L404F which has a snap-acting switch). Automatic reset models have an adjustable, subtractive differential. Manual Reset
models have a trip-free mechanism that cannot be defeated by jamming lever, with a minimum fixed differential. All models
have a clear plastic cover so that pressure settings, switch adjustments and the leveling indicator can be observed. All
adjustments are made by screws on top of case. A 1/4-18 NPT internal thread is located on the bottom for connection to the
sensing tubing. L404A and L404C SPST contacts break on pressure rise. L404V SPST contacts make on pressure rise.
L404F and L604A have DPST contacts, R-W makes and R-B break on pressure rise. All models are Underwriters
Laboratories Inc., Listed.
RATINGS FOR STANDARD MODELS

MIDSCALE SUBTRACTIVE MAXIMUM SURGE
MODEL OPERATING RANGE PSI DIFFERENTIAL PSI* PRESSURE PSI
L404A 2 to 15 1 to 5 50
L404C * 5 to 50 4 to 12 85
L604A 10 to 150 8 to 16 225
20 to 300 15 to 40 500
L404F1102 10 to 150 10 to 22 225
L404V1046 25 to 150 8 to 16 225
*L404C Models are Manual Reset with fixed minimum differential.
SETTING AND CHECKOUT
SETTING (See Sheet SPC 101-105-I-V for actual pressure settings.)

In all models, the differential is subtractive from the main scale set point. The upper operating point is determined by the
main scale set point, while the lower operating point is determined by the main scale setting less the differential setting. The
L404F and L604A (with jumper installed), have SPDT switching action.
Adjust the main scale set point for the desired operating pressure by turning the main scale adjusting screw (Fig. 1) on the
top of the case until the main scale setting indicator is at the desired value. On an L404A,F with a 5 to 150 PSI operating
range, or an L604A, adjust the differential setting by turning the differential adjusting screw (Fig. 1) until the differential setting
indicator is at the desired value. (L404C is a manual reset model; see the next paragraph).
TRIP-FREE MANUAL RESET FEATURE (L404C)
The L404C breaks when the pressure rises to the main scale set
point. They will not return to their former positions automatically. To
reset one of these controllers, wait until the pressure falls to the set
point minus the differential. Then depress the manual reset lever
(Fig. 1) and release it. The controller will not be reset until you
release the manual reset lever. This prevents the controller from
becoming an automatic-reset device if the reset lever is stuck, held
in, or tied down.
CHECKOUT
After the controller has been installed, wired, and set, it should be
tested with the system in operation. First allow the system to
stabilize. Then observe the operation of the controller while raising
and lowering its set point. Pressure should increase when the set
point is raised and decrease when the set point is lowered.
Also check the make and break points of the controller. If they do not
agree with a separate, accurately calibrated pressure gauge, a slight
adjustment of the scaleplate(s) may be necessary.
Use accurate pressure testing equipment when checking out the
controller. Do not rely on inexpensive gauges. The controllers are
carefully calibrated at the factory.
Fig. 1 - Setting a Pressuretrol Controller

133-L404-604
9A
BOILER INSTALLATION
1. If the controller is being used on a boiler installation, test it as
follows:
2. Note the boiler pressure by checking the boiler pressure gauge.
(To perform this test properly, the boiler should have a pressure
reading near the middle of the controller's main scale range.)
3. Turn the main scale adjusting screw (Fig.1) until the main scale
setting indicator on the controller corresponds to the boiler
pressure gauge reading.
4. The L404A or L404C should break the control circuit(s)
automatically when the boiler pressure gauge reading equals or
slightly exceeds the controller setting.
5. The L404F should make the R-W circuit and break the R-B
circuit under the same circumstances.
6. The L604A should make the R1-W circuit and break the R2-B
circuit under the same circumstances.
7. If the controller is operating properly, turn the main scale
adjusting screw (Fig.1) until the main scale setting indicator is at
the desired set point.
IF A CONTROLLER SEEMS TO OPERATE IMPROPERLY
If the controller is suspected of operating improperly, it may be
further checked as follows (Fig.2).
1. Disconnect all power to the controller, loosen the cover screw,
and remove the cover. Fig. 2 - Checking Controller
2. Disconnect the wires from the controller. Operation Using an Ohmmeter
3. Connect an ohmmeter between the switch terminals.
4. Lower the set point of the controller (simulating a pressure
increase) through a range greater than the differential. The
switch should either make or break, depending on the model of
the controller. (An L404A or L404C should break, an L404F;
should break R-B and make R-W, and an L604A should break
R2-B and make R1-W.) If it makes, the ohmmeter will read zero;
if it breaks, the ohmmeter will read infinity.
5. Raise the set point of the controller (simulating a pressure
decrease) through a range greater than the differential. The
switch should break or make, just the opposite of its action in
step 4 (except the L404C, manual reset model).
6. If the controller operates improperly, replace it.
NOTE: An approximation of the differential can be made by
observing the change in set point required for a resistance
change from zero to infinity.
7. When the controller is operating properly, reconnect the wires to
the terminal block, replace the cover and tighten the cover screw, Fig. 3 - L404 & L604 Terminal
and reconnect the power. Blocks and Internal Schematic
CAUTION
Do not put the system into service until you have satisfactorily completed
all applicable tests described in this Checkout section, in the Checkout
section of the applicable instruction sheet for the flame safeguard control,
and any others required by the burner and boiler manufacturers.
SERVICE INFORMATION
CALIBRATION MAINTENANCE
The controller was carefully calibrated during manufacture and The cover of the controller should be in place at all times to
should not require recalibration. Most calibration errors are protect the internal components from dirt, dust, and physical
caused by improper leveling. The controller should be level if damage. Routine maintenance should consist of occasional
the point on the leveling indicator is directly over the index mark inspection and blowing or brushing away any accumulated dirt
(Fig. 1). In some cases, the leveling indicator may not be and dust. To ensure proper functioning of the controller at all
accurate enough. The pointer may be over the index mark, but times, an operational check of the entire system should be
the controller still may not be operating within the tolerance of performed during routine maintenance
its scale setting. In this case, loosen mounting screws and
adjust level of control.
127 CB 70
8C
PARKER BOILER CO.
CB 70 BALL VALVE
NOTE: All Apollo Conbraco blow-off valves furnished by Parker

Boiler are cast bronze bodies spec B62.
The CB 70 Series are ball valves with brass bodies and a "blow-out
proof" stem. The handle turns to full "open" or "closed" position
with quick quarter turn.
The CB 70-100 valves are rated for 157 PSI steam service and are
used as blowoff valves and water feed line stop valves (if
furnished) on boilers up to 125 PSI working pressure. The CB 70-
100 and 70-100-C with pressure taps are approved for use as gas
cocks on Parker Boilers. The CB70-100 is built with a chrome
plated brass ball, solid Teflon seats, brass stem, and Teflon stem
packing. CB 70-100
The CB70-140 valves are rated for 250 PSI steam service and are used as blowoff valves and water feed line
stop valves (if furnished) on boilers up to 200 PSI working pressure. The CB 70-140 is built with a special
polished stainless steel ball, multi filled Teflon seats, stainless stem, and high temperature stem packing.
The valves are also suitable for many other varied applications including water column drain valves, pump
suction stop valves and water gauge glass valves.
1. Fast Full Opening: The valve is a ball type valve which opens fully with only a quarter turn of the valve
handle. The easy, fast opening feature has been an advantage in the type of blowdown recommended on
Parker Boilers for thoroughly flushing the unit. It has a larger port area than most plug type valves or other
ball valves which assures a more complete blowdown.
2. Blow-Out Proof Stem: The valve is built so that it is impossible for the stem to blow out the top of the valve.
3. Maintenance Free: This valve will provide reliable service without requiring costly maintenance, lubrication,
or adjustment. No lubrication is required for life of the valve.
4. Easy to Operate: The design of the valve with the Teflon seats and smooth ball assures that it will remain
exceptionally easy to operate while in service. The ball is machined to a micro-smooth finish and chrome
plated or polished to assure free-turning and a self-cleaning action as the ball wipes clean when opened.
5. Compact Size: The valve is smaller in size than most boiler blow-off valves and can usually be screwed in
the boiler blowdown line without having to disconnect piping when the boiler is installed on the floor.
6. Two-Way Flow: The valve is designed for flow in either direction to eliminate any danger of improper
installation.
7. Quality Construction: The valve is constructed with a rugged brass body, ball, Teflon seats, stem seals
and a vinyl insulated steel handle. The stuffing box has take-up to compensate for wear and the valve
features an improved lever assembly with nut to hold securely.
NOTE:
The A.S.M.E. Code requires that the blow-off valve and water feed line stop valve on steam boilers be rated for
a pressure at least 25% higher than the safety valve setting. For these services the CB70-100 Ball Valve,
rated 157 PSI, may be used on boilers through 125 PSI working pressure and the CB70-140 Ball Valve, rated
250 PSI, on boilers through 200 PSI. For pressure above 100 PSI, a slow-opening blow-off valve is required in
addition to the main fast-opening blow-off valve.
127-CB 70
8C
I. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
This valve must be either "fully open" or "fully closed". Do not throttle with this valve. On complete blowdowns, let the boiler
feed pump run 30 to 60 seconds after blowdown before closing the valve. If the valve does not close freely , do not force,
but let the pump run longer to flush any foreign material through the valve to be sure it is clear to close freely. Always use
caution to avoid touching the valve body and piping as they are very hot.
When this valve is used as the water feed line stop valve, never close the valve when the pump is operating as this will
damage the pump.
The CB 70 Ball Valve does not require lubrication, adjustment or maintenance.
II. VALVE DIMENSIONS & PARTS:
NOTE:
A special service kit is available for field repair of
the valve. The kit includes: teflon stem packing,
two teflon seats, and with 1 1/4 through 3" size, one
teflon body seal.
70-100 157# 70-140 250#

SIZE A B C D E CV SERVICE KIT SERVICE KIT
1/4* 3/8 1-1/32 2-1/16 1-3/4 3-7/8 6.8 70-001-01 70-001-64
3/8* 3/8 1-1/32 2-1/16 1-3/4 3-7/8 6.8 70-002-01 70-002-64
1/2* 1/2 1-1/8 2-1/4 1-13/16 3-7/8 9.8 70-003-01 70-003-64
3/4* 11/16 1-1/2 3 2-1/8 4-7/8 25 70-004-01 70-004-64
1 7/8 1-11/16 3-3/8** 2-1/4 4-7/8 35 70-005-01 70-005-64
1-1/4 1 2 4 2-5/8 5-1/2 47 70-006-01 70-006-64
1-1/2 1-1/4 2-3/16 4-3/8 2-7/8 5-1/2 81 70-007-01 70-007-64
2 1-1/2 2-11/32 4-11/16 3-1/16 5-1/2 105 70-008-01 70-008-64
2-1/2 2-1/2 3-1/4 6-1/2 4-1/8 8 440 70-009-01 70-009-64
3 2-1/2 3-3/8 6-3/4 4-1/8 8 390 70-010-01 70-010-64
*Not available 70-100-C with pressure taps

**4-3/8" CB70-100-C with pressure taps
127 CB 70.DOC
BULLETIN 127-SV
0E1
PARKER BOILER CO.
CONBRACO & KUNKLE STEAM SAFETY VALVES
These steam safety valves are a high capacity type specifically designed for boilers where high relieving capacity in a small size
valve is desired. The valve size can be frequently reduced due to the high capacity of these valves in comparison to other types.
This results in lower initial cost and a potential savings to the customer on replacement of other types. The schedule on Page 2
shows the standard size and model of valves used on Parker Boilers packaged steam.
ADVANTAGES OF HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY VALVES

1. Soft Teflon Seats, which greatly reduce seat leakage problems are standard on all models.
2. Precision Wound, Calibrated Springs are used to provide stability of performance and
uniform blowdown. The spring is aligned with washers to center the spring on the disc. This
assures accurate relief at the set pressure, eliminating leakage before proper pressure is
obtained.
3. Double Guided Combination Adjusting Ring and Disc Guide provide better alignment
between seat and disc, ease of blowdown adjustment and finer valve operation.
4. Fine Adjustment, Lower Adjustment Rings allow sharp, clean opening and closing
without simmer and valve dribble.
5. Precision Manufacture and Quality are prerequisites in these Valves.
SELECTION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

1. Select the valve of the proper pressure rating and rated pound discharge capacity to
accommodate the particular boiler. The minimum required relieving capacity for valves on
ASME Section I ‘S’ Code boilers shall not be less than the maximum designed steaming
capacity as determined by the Manufacturer. The required minimum relief valve capacity
for a Parker ‘H’ Code 15 P.S.I. water tube boiler is determined by multiplying the heating
surface in sq. ft. times 10. For example, a boiler with 50 sq. ft. heating surface requires a
safety valve with 500 lbs. per hour discharge capacity.
2. The safety valve set pressure must never be in excess of the MAWP pressure stamped on the boiler. For high pressure
boilers, the maximum boiler operating pressure must always be at least 10% below (but not less than 7 PSI below) the safety
valve set pressure to prevent leakage. For low pressure boilers (15 PSI valve set pressure), the maximum boiler operating
pressure must be at least 4 PSI below the safety valve set pressure to prevent leakage. Failure to maintain this operating gap
can result in an accumulation of deposits on the seating surface, which may impede proper operation of the safety valve.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1. Install the safety valve in a vertical upright position at the opening provided and recommended by the manufacturer as close to
the boiler as conveniently possible. No shutoff valve or other connections or restrictions are permissible between the boiler and
the safety valve. The safety valve piping and opening from the boiler cannot be less than the inlet size of the valve, but the
valve inlet may be smaller than the boiler outlet providing the safety valve has the required relieving capacity.
2. The safety valve is a precision made instrument and should be handled with care. Before installing be sure that:
(a) All upstream pipes and connections have been blown clean.
(b) Pipe compound is used on external threads only.
(c) Inlet port of valve is free of any foreign material.
(d) Use wrench on valve inlet hex only and avoid over tightening. Do not use a pipe wrench.
3. Do not cap or plug drain hole in the side of the valve body.
4. TO AVOID WATER DAMAGE OR SCALDING DUE TO VALVE OPERATION, A DISCHARGE PIPE MUST BE
CONNECTED TO THE VALVE OUTLET AND RUN FULL SIZE TO A SAFE PLACE OF DISPOSAL. IF A DISCHARGE
PIPE IS NOT INSTALLED CORRECTLY, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COULD RESULT. The
discharge line must be piped independent of all other piping, as short and straight as possible, without any intervening valve of
any description and terminate freely to atmosphere. Never restrict or block a safety valve outlet. Install piping with sufficient
flexibility to allow for free expansion and properly support so there is no strain on the safety valve body. Pipe to a safe point of
discharge to prevent any possibility of personal injury and within 18" from the floor or into an open receptacle protected by a
splash shield. If discharge cannot be piped to a completely safe location in the boiler room, such discharge should be piped
outside the room to a safe location. Have adequate provision for draining condensate at discharge outlet. If piped upwardly, a
drain line should be provided at the low point to keep this line drained. Secure the piping so it cannot move to cause personal
injury when safety valve discharges. If piping is considerable distance, install a union near the safety valve outlet for
convenience of changing valve when required. Use schedule 40 pipe only for discharge line (do not use schedule 80, extra
strong or double extra strong discharge pipe or connections).
BULLETIN 127-SV
0E1 PARKER BOILER CO
CONBRACO & KUNKLE STEAM SAFETY VALVES
I. MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR
1. Safety valves should be regularly inspected and kept in good repair. Replace valves on indication of leaks or
deterioration.
2. The Code may require, and it is recommended that the safety valve be tested periodically, at least every month. Test
also at the beginning and end of any extended non-service period. CAUTION: Prior to testing, make certain that all
personnel are clear from area and that the outlet of valve is properly piped to a safe point of discharge (see Installation
Instructions, Page 1). A loud noise and high velocity steam will discharge freely from discharge port and through drain
hole provided in the side of valve body. Test lever is designed to be activated only when 75% or more of the popping
pressure is reached, otherwise distortion could result. The valve should be tested at or near maximum operating
pressure by holding the test lever fully open for approximately 5 seconds to flush the valve seat free of any debris or
sediment then permit valve to snap shut. If the valve leaks, raise and lower the handle slowly and be sure the valve
properly reseats. If valve continues to leak, shut down boiler and replace valve before placing boiler back in service.
3. It is recommended that a spare valve be kept on hand for immediate replacement.
II. SCHEDULE OF VALVES USED ON PARKER BOILERS

HIGH PRESSURE 'S' CODE LOW PRESSURE 'H' CODE
BOILER MODEL
MIN. RELIEVING CAP. = MAX. STD.'V' VALVE STD. 'HV' VALVE
MINIMUM RELIEF VALVE
HORSEPOWER
DESIGNED STEAMING CAP. lb/hr 100 PSI & ABOVE CAPACITY lb/hr 15 PSI ONLY
102-1-1/2 PARKERETTE 52 1/2" 6021D-1/2-** 160 3/4" 13-211-08
102-3 PARKERETTE 104 1/2" 6021D-1/2-** 199 3/4" 13-211-08
101-5 U-DRUM 173 3/4" 19-302-** 380 3/4" 13-211-08
103-7 H-DRUM 242 3/4" 19-302-** 470 3/4" 13-211-08
101-8 U-DRUM 276 3/4" 19-302-** 510 1" 13-202-08
103-9.5 OR 10 H-DRUM 345 3/4" 19-302-** 680 1-1/4" 13-213-08
101-9.5 OR 12 U-DRUM 414 3/4" 19-302-** 670 1-1/4" 13-213-08
103-15 H-DRUM 518 3/4" 19-302-** 825 1-1/4" 13-213-08
101-16 U-DRUM 552 3/4" 19-302-** 900 1-1/4" 13-213-08
103-20 H-DRUM 690 1" 19-402-** 1060 1-1/4" 13-213-08
101-22 U-DRUM 759 1" 19-402-** 1290 1-1/2" 13-214-08
103-25 H-DRUM 863 1" 19-402-** 1320 1-1/2" 13-214-08
104-30 H-DRUM 1035 1-1/4" 19-502-** 1720 1-1/2" 13-214-08
101-30 U-DRUM 1035 1-1/4" 19-502-** 2030 2" 930-2-15
104-40 H-DRUM 1380 1-1/4" 19-502-** 2320 2" 930-2-15
101-40 U-DRUM 1380 1-1/4" 19-502-** 2900 2" 930-2-15
104-48 OR 50 H-DRUM 1725 1-1/2" 19-602-** 2780 2" 930-2-15
105-70 H-DRUM 2415 1-1/2" 19-602-** 3490 2-1/2" 930-2-1/2-15
105-90 H-DRUM 3105 1-1/2" 19-602-** (Note1) 4560 3" 930-3-15 (Note2)
105-115 H-DRUM 3968 (2) 1-1/4" 19-502-** (Note1) 5930 (2) 2" 930-2-15
105-150 H-DRUM 5175 (2) 1-1/4" 19-502-** (Note1) 7930 (2)2-1/2" 930-2-1/2-15
Note 1: 90, 115 & 150 HP HIGH PRESSURE BOILERS BEFORE 7/1/97 USED TWO 1-1/2" 19-602-** VALVES.
Note 2: 90 HP LOW PRESSURE BOILERS BEFORE 7/1/97 USED TWO 2" 930-2-15 VALVES.
III. VALVE SPECIFICATIONS

VALVE SIZE RELIEVING CAPACITY POUNDS OF STEAM PER HOUR
MANUFACTURER & MODEL
INLET X OUTLET 15 PSI 100 PSI 125 PSI
3/4 X 3/4" CONBRACO 13-211-08 HV 475 NA NA
1 X 1" CONBRACO 13-202-08 HV 643 NA NA
1-1/4 X 1-1/2" CONBRACO 13-213-08 HV 1,200 NA NA
1-1/2 X 2" CONBRACO 13-214-08 HV 1,900 NA NA
2 X 2" KUNKLE 930-2-15 HV 3,161 NA NA
2-1/2 X 2-1/2" KUNKLE 930-2-1/2-15 HV 4,497 NA NA
3 X 3" KUNKLE 930-3-15 HV 6,942 NA NA
1/2 X 3/4" KUNKLE 6021D-1/2-** V 173 643 712
1/2 X 3/4" CONBRACO 19-202-** V 165 645 787
3/4 X 1" CONBRACO 19-302-** V 310 1,151 1,402
1 X 1-1/4" CONBRACO 19-402-** V 484 1,796 2,189
1-1/4 X 1-1/2" CONBRACO 19-502-** V 794 2,947 3,592
1-1/2 X 2" CONBRACO 19-602-** V 1,238 4,598 5,604
2 X 2-1/2" CONBRACO 19-702-** V 2,033 7,549 9,202
BUL127SV.doc
PARKER STEAM BOILER BULLETIN ISCS 101-5
INSTALLATION & START-UP CHECK-OFF SHEET Page 1 of 4 0H3
FACILITY
COMPANY/ADDRESS:
BOILER MODEL NO.:
FUEL: SALES ORDER NO.
SERIAL NO.:
PHONE: DATE:
CONTACT: INSTALLING CONTRACTOR:
I. GENERAL
A thoroughly qualified and experienced Boiler and Burner Technician should be employed to provide the initial boiler start-up, as
well as any subsequent servicing. If boiler is a Power Burner or Low NOx Burner System, then use this sheet in addition to sheets
for start-up and tuning of Powered or Low NOx Burners.
A representative of the Owner and/or person or persons responsible for operating and maintaining the unit should be present during
the initial start-up to assume responsibility for gas, water, electrical and vent systems. A Service Representative may also be
required by the local utility on gas fired equipment. Instructions regarding the proper care and maintenance of the unit should be
outlined with these people present. In some States or Jurisdictions it is required that the Boiler Inspector be notified or present
before start-up.
Before beginning start-up, the start-up technician should thoroughly study installation instructions and become completely familiar
with the exact sequence of operation and boiler controls. This should include review of wiring schematic, and the Boiler Gas Train
components.
II. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
1. Hand tools 4. Barometric damper weights 7. Combustion Analyzer Required
2. Gas pressure gauges 5. Gas line soap test solution - if Low NOx or Power Burner
3. Draft gauge 6. Volt meter
III. BOILER INSTALLATION YES NO REMARKS
1. Required Installation Permits obtained on boiler, electrical, vent,
gas and plumbing.
2. Boiler installed on a concrete floor or non-combustible base.
3. Boiler installed in approved room and properly protected from
weather and drafts. Insure no flammable materials or fumes are in
room or can enter room.
4. Boiler installed in accordance with manufacture's instructions and
code, adequate space for accessibility to inspect and service. Proper
control panel access and clearance.
5. Proper air openings provided conforming to Code and
Manufacturer's instructions.
6. Insure no negative pressure in room. If any sort of exhaust fans are
present in boiler room, insure that boiler draft is not affected. Draft
inducer and engineered flue system may be required.
7. Provisions for proper boiler Water Treatment and water softening.
8. Proper electrical service to boiler with disconnect per Code and
proper feed pump wiring per diagram.
9. Proper earth ground connected to green ground screw in Parker
panel by Electrician.
10. Chemical feed pump wired properly.
11. Safety valve type, setting and capacity, is appropriate and correct
for boiler.
12. Safety valve discharge independently piped full size with Sch. 40
pipe, discharging to safe location. Pipe properly supported and
union provided.
13. Safety valve body drain piped to safe location.
14. Draft hood or barometric damper installed on boiler.
15. Flue gas spillage switch mounted and wired if (provided).
16. Vent stack full size with proper height and termination point.
17. Unrestricted vent cap on top to protect from weather and down
drafts. Stack Termination meets code.
BULLETIN ISCS 101-5 PARKER STEAM BOILER
Page 2 of 4 0H3 INSTALLATION & START-UP CHECK-OFF SHEET
III. BOILER INSTALLATION - continued YES NO REMARKS

18. Vent stack weight properly supported (not on boiler).
19. Vent stack is installed in accordance with Local Code Regulations
for proper fire protection.
20. Check gas devices for proper venting, provide goosenecks.
IV. RETURN TANK INSTALLATION YES NO REMARKS
1. Return Tank vent connected to outside proper size.
2. Tank overflow and drain opening connected to safe drain. Shut off
valve on drain line.
3. Soft water inlet to tank proper size with union, and line shut-off
valve. Provision for filling chemical feed tank with soft water.
4. Tank float valve adjusted for proper level and tested for correct shut-
off.
5. If water pressure exceeds 70 PSI, pressure reducing valve installed.
6. Water line to pump one pipe size larger than pump discharge with
suction stop valve and strainer installed.
7. Pump properly aligned. Confirm wiring to feed pump motor is
correct per nameplate and wiring diagram.
8. Check valves properly installed near pump discharge and boiler with
proper pressure rating.
9. Is recommended pump relief device installed and properly piped?
10. Stop valve properly installed in water feed line near boiler with
proper pressure rating.
V. BLOWDOWN TANK INSTALLATION YES NO REMARKS
1. Blowdown Tank proper size and to Manufacturer’s
recommendations and Local Code requirements.
2. Proper size vent upward to safe point of discharge.
3. Blowdown line full size in accordance with Manufacturer’s
specification. Pipe to be Sch. 40, black steel with 125 PSI minimum
fittings for boilers up to 100 PSI. For pressures over 100 PSI Sch.
80 black steel pipe, forged steel fittings.
4. Blowdown Tank outlet proper size and piped to sump and safe point
of discharge.
5. Blowdown Tank clean out (drain) proper size with valve and piped
to sump and safe point of discharge.
6. Blow-off valve properly installed on each blowdown connection and
near boiler.
7. On pressure exceeding 100 PSI, additional slow opening blow-off
valve properly installed.
8. Drain line from bottom of water column connected to Blowdown
Tank.
9. All blowdown and drain piping in accordance with Code and good
safety practices.
10 Gravity or cold boiler drain piped to floor sink.
VI. START-UP YES NO REMARKS
If boiler is a Low NOx system or Power Burner Model, refer to additional Supplemental Start Up Sheets in addition to this sheet.
1. Notify Boiler Inspection Jurisdiction if required.
2. Tighten all electrical terminals, conduit and linkages.
3. All boiler gas valves turned off.
4. System installer, plumber, owner and/or Gas Co. technician shall if
safe turn on gas at meter and bleed air from gas line to proper safety
standards if required to allow safe gas flow to boiler.
5. Gas pressure and service line proper size.
6. Shut-off valve with handle and union ahead of boiler.
7. Gas line blown out, thoroughly cleaned, tested for leaks. Install gas
pressure gauges of proper ranges upstream and at burner manifold
downstream test tap.
PARKER STEAM BOILER BULLETIN ISCS 101-5
INSTALLATION & START-UP CHECK-OFF SHEET Page 3 of 4 0H3
VI. START-UP – continued YES NO REMARKS

8. Gas pressure at test opening on boiler inlet to Manufacturer's
specifications, and Boiler Nameplate. LPG Models require 1-5 PSI.
9. Insure boiler steam valve is closed.
10 Remove cabinet door on pilot side.
11. Check burners for proper position on orifices.
12. Open water supply and boiler feedwater valves. Never operate the
boiler feed pump with any valve in the suction or discharge
piping closed as this will damage the pump. Check for water and
proper float valve level in return tank.
13. Check electrical wiring per wiring diagram. With Boiler Control
Switch off - turn on electricity to boiler if safe - hot switched black
wire should read 115 VAC to ground, neutral white wire should read
O VAC to ground. (Not applicable if 3 Phase power is provided.)
14. With Main Burner Switch off, turn Boiler Controls Switch on.
Pump will be energized. Check pump for proper start, stop and
rotation.
15. With blow-off valves and gravity drain valve open, let pump run 3-5
minutes or until water shows good volume and clean. When clean,
shut blowdown and drain valves, fill boiler.
16. Check water level control for proper pump shut-off at slightly above
center of glass.
17. Insure no personnel are near boiler door. Note: flame rollout could
occur on cold boiler start up so insure safety of all present. Light
pilot - see Lighting Instructions.
18. With pilot safely "on", open main downstream gas cock at boiler.
Check burners for smooth light.
19. Check burners for bad burning or burning on orifice.
20. Re-light boiler. Check ignitor and flame light-off system for proper
operation. Replace cabinet door.
21. Close pilot valve and try and re-light boiler. Check for flame failure
lockout.
22. On flame safeguard controls where flame signal can be monitored,
record pilot and main flame signals.
23. Soap test all gas lines and tubing with boiler firing. Repair leaks.
24. Set high fire gas pressure. Record setting . See “Maximum
Manifold Pressure” on heater label and tables. Confirm that
Pressure holds with all appliances firing. Check gas inlet pressure
also.
25. Set operating control to desired steam pressure. Adjust differential
to suit job conditions.
Off point PSI . Differential PSI.
26. Check operation of high limit control, setting PSI.
27. Adjust firing rate control i.e. modulating control or high low control
to suite job conditions. Record low fire gas pressure " W.C.
Caution: Never set low fire gas pressure below recommended
ranges.
MANIFOLD GAS PRESSURE AND DRAFT REFERENCE TABLE
MODEL GAS PRESSURE DRAFT

HIGH LOW DRAFT HOOD BAROMETRIC
MAXIMUM MINIMUM
Atmospheric Natural Gas Boilers 4.0” 1.0" 0.01” – 0.02” 0.04” – 0.06”
LPG Atmospheric Boilers 18" 11" 0.01” – 0.02” 0.04” – 0.06”
9.5 LA 5.6-6.0" NA 0.01” – 0.02” 0.04” – 0.06”
30LA, 40LA, 50LA 5.6-6.0" 4.0" 0.02” – 0.04” 0.04”– 0.06”
BULLETIN ISCS 101-5 PARKER STEAM BOILER
Page 4 of 4 0H3 INSTALLATION & START-UP CHECK-OFF SHEET
VI. START-UP - continued YES NO REMARKS

28. Check all electrical interface points i.e. remote start-stop, alarm dry
contacts, alarm, run status if provided as shown on wiring diagram.
Insure interface voltages are correct.
29. Insure that no wires have been connected to panel which will by
pass any safety controls or interfere with proper boiler operation.
Any relays switching burner control circuit wiring must be
electromechanical type, rated 115VAC, 8 AMP as a minimum.
30. After insuring Blowdown System is safe, open main blow-off valve
and test to see if low water cut-off shuts off main burner when water
reaches near bottom of glass. Blow boiler down to 0 pressure and
refill. Insure secondary low water cut-off requires manual reset to
fire boiler.
31. Set and test low gas pressure switch (if present) setting "
W.C.
32. Set and test high gas pressure switch (if present) setting "
W.C.
33. Check operation of flue gas and heat spill switches (if present).
34. Check operation of IRI vent valve (if present). Insure discharge is
to safe location with rain and bug protection. Establish Program to
continually monitor this valve.
35. With boiler firing and boiler room doors closed, check vent for no
flue leaks or spillage.
36. If barometric damper is furnished, adjust draft per table with
barometric damper weights. Insure free damper movement and
double nut barometric damper weights. If draft hood, insure proper
draft record setting " W.C.
37. Blowdown boiler and refill until blowdown discharge water is clear.
38. Check entire Steam and Condensate Return System for proper
installation with proper piping, valves, traps, supports, insulation
and provision for expansion.
39. Check with Owner that steam system is complete, safe and ready for
operation. If safe, open main steam valve slowly and check out
entire system for leaks and proper operation.
40. Check Return Tank. Clean and flush as required. Clean strainer.
41. Carefully check entire boiler and approve for no leaks, damage or
defective parts.
42. Replace all gas test point plugs.
VII. FINAL INSTRUCTIONS & RECOMMENDATIONS TO YES NO REMARKS
OPERATOR
1. Review Operating Instructions.
2. Review steps in Starting Boiler.
3. Review Shutdown Instructions.
4. Review Blowdown Instructions.
5. Review Water Treatment Procedure. It is critical to assure proper
boiler life to institute proper program.
6. Review Water Sample Procedure.
7. Review Weekly and Quarterly Maintenance and Inspection Reports.
VIII. LIST ANY ITEMS THAT ARE NOT APPROVED AS SATISFACTORY OR THAT MAY BE QUESTIONABLE:
1.
2.
3.
START-UP PERFORMED BY DATE

W:\Bulletin\101-5\iscs101-5.doc
BULLETIN LNSU-G
Page 1 of 2
0G3
SUPPLEMENT START-UP INSTRUCTIONS

FOR GENERAL PARKER PREMIX METAL FIBER BURNER SYSTEMS
FACILITY
COMPANY/ADDRESS: ___________________
______________________________________ BOILER MODEL NO.: _______________________
______________________________________ FUEL: ________ SALES ORDER NO.
______________________________________ SERIAL NO.: ______________________________
PHONE: _______________________________ DATE:____________________________________
CONTACT: _____________________________ INSTALLING CONTRACTOR: ________________
These supplemental start up instructions must be used in conjunction with the normal Installation and Start Up Check
Off Sheets for Parker Hot Water, Steam or Thermal Fluid Heaters. (Bulletins ISCS101-5, ISCS201, ISCS207 or
ISCS210.)
These instructions are to be followed after the Installation and Check Off Sheet has been completed to the Start Up
Section. The start up portion of ISCS 101-5, ISCS 201, ISCS 207 or ISCS 210) should also be followed in addition to
these instructions (some items may be redundant).
Read complete instructions before proceeding, and familiarize yourself with all the system's components. Verify that
your equipment has been installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's current instructions.
CAUTION: Initial adjustment and light-off should be undertaken only by trained and experienced
personnel familiar with combustion systems, with control/safety circuitry, and with thorough knowledge of
the overall installation.
Start up technician should be familiar with the installation so proper air fuel ratios can be set, check the permit
conditions so NOx and CO values can be set to satisfy the job requirement. Combustion Analyzer with NOx, CO and
O2 measurement is required.
1. GENERAL THEORY OF PREMIX SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

A. Determine the required emission levels on subject boiler by the terms of it's Permit to Operate or as
appropriate. If not known refer to sample settings. Take final combustion readings with a warmed up boiler.
Perform adjustments and analysis as follows:
B. Note that combustion readings on Parker Premix Metal Fiber Burner Systems can be affected by:
1) Gas Volume Flow:
A) Regulator adjustment
B) Maxon cam adjustment.
By decreasing the amount of fuel by a gas pressure reduction or by closing the Maxon Butterfly valve
(i.e. screw out on Maxon Allen cam) the O2 level at that firing position will be increased and the NOx
decreased. If gas pressure is increased or Maxon Butterfly opened, opposite effect occurs.
C) By decreasing the fuel flow the flame may tend to blow out and CO may result. Increase fuel to alleviate
CO.
2) Air Volume Flow:
A) By opening the air shutter or butterfly valve or raising the speed of the fan, air flow will increase and
usually NOx will decrease and CO will increase. Note: Variable speed systems will automatically adjust
through ratio control valve.
BULLETIN LNSU-G
Page 2 of 2
0G3
3) Draft Adjustment: By decreasing draft on boiler O2 levels will be lowered and NOx increased. By
increasing draft opposite effect occurs. Add weights to barometric damper to increase draft. Always check
high fire heat roll out around cabinet bottom when setting draft.
C. Adjust for maximum efficiency lowest oxygen level while still holding NOx and CO below the terms of the
Permit to Operate or as appropriate. Look for blue flame not orange, or radiant glowing. Note approximate
sample settings.
___D. If the boiler sits for prolonged periods at low fire in the radiant mode (rich fuel mixture, High NOx) burner
damage may occur. Normal system adjustments can be accomplished by adjusting either the L91 Pressure
Trol, the Modulating Control or Hi-Low Control on the boiler to insure that the boiler will purge, light, drive
towards high fire, return towards low fire and then shut off.
___E. Perform final combustion analysis with a warmed up boiler at High, Medium and Low fire. Note sample
point for flue gas is below draft control. In addition to print out from Combustion Analyzer, also record the
following:
2. GENERAL SAMPLE SETTINGS (USE AS A GUIDE)

1. NOx @ 3% O2 15-27 PPM thru all firing rates.
2. CO @ 3% O2 less than 100 PPM thru all firing rates (Less than 12 PPM on some models).
3. O2: High fire % Med fire % Low fire %
Sample Settings: High fire 6-8.5 % Med fire 7-10 % Low fire 8-13.5 %
4. Gas Pressure at blower inlet: High fire "W.C. Med fire "W.C. Low fire "W.C.
Sample Settings: High fire 3 - 5 "W.C. Med fire 4 - 6.5 "W.C. Low fire 4 - 7 "W.C.
5. Premix Manifold Press: High fire "W.C. Med fire "W.C. Low fire "W.C.
Sample Settings: High fire .5 - 2.8 "W.C. Med fire .4 - 2.4 "W.C. Low fire .4 - 1.6 "W.C.
6. Maxon Position: High fire Med fire Low fire
Sample Settings: High fire 1/2 step down from maximum Low fire Position 4 to 6
(Check for proper rotation) Record RLA or FLA on Motor ________ and Service Factor ____________
o o
2. AT THIS POINT, REFER TO SPECIFIC START-UP SECTION FOR SYSTEM START-UP SECTION FOR
SYSTEM 1,2,3,4, OR 5.
BULLETIN VFD-SKP
Page 1 of 4
0B9
SUPPLEMENT START-UP INSTRUCTIONS
SYSTEM 4
VARIABLE SPEED APPLICATION
POST MIXING "LVFD" SYSTEM
"L" NOx SYSTEMS
FACILITY
COMPANY/ADDRESS:_________________________
____________________________________________ BOILER MODEL NO.: ____________________________
____________________________________________ FUEL: __________ SALES ORDER NO.
____________________________________________ SERIAL NO.: ___________________________________
PHONE:_____________________________________ DATE:_________________________________________
CONTACT: __________________________________ INSTALLING CONTRACTOR: _____________________
These supplemental start up instructions must be used in conjunction with the normal Installation and Start Up Check Off Sheets
for Parker Hot Water, Steam or Thermal Fluid Heaters. (Bulletins ISCS 101-5, ISCS 201, or ISCS 207.)
These instructions are to be followed after the Installation and Check Off Sheet have been completed to the Start Up Section.
The start up portion of ISCS 101-5, ISCS 201 or ISCS 207 should also be followed in addition to these instructions (some items
may be redundant).
Read complete instructions before proceeding, and familiarize yourself with all the system's components. Verify that your
equipment has been installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's current instructions.
CAUTION: Initial adjustment and light-off should be undertaken only by trained and experienced personnel
familiar with combustion systems, control/safety circuitry, and with thorough knowledge of the overall installation.
Start up technician should be familiar with the installation so proper air fuel ratios can be set. Check the permit conditions so
NOx and CO values can be set to satisfy the job requirement. Combustion Analyzer with NOx, CO and O2 measurement is
required.
SUPPLEMENTAL START-UP INSTRUCTIONS
SYSTEM 4
SENSING TUBE GAS/AIR RATIO CONTROL
REGULATOR & SHUT OFF
VALVE
GAS SUPPLY
ELECTRICAL MANUAL
SHUT OFF GAS COCK
Parker's Premix Combustion System VALVE
CONTROL
PRESSURE OR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
BLOWER
PREMIX METAL BOILER
FIBER BURNER TUBES TEST SPEED
COCK CONTROLLER
VFD
(Wired to
Blower Motor)
GAS AIR INLET

GAS & AIR ORIFICE
MIXTURE

PARKER PREMIX BURNER SYSTEM
PREMIX3.DWG
For "L" Systems Initial Premix Metal Fiber Burner System Start-up: Y N
1. Check all electric circuitry. Verify that all control devices and interlocks are operable and functioning within their
respective settings/ranges. Be sure all air and gas manifolds are tight and that test ports are plugged if not being
used. Tighten all terminals and conduit. Refer to normal start-up sheets
2. All boiler gas valves turned off.
3. Notify Boiler Inspection Jurisdiction if required.
4. Remove cabinet door on pilot side.
5. Insure that all burners are straight and level. Insure that no shipping damage has occurred.
BULLETIN VFD-SKP
Page 2 of 4
0B9
For "L" Systems Initial Premix Metal Fiber Burner System Start-up: (continued) Y N
6. Look for dirt or metal flakes on burner surface. If present blow off with air, or vacuum burners with soft brush.
7. Insure carryover tube, ignitor & flame rod or scanner are in proper position.
8. Check Blower for solid mounting, motor firmly bolted to base, shaft in proper position, shaft tight on impeller,
check all bolts for tightness. Unit supported off floor if required, outlet bolts tight.
9. Insure that stack or roof jointing compound or sealant is not present inside stack so if heat is applied to stack no
sealant will drip onto burners.
10. Gas line blown out, thoroughly cleaned, tested for leaks. Install gas pressure gauges of proper ranges upstream and
at gasorfice inlet test tap.
11. System installer, plumber, owner and/or Gas Co. technician shall if safe turn on gas at meter and bleed air from gas
line to proper safety standards if required to allow safe gas flow to boiler.
12. Gas line size proper.
13. Shut-off valve with handle and union installed ahead of boiler.
14. Gas pressure at test opening on boiler inlet to Manufacturer’s specifications.
15. On Steam Boilers open water supply and boiler feedwater valves. Never operate the boiler feed pump with any
valve in the suction or discharge piping closed as this will damage the pump. Check for water and proper float
valve level in return tank. (see ISCS 101-5).
16. For Hot Water Boilers, Water Heaters or Thermal Fluid Heaters insure proper circulation.
17. Check electrical service or services to boiler voltage and phase as they must match nameplate and wiring diagram.
Incoming wires must land on proper terminals. If incorrect voltage is connected to boiler, damage may result.
Do not apply power to boiler.
18. Confirm proper disconnect (s) and Fusingo .
19. With boiler control switch and main burner switch off, apply power to boiler and reconfirm voltage.
20. With Boiler Control Switch off, turn on electrical to boiler if safe, hot lead (black wire) should read 115 VAC to
ground, neutral white wire should read O VAC to ground. (Not applicable if 3 Phase power is provided.) Check for
proper voltage and disconnet.
21. Turn Boiler Controls Switch, on. Main Burner Switch, off. On Steam Boilers pump will be energized. Check
boiler feed pump for proper start, stop and rotation. Fill and flush boiler (see ISCS 101-5).
22. Check low water cutoff control or controls for proper installation and operation. Test for proper manual reset
function.
23. Open upstream main gas cock. Downstream gas valve and pilot gas valve closed. Reset gas pressure switches if
required.
24. Verify all pressure tap lines off of the Siemens SKP 70 are and tight and in proper position.
25. Confirm power to VFD drive by ---- on LED.
Siemen’s SKP 70 Operation Theory and Adjustment
The Siemens SKP70 & variable speed drive fan provides a gas air ratio controlled system for the Parker burners & manifold.
These components work together to provide a reliable and repeatable Low NOx Burner System. With this system, the fan speed is
regulated based on pressure or temperature of the boiler. As fan speed is changed, the Siemens SKP70 ratio control valve senses the
presssure in the premix manifold and adjust gas flow accordingly.
The VFD (Variable Frequency Drive) provides fan motor soft start, speed control, overload protection, digital readout of fan
speed & diagnostics. Refer to O & M manual for the drive & Bulletin 123ACTECH.
Note that the VFD is the heart of the system and the proper parameters for that particular model of boiler have been pre-
programmed into the drive at the Parker Factory. Do not apply power to the drive more than twice per minute. If the drive has sat
idle, unpowered for over a year, do not attempt to run the boiler. The drive must be reformed. Refer to Drive O & M Manual.
When a call for heat is experienced in the boiler, the flame safeguard will signal for fan to start. When this
occurrs, the faceplate of the VFD will start to ramp up to the proper low fire frequency. This controls blower
speed. When first starting the unit, observe LED readout on VFD faceplate. The numbers should gradually
increase to the low fire or light off speed. This is typically 18-30 hertz, depending on boiler model.
BULLETIN VFD-SKP
Page 3 of 4
0B9
The Siemens SKP 70 performs three fucntions. (1) gas pressure regulator (2) safety shutoff valve (3) gas air ratio control.
The pressure ratio and bias adjustment screws are located on top of the regulator under a sealable cover plate. The actual
settings can be seen through windows on each side of the regulator.
Note: The burner capacity is controlled by the fan speed. The combustion quality (air/gas ratio) is controlled by the
settings on the SKP 70 regulator (the +and – indications relate to the change in gas flow). Adjustment in clockwise direction
decreases the gas flow.
(A): Check the reading of the gas to air ratio off the indicator (1). This should be factory set. Normal settings are
between 1.6 to 2.4. Adjust this pressure ratio screw (1) at high fire only or when burner is off. Note gas is added by turning the
screw counter clockwise. This will increase NOx and lower CO.
(B): Check the reading of the bias ratio off of the indicator. It should be factory set at 0.1 to -0.1. Adjust the bias screw
at low fire only. Note the bias screw provides a fine tune of the gas air ratio and is an added or subtracted value.
(C): Adjust screws based on flue gas analysis. The boiler may have to be ramped to the high and low fire position
several times and adjusted in order to complete combustion adjustments.
(D): Note that the Siemens SKP-70 is only set at the high and low fire positions. In intermediate firing rates, the pressure
ratio is controlled by the valve and the NOx and CO are adjusted automatically.
For “L” Systems Initial Premix Metal Fiber Burner System Start-up: (Continued): Y N
26. With pilot and downstream gas valves shut, flame switchguard run, check switch in the check position and with boiler
controls switch on turn on main burner switch. Watch VFD hertz ramp up slowly and observe fan wheel rotation. If
rotation is incorrect, turn off all power sources and switch 2 wires coming out of the VFD.
27. Insure there is no fan grinding or rubbing or vibration of the blower.
28. Confirm proper rotation. Observe and note low fire or light off blower speed.
29. Turn off all switches, switch flame safeguard to run position. Open cabinet doors on boiler. As flame rollout may occur
on initial boiler firing, insure that no personnel are near boiler area. Insure safety of all present.
30. With pilot and downstream gas valves closed attempt to fire boiler. (I.E. Turn Boiler Controls and Main Burner
Switch on). Boiler should purge and the fan speed will increase to the low fire or light off position. Ignitor should
spark, but no piolt will be established. Check for flame failure lockout.
31. With upstream and pilot gas cocks open and downstream gas valve closed, attempt to light pilot burner. Repeat
procedure as necessary until pilot ignites as air might have to be bled out of fuel supply lines before reliable pilot flame
is established.
32. After pilot ignition before main flame period, turn flame safeguard to check position, adjust pilot flame for good
stable flame. Adjust pilot to give the strongest amd most stable flame signal through flame safety circuit. Normally 6"
W.C. gas pressure is required at pilot. The signal strength (or range) will be determined by the specific type of flame
safeguard you have with your boiler. Check positioning of stringer pilot tubes to insure good carryover form tube to
tube.
For "L" Systems Initial Premix Metal Fiber Burner System Start-up: (Continued): Y N
BULLETIN VFD-SKP
Page 4 of 4
0B9
33. Re-light and refine pilot gas adjustment and light off's as necessary to get reliable pilot ignition. With pilot established,
the flame safeguard should now power your main fuel shut-off valve(s) if (run, check) switch where turned to run
position.
CAUTION: After completing the steps above, re-check all interlocking safety componenets and circuitry to prove
that they are properly installed, correctly set, and fully operational. If in doubt, shut the system down, close gas
valves and contact a responsible individual before proceeding further.
34. Set low fire hold switch to low fire or adjust operating control for low fire hold.
35. Light main burners as follows: First turn off all switches and turn flame safeguard to run position. Pilot & upstream gas
valves open downstream gas valve closed. Cabinet door off. Turn on boiler controls & main burner switch. Pilot will
light, as soon as it does, open downstream gas valve. Open downstream gas within 10 seconds first pilot ignition.
There is a 10 second pilot establishing period and there is a 10 second trial period for main flame establishment. If
boiler does not ignite upon first attempt, observe gas pressure at inlet to orifice. Low fire valves should be between .4 to
1.2" W.C. Increase gas to air ratio slightly (screw counterclockwise on (1) ).
36. Insure gas inlet pressure to boiler holds during the burner main flame trial for ignition.
37. NOTE: At this point, it is more important to get any kind of flame as soon as possible. The flame geometry can
be adjusted and refined as needed later.
38. Cycle boiler at low fire position for assured good light off of all burners.
39. Ensure even flame on all combustion surfaces.
40. Ensure no excessive heat roll-out from cabinet at this point will cause fire sprinkler or smoke alarm to be set off.
Minimize firing with cabinet doors off.
41. Allow boiler to run up to the high fire. Look for blue even flame, not orange. Ensure uniform flame on all burners.
Look for gas leaks.
42. Replace cabinet and door.
43. Again, start boiler and drive it to Hi fire. Check gas pressure and set gas pressure to match boiler nameplate and Bill of
Materials. Confirm high fire hertz. Normally 43-55. Look for blue even flame not orange. Measure O2, CO, and NOx
in the flue gas below draft control. Check draft, adjust ratio screw (1) until optimum NOx and CO values are obtained.
Check gas pressure set NOx to desired valve.
44. After high fire adjustment, return to Low fire and adjust bias screw. (2) To obtain desired flame shape and NOx and CO
values.
45. Set draft for draft hood units 0.01-0.02" W.C. Set draft for barometric damper units to 0.04-0.06"W.C. Always check
high fire heat roll-out around cabinet bottom when setting draft. In some instances, stack blocks may be required.
46. Check hi fire and low fire NOx and CO and move back and fourth between the two firing positions. Perform
adjustments as needed. Adjust bias only at low fire and gas/air ratio screw only at high fire.
47. Allow boiler to reach temperatures and refine adjustments.
48. Record all data as shown in sample settings and combustion analysis form.
49. Plug all test connections not in use to avoid fuel leakage. Replace equipment cover caps and tighten screws.
50. Check out overall system operation by cycling through light-off at low fire and allowing control system to cycle
burner from minimum to maximum and return adjust modulating or hi-low controls. (Note: Manual/auto rate
control operation should be verified at this time.)
52. Re-check all safety system interlocks for proper setting and operation.
WARNING: Test every UV installation for dangerous spark excitation from ignitors and other possible
sources of direct or reflected UV radiation. Use only gas-tight scanner connections.
53. Before system is placed into full service, instruct operating personnel on proper start-up, operation, and shut
down of system. Establish written instructions for their future reference.
54. Completely go through installation and start up check off sheet and include this document as well as
combustion report forms with start up sheet for file copy and owner.
VII. List any items that are not approved as satisfactory or that may be questionable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
W:\Bulletin\Low NOx\LNSU-VFD-SKP.doc
LOW NOx PREMIX TECHNOLOGY
INDUSTRIAL Industrial Packaged Bent Water Tube Steam Boilers
with Heavy Duty Metal Fiber Burners
Gas Fired 70-150 HP - Models 70L-150L
Parker 150 HP Steam Boiler
ADVANTAGES with Low NOx Burner System
The purchase of a Parker Boiler
assures not only the ultimate in
quality and safety but also a com-
105L Steam Boilers 70-150 HP

plete ready to install packaged
unit, including trim with boiler
controls, electrically wired, ready
to connect to the utilities. Every
boiler is thoroughly factory fired
tested.
1. Safety
Our ASME tube bundle is extreme-
ly flexible and offers a long life
with a 25 year warranty against
thermal shock. No Parker Boiler
has ever been known to experi-
ence an internal explosion.
2. Low NOx System

Parker was the first manufacturer
to achieve SCAQMD Rule 1146.2
NOx Certification. Initial installa-
tions began in 1991 and to date
thousands of Low NOx boilers are
on-line providing reliable opera- 5. Low Emission
tion for our customers. Extremely LOW NOx & CO
levels are attained by our Pre-
3. Durable Low NOx Burners mix Burner System. NOx levels
Parker heavy duty premix metal below 20 PPM at 3% O2 and CO 8. Large Heating Surface 10. Ease of Inspection
fiber burners not only provide the levels below 100 PPM are easily A large amount of heating sur- and Repair
lowest emissions possible but obtained, assured & repeated in face provides increased efficiency Any boiler may eventually require
also provide long durable service numerous applications. Many 12 & minimizes chances of scaling. retubing depending on care and
life. PPM units are on line with special Compare ours to the competition. operating conditions. The Parker
burners. is designed with sectional tubes
4. VFD/Premix System 9. Internal Accessibility attached by unions so that sec-
Parker's fully modulating variable 6. Low-Cost Operation and Inspection tions can be easily and inexpen-
speed low NOx burner systems The staggered tubing design pro- Full length cabinet doors can be sively replaced through the cabi-
offer digital electronic set point vides a multi-baffled heating sur- easily removed in a matter of min- net doors with minimum down-
control, VFD blower for reduced face to increase efficiency. utes, making the internal boiler, time. Retubing does not require
electrical energy usage, precise drum, tubes, and burners readily special tools, skills or welding
fuel/air ratio control with no link- 7. Fast Heat-Up accessible. Easy-to-remove gas- as is necessary on most boilers
ages, cams or FGR valves. The boiler requires less than ten keted inspection plugs are pro- designed with rolled tubes.
minutes to heat up to 100 PSI from vided at both ends of every tube.
a cold start which saves a consid- Boiler inspections can be accom-
erable amount of time and fuel. plished quickly and at low costs.
PARKER BOILER CO.
5930 Bandini Boulevard
Los Angeles, CA 90040
Tel (323) 727-9800
Fax (323) 722-2848 INDUSTRIAL
"Never a Compromise for Quality or Safety"
BROCHURE 105L 0E7
PARKER 70-150 HP LOW NOX STEAM BOILERS - MODELS 70L-150L
Top View Top View with optional

Side Mounted Burner System
End View
Side View
STEAM SYSTEM PIPING SCHEMATIC

PARKER STEAM BOILERS WITH PREMIX METAL FIBER BURNER SPECIFICATION SHEET
PARKER LOW NOx STEAM BOILERS Gas Fired 70-150 HP – Models 70L-150L
NO ITEM Model No. 70L 90L 115L 150L

C EQUIVALENT BOILER HORSEPOWER* Horsepower 70 90 115 150
A BTU INPUT - IN 1,000 BTU 1000s BTU/HR 2940 3780 4830 6300
B BTU OUTPUT - IN 1,000 BTU* 1000s BTU/HR 2345 3015 3853 5025
D RATED STEAM CAPACITY FROM AND AT 212°F LB/HR 2415 3105 3968 5175
E HEATING SURFACE SQ/FT 349 456 593 793
Note: High Efficiency (84%) Models designated “LR” are available: Entails addition of Heat Reclaimer (see Bulletin 122-HR)
1WA WIDTH OF CABINET IN. 55
1WB WIDTH OF WATER COLUMN (BEYOND CABINET) IN. 10.5
1WC WIDTH OF PREMIX MANIFOLD (SIDE MANIFOLD, BEYOND CABINET) IN. 19 22
1WD WIDTH OF PREMIX BLOWER (SIDE MANIFOLD, BEYOND CABINET) IN. 28 31
2LA LENGTH OF CABINET IN. 79 97 115 155
2LB LENGTH OF BLOWER BEYOND CABINET IN. 24 30
2LC OVERALL LENGTH IN. 103 121 139 185
3HA HEIGHT OF CABINET (BOTTOM MANIFOLD) IN. 82.25
3HB HEIGHT OVERALL (BOTTOM MANIFOLD)** IN. 117.25 123.25
3HA1 HEIGHT OF CABINET (SIDE MOUNTED BURNER SYSTEM) IN. 72.25
3HB1 HEIGHT OVERALL (SIDE MOUNTED BURNER SYSTEM)** IN. 107 113
4 VENT STACK DIAMETER (BAROMETRIC DAMPER) IN. 18 20 22 26
STD NAT. GAS INLET SIZE (Inlet Press.: 7" W.C., Min. 14" W.C. Max.) IN. 2 2-1/2 NA NA
7A
LPG GAS INLET SIZE (Inlet Press.: 11" W.C., Min. 14" W.C. Max.) IN. 2 NA NA NA
7B STD HIGH PRESS. NAT. GAS OR HIGH PRESS. LPG GAS INLET SIZE/SUPPLY PRESS. 1-5 PSI IN. 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2
9HP STEAM OUTLET SIZE HI PRESS. 60-250 PSI IN. 2-1/2 3 3 FLG
9LP STEAM OUTLET SIZE LOW PRESS. 15 PSI OR LESS. – SPECIAL ORDER IN. 5 FLG 6 FLG
10 WATER INLET SIZE IN. 1-1/2
11A BLOWOFF VALVE SIZE *** IN. (2) 2
11B HEADER BLOW-OFF VALVE SIZES *** IN. (2) 1
12A HP SAFETY VALVE DRAIN SIZE - HIGH PRESS - 100 PSI - STANDARD OUTLET IN. (1)2 (1)2 (2)2 (2)2
12A LF SAFETY VALVE DRAIN SIZE - HIGH PRESS - 15 PSI (“H” STAMP) SPECIAL ORDER OUTLET IN. (1)2-1/2 (1)2 (2)2 (2)2
18 WATER COLUMN DRAIN SIZE IN. 1”
F NET WEIGHT BOILER (APPROX) LBS. 5800 7000 8500 11000
G DOMESTIC CRATED SHIPPING WEIGHT (APPROX) LBS. 6200 7600 9300 12300
H WATER CONTENT GALLONS 105 125 149 250
20A POWER SPECIFICATIONS (3 SEPARATE SERVICES REQUIRED FOR BLOWER & PUMPS),
STARTERS PROVIDED ON PANEL FOR BLOWER & PUMPS
20B BOILER FEED PUMPS (2 STANDARD), HP, VOLTAGE & PHASE DEPENDS
ON BOILER PRESSURE (See Parker Spec. Sheet D-106-C)
20C CONTROLS 115V - 1PH - 60 HERTZ (TRANSFORMER PROVIDED) AMPS 5
21 PREMIX BLOWER HORSEPOWER (3 PHASE) HORSEPOWER 2 3 5 5
MINIMUM LISTED CLEARANCES 12” 48” 12”

TO COMBUSTIBLE CONSTRUCTION cabinet sides and rear cabinet top Baro Damper Chimney Connector
Recommended Clearances for Access: Inspection doors 18” (One inspection door must be 38” for tube removal); Controls 24”; Electrical Panel 30”;
Additional space may be required by Local Codes.
Note: All of the above dimensions are for a standard trim model. Due to continuous improvements, specifications are subject to change without notice.
* All ratings based on feed water at 212˚F and steam at 0 PSIG

** Barometric Damper “Tee on Run” option is available to lower overall height.
*** Pre-Piped to slow open blowoff valve connection if MAWP is over 100 PSI
LOW NOx PREMIX TECHNOLOGY
Industrial Packaged Bent Water Tube Steam Boilers INDUSTRIAL
with Heavy Duty Metal Fiber Burners
Gas Fired 70-150 HP - Models 70L-150L
Parker's Premix Combustion System
Sensing Tube Gas/Air Ratio Control
Regulator & Shut Off Valve
Manual Gas Cock
Boiler Tubes
105L Steam Boilers 70-150 HP
Gas Supply
Electrical Shut Off Valve
Pressure or
Temperature
Test Cock Sensor
Premix Metal Control

Fiber Burner Speed Controller VFD
(Wired To Blower Motor)
Gas & Air
Mixture Blower
Gas Orifice Air Inlet
ADVANTAGES 13. Codes Officials, the International Asso- heating surface at high, low and
The Parker System consists of a All Boilers are built in accordance ciation of Mechanical & Plumb- modulating firing rates provides
burner bed of Heavy Duty Metal with the ASME Power & Heating ing Officials and the Uniform longer tube life by eliminating
Fiber Burners (MFB). Through a Boiler Codes, Sections I & IV. Mechanical Code. concentrated firing on limited
gas/air premix manifold, the burn- Boilers above 15 PSI are furnished tube surface.
ers are linked to a fully modulating with the “S” Stamp and Trim. 14. Even Heat Distribution
blower mixer which offers precise Boilers for 15 PSI are normally Unlike Conventional Power Burner 15. Low Maintenance,
control of combustion through the furnished with the “H” Stamp and Technology, the burner bed pro- Simple Adjustment
full range of modulation. Trim. All Boilers are inspected vides a uniform heat distribution The simplicity of the System with
and registered with the National on all boiler tubes for improved no FGR fan or valve, allows normal
11. Heavy Duty Tubes Board of Boiler and Pressure Ves- heat transfer and boiler efficien- boiler operators to adjust and ser-
Parker tubes are 1-5/16” O.D. 1/8" sel Inspectors. cy. Uniform heat over the entire vice the System.
thick steel, which is heavier than All individual gas and electri-
standard gauge boiler tubing. cal controls are CSA Certified or
Each tube is double-welded to UL Listed.
assure a rugged connection. All Low NOx gas fired models
are ETL Listed as “Industrial and
12. Dry Steam Commercial Gas Fired Packaged
Our large horizontal steam drum Boilers” and certified to UL795.
provides ample steam release All units are provided with trim
area to assure dry steam deliv- and controls to meet ASME CSD-1
ery. No steam separators are standards for “Controls & Safety
required. Devices for Automatically Fired Pictured above is a view through one of the large inspection doors of
Boilers”. In addition, all units also our 150L model. You can see the Low NOx Metal fiber burners firing
meet the standards of the Inter- under our sectional tubes providing even heat distribution to the entire
national Conference of Building heating surface.
PARKER BOILER CO.

5930 Bandini Boulevard
Los Angeles, CA 90040
Tel (323) 727-9800
INDUSTRIAL Fax (323) 722-2848
"Never a Compromise for Quality or Safety"
BROCHURE 105L 0E7

105 GC6 Low NOx

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

105 GC6 Low NOx

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BULLETIN 6002

PARKER BOILER CO.

Please contact the Manufacturer or Representative if any additional information is desired.

PARKER BOILER CO.

NOTICE ON SHIPMENTS AND FIELD SERVICE CHARGES

FOR YOUR PROTECTION, EXAMINE THE GOODS:

GOODS RETURNED WITHOUT PERMISSION WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED FOR CREDIT:

II. FIELD SERVICE:

FOR FACTORY SERVICE:

PARKER BOILER CO.

I. STEPS IN STARTING THE BOILER:

1. CLOSE MAIN AND PILOT GAS COCKS AND WAIT 5 MINUTES.

4. DAILY ROUTINE CHECK ALL SAFETY CONTROLS.

CAUTION: DO NOT MANUALLY HOLD IN FLAME SAFEGUARD; SERIOUS HAZARD RESULTS

II. SHUTDOWN INSTRUCTIONS:

1. Turn off the main burner switch.

III. BURNER FAILURE INSTRUCTIONS:

I. CONTROL POWER ON:

II. WATER SAFE:

III. LIMIT SAFE:

IV. PILOT ON AND BURNER ON:

BURNER CONTROL SYSTEM GC6

1. FLAME SAFETY SYSTEM:

4. ELECTRIC GAS VALVE(S):

5. LOW WATER CUTOFF:

6. LOW WATER ALARM - STANDARD ON 70-150 HP STEAM BOILERS ONLY:

7. PUMP CONTROL & MOTOR STARTING RELAY --STEAM BOILERS ONLY:

8. OPERATING & HIGH LIMIT CONTROLS:

WARNING: ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD ATTEMPT TO STARTUP, ADJUST

STEAM PRESSURE CONTROLS

1. High Limit Control – Honeywell L404 Pressuretrol – Standard All Boilers:

2. Operating Control – Honeywell L404 Pressuretrol – Standard All Boilers:

3. Modulating Control – Superior A21B Regulator:

Standard: Atmospheric Gas Fired Boilers 50 HP and Smaller

STEAM PRESSURE CONTROLS

4. Modulating Control – Honeywell L91 Pressuretrol:

Standard: Atmospheric Natural Gas Fired Boilers 70 HP and Larger

5. High-Low Fire Control – Honeywell L404 Pressuretrol:

Standard: Atmospheric Propane Fired Boilers 15 HP and Larger

6. Operating Control Low Pressure Night Control – Honeywell L404 – Optional:

Natural Gas - 1" W.C. minimum

WATER TREATMENT DO'S & DON'TS

SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR LAUNDRY, DRY-CLEANINGS, OR TEXTILE APPLICATION

W:\Bulletin\Water Treatment\Supplemental inst. for laundry, dry clng, txtle apps.doc

WARNING: DO NOT BE MISLED BY PURCHASING YOUR COMPOUND AT A CHEAPER PRICE OR FROM

1. SAMPLE OF THE RAW WATER SUPPLY.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR WATER SAMPLES

C. Water Samples should be safely packed to prevent breakage.

II. METHOD OF TAKING WATER SAMPLES:

USE CAUTION AND SAFETY AS FOLLOWS:

III. ANALYSIS REPORT:

Please follow the instructions below for check-out and tuning.

I. PRELIMINARY ANALYSIS (REVIEW WITH OWNER)

II. CHECKS & CORRECTIONS

COMMENTS ON INTERNAL & EXTERNAL TUBE CONDITION:

D. CHECK METAL FIBER BURNER & PREMIX SYSTEM CONDITION

COMMENTS ON BURNER CONDITION: ____________________________________________________________

1. Check gas line for leaks.

(Mail Combustion Emission Data to customer.)

TUNE-UP PERFORMED BY:

TECHNICIAN SIGNATURE: DATE

3. Clean thermocouple or flame sensor.

4. Test ignition and plot for smooth light.

II. INSTALLATION AND OPERATING PERMITS: